mansfield road capacity improvements project city of cedar hill

mansfield road capacity improvements project city of cedar hill

SPECIFICATIONS

AND

FORMS OF CONTRACT AND BONDS

FOR

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

CITY PROJECT NO: PW08-0050

PREPARED BY: JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP INC

DATE: MAY 2015

CITY OF CEDAR HILL, TEXAS

285 Uptown Blvd

Cedar Hill, TX 75104

CITY OFFICIALS

MAYOR

Robert K. Franke

COUNCIL MEMBERS

Chris Parvin, Mayor Pro Tem

Stephen Mason

Daniel C. Haydin, Jr.

Clifford R. Shaw

Jami McCain

Wallace Swayze

CITY MANAGER

Greg Porter

Prepared by:

Spenta F. Irani, P.E.

Project Manger

________________________________

Approved by:

Elias K. Sassoon, P.E.

Director of Public Works

City of Cedar Hill

285 Uptown Blvd., Bldg 100

Cedar Hill, TX 75104

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ADDENDA

Section 1: Bidding Documents

Notice to CONTRACTORs

Instructions to Bidders

Bid Form

Non-Collusion Statement

Conflict of Interest Questionnaire

Bid Bond

Section 2: Contract Documents

Standard Form of Agreement (Contract)

Certificate of Insurance

General Instruction for Bonds

Performance Bond

Payment Bond

Maintenance Bond

Section 3: List of Applicable Standard Specifications

Section 4: Special Conditions

Section 5: Special Specifications

Section 6: Technical Specifications

Section 7: Permits

Appendix A Project Details

Figure 1: Project Map

Figure 2: Project Sign Detail

Figure 3: Lakeview Drive Construction Limits

SECTION 1 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS

(The rest of this Page is blank)

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

Sealed bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent will be received at the Government Center of the City of Cedar

Hill until 3:00 PM, June 25, 2015, and then publicly opened and read for furnishing all necessary materials, machinery, equipment, project supervision, and performing all work required for the Reconstruction of Mansfield

Road as detailed in the Specifications and Contract Documents for the project.

All questions regarding the bidding documents shall be addressed to Robert Woodbury, P.E., City of Cedar

Hill (972) 291-5126 Extension 2812.

This project includes the reconstruction of approximately 2.2 miles of roadway from West of Anderson Road to

West of W. Beltline Road in the City of Cedar Hill, Dallas County, Texas. As an alternate, the project also includes repair of Lakeview Drive from Mansfield Road to Lake Ridge Parkway in City of Cedar Hill, Dallas

County, Texas. The Engineer’s estimated construction cost for this project is approximately $20 million.

A Mandatory Pre-Bid Meeting will be held on June 16, 2015 at 1:00 PM at Cedar Hill Government Center,

285 Uptown Blvd., Cedar Hill, Texas 75104, Multipurpose Court Room. The Pre-Bid Meeting will be followed by a Mandatory Project Site Visit on the same day.

Proposals shall be accompanied by a cashier's or certified check upon a national or state bank, or savings and loan in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total maximum bid price, payable without recourse to the City of Cedar Hill (herein the “OWNER”), or a bid bond in the same amount from a reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract and execute performance bond and payment bond within ten

(10) business days after notice of award of contract to the CONTRACTOR. The notice of award of contract will be given by the OWNER within ninety (90) calendar days following the opening of bids.

The successful bidder must furnish a performance bond upon the form provided in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price and a material and labor payment bond upon the form provided in the amount of 100 percent of the contract price from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety, or other surety or sureties acceptable to the OWNER.

The right is reserved, as the interest of the OWNER may require, to reject any and all bids, and to waive any informality in bids received.

Plans, specifications and bidding documents may be obtained at MS Dallas, 2300 Reagan Street, Dallas, TX

75219. Non-refundable charges for the set are as follows: Full Size - $450 per set; Half Size - $150 per set;

PDF on a CD - $10 per CD. Bidder should contact MS Dallas 214-521-7000, 24 hours in advance of picking up the set. At pick up the bidder is required to sign and log their information on the plan holders list for the project.

CITY OF CEDAR HILL, TEXAS

By s/ Robert K. Franke

Robert K. Franke, Mayor

Advertisement Dates:

1 st

Advertisement: May 21, 2015

2 nd

Advertisement: May 28, 2015

3 rd

Advertisement: June 4, 2015

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders which are defined in the Standard Specifications for Public

Works Construction - North Central Texas, Fourth Edition, as prepared by the North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) and the Supplementary Conditions of Agreement have the meanings assigned to them in these General Conditions. The term "Bidder" means one who submits a Bid directly to OWNER, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a bid to a Bidder. The term "Successful Bidder" means the lowest, qualified, responsible Bidder to whom the OWNER (on the basis of the OWNER's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. The term "Bidding Documents" includes the Notice to CONTRACTORs,

Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids). Specific defined terms are:

OWNER: Wherever the word "OWNER" is used in the specifications and Contract Documents, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Cedar Hill, Texas.

ENGINEER: Wherever the word "ENGINEER" is used in the specifications and Contract Documents, it shall be understood as referring to the staff of Jacobs Engineering Group Inc.

INSPECTOR: The authorized representative of the City of Cedar Hill assigned to observe and inspect any or all parts of the work and the materials to be used therein.

The City of Cedar Hill plans to reconstruct a 2.2-mile section of Mansfield Road from west of Anderson

Road to west of West Beltline Road. The existing two-lane roadway would be expanded to provide a median-separated, four-lane roadway with bike lanes, and adjoining hike and bike trail and sidewalks.

The project will include enhanced landscaping along with a signature interchange at Lake Ridge Parkway.

Repair of Lakeview Drive from Mansfield Road to Lake Ridge Parkway is also included in this project as an alternate. The location of this roadway is shown on the cover of the contract drawings. The specific procedures for landscaping and other non-standard items are included in the Special Conditions Section of this Contract Document. In addition, where applicable, all construction activities shall be done in accordance with NCTCOG and Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 2004 specifications, the

City of Cedar Hill’s Design Manual and Standard Construction Drawings and as per instructions of the

OWNER. All construction sequencing and barricading will be done according to the City of Cedar Hill

Standards and Details and the Texas Manual for Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD).

3.

Copies of Bidding Documents.

3.1 Plans, specifications and bidding documents may be obtained at MS Dallas, 2300 Reagan Street, Dallas,

TX 75219. Non-refundable charges for the set are as follows: Full Size - $450 per set; Half Size - $150

per set; PDF on a CD - $10 per CD. The following general requirements pertain to the Bidding

Documents:

A. Questions addressed to the ENGINEER shall be submitted no later than 10:00 AM on June 22, 2015.

No bidding documents (addenda) will be issued later than 5:00 PM on June 23, 2015.

B. After award of the Contract, the successful Bidder will be furnished five (5) sets of half size (11”x17”)

Contract Drawings and Specifications at no charge.

C. Bidding documents may be examined free of charge at the offices of the Public Works Department, City of Cedar Hill, 285 Uptown Blvd., Cedar Hill, Texas, 75104.

D. Bidder shall purchase a set of bidding documents and be on the Plan Holder list in order to bid this project.

3.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing Bids; the City of Cedar Hill assumes no responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding

Documents. No partial sets of plans, specifications or proposal forms will be issued.

3.3 The OWNER, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant for any other use.

The Bidder shall submit within five (5) business days of the OWNER's request such evidence as the OWNER may require to establish his financial responsibility, experience and possession of such equipment as may be needed to prosecute the work in an expeditious, safe and satisfactory manner. The required information to be submitted shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following:

A. Current Project Experience.

A list of all projects presently under construction by the bidder including approximate cost and completion date shall be submitted upon request.

The Bidder shall submit a list of comparable projects completed within the previous five years including approximate cost(s), quantities, and completion date(s). Provide a list of at least five (5) recent project references. Include contact name, address, and phone number.

C. Equipment.

The Bidder shall provide a list of equipment which will be used on this project.

The Bidder shall demonstrate that he has adequate equipment to complete this project, properly and expeditiously and shall state what additional equipment, if any, that he must rent/lease as may be required to complete this project.

D. Financial.

Each Bidder shall be prepared to submit upon request of the OWNER a balanced financial statement with no evidence of threatening losses as evidenced by an audited certified financial statement (current within the last six (6) months of bid date). This information will be used to confirm that the Bidder has suitable financial status to meet obligations incidental to performing the work.

The Bidder shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the OWNER that he has the technical experience to properly complete this project. The Bidder shall furnish a list of sub-contractors, including work relationships and past project experience with the Bidder.

F. Proof that the bidder maintains a permanent place of business.

No member of the City Council or any officer or employee of the OWNER shall have a financial interest, direct or indirect, in any contract with the OWNER, nor shall be financially interested, directly or indirectly, in the sale to the OWNER of any land, or rights or interest in any land, materials, supplies or services. The CONTRACTOR represents that no member of the City Council, employee or officer of the

OWNER has an interest in the CONTRACTOR.

The CONTRACTOR represents that no employee or officer of the City has an interest in the

CONTRACTOR.

6. Examination of Contract Documents and Sites.

6.1 Access to the sites shall be from the street and right-of-way at the respective intersections. The

CONTRACTOR (Bidder) shall be fully and solely responsible for providing necessary and adequate barricades in accordance with the City of Cedar Hill requirements. Prospective Bidders shall respect all public facilities and private properties. It is the responsibility of each Bidder before submitting a Bid, to: (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the sites to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify ENGINEER of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. Failure to make these examinations shall in no way relieve any Bidder from the responsibility of fulfilling all of the terms of the contract, without additional cost to the OWNER.

6.2 The location and depth of existing utilities shown on the plans are approximate and may not include all utilities within the site. All existing structures, improvements, and utilities shall be located and adequately protected, at the sole cost and expense of the CONTRACTOR, from damage that might otherwise occur due to construction operations. Where construction comes in close proximity to existing structures or utilities, or if it becomes necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions, it shall be the

CONTRACTOR's responsibility to notify and cooperate with the utility or structure owner. The

CONTRACTOR shall be fully and solely responsible for verifying locations and depths sufficiently in advance of construction such that necessary adjustments may be made to allow for the proper installation.

The CONTRACTOR shall be liable for damage to any utilities resulting from the construction of this project.

6.3 The core soil borings and geotechnical reports are available for review for the convenience of the contractor. The contractor shall be responsible for any additional soil or geotechnical information required for the construction of the project. Copies of the geotechnical report are included in the CD of bid documents.

6.4 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which

Bidder deems necessary to determine its Bid for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents.

6.5 On request in advance, OWNER will provide each Bidder access to the sites to conduct explorations and tests as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the sites to its former conditions upon completion of such explorations.

6.6 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by CONTRACTOR in performing the Work are identified in the Contract documents.

6.7 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Article 6, that without exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the

Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work.

7. Interpretations and addenda.

7.1 Any questions regarding interpretations or clarifications or any other aspect of the bid shall be submitted in writing to the OWNER. Only questions addressed by formal written Addenda will be binding.

Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. Questions received less than three (3) days prior to the date for opening of Bids shall not be answered. Each Bidder shall acknowledge on the bid proposal that all Addenda issued have been received.

7.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the OWNER.

7.3

Should a bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from, the plans, specifications, or contract documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the ENGINEER in order that a written addendum may be sent to all bidders.

8.1 All work shall be complete within the Working Day count required by the Bid Summary. The Working

Day count shall commence ten (10) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

8.2 Prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposed schedule for the work included herein and shall submit any major revisions to this schedule as the project progresses. Contractor shall also submit an updated schedule with critical path events with each application for payment. This schedule shall provide for completion and list of critical events of the project within the time provided in the specifications.

8.3 Extension of the contract time shall be based on a Change Order or written amendment as specified in Item

108.8 of the General Provisions.

8.4 BIDDER agrees that all work awarded will be completed within 400 Working Days excluding inclement

weather days. Should an inclement weather day occur, the CONTRACTOR will submit written documentation to the Construction Inspector assigned by the City for review and acceptance. If the request is approved, additional day(s) will be added to the Contract Time using procedures outlined in 8.3 above.

Contract time will commence to run as provided in the Contract Documents.

9.

Substitute or "Or-Equal" Items.

The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by CONTRACTOR if acceptable to ENGINEER and OWNER,

application for such acceptance will not be considered until after the Effective Date of the Agreement. No substitutions should be considered during the bidding process.

10.

Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.

10.1 The OWNER requests the identity of any Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or organizations to be submitted to the OWNER in advance of the specified date prior to the Effective Date of the

Agreement, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall within seven (7) business days after the request submit to the OWNER a list of all such Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work for which such identification is requested. An experience statement shall accompany such list with pertinent information regarding similar projects, past working history and relationships with the Bidder and other evidence of qualification for each such Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization if requested by the OWNER.

If the OWNER, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization, may, before the Notice of Award is given, request the apparent Successful

Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute in which case the apparent Successful Bidder shall submit an acceptable substitute. Bidder's Bid price may be increased (or decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and the OWNER may consider such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the contract award.

If the apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the OWNER may award the contract to the next lowest and acceptable Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, other persons and organizations. The declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security of any Bidder.

10.2 No CONTRACTOR shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person or organization against which CONTRACTOR has reasonable objection.

In selecting an architect, engineer or land surveyor, etc., to provide professional services, if any, that are required by the specifications, Bidder shall not do so on the basis of competitive bids but shall make such selection on the basis of demonstrated competence and qualifications to perform the services in the manner provided by Section 2254.004 of the Texas Government Code and so shall certify to the City of Cedar Hill with its bid. (Please attach certification to submitted bid).

The blank spaces in the Bid Form shall be filled in for each item for which a quantity is given and the Bidder shall state the price for which he proposes to do each item of work. All blanks on the bid form must be completed in ink or typed. No substitutions, revisions, or omissions from the plans and/or specifications will be accepted unless authorized in writing by the OWNER.

13. Provision Concerning Escalator Clauses.

Bids containing any condition which provides for changes in the stated bid prices due to increase or decrease in the costs of materials, labor, or other items required for this project, may be rejected and returned to the

Bidder without being considered.

The quantities listed in the Bid Form will be considered as approximate and will be used for the comparison of bids. Payments will be made to the CONTRACTOR only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the contract. The quantity of work to be done and the materials may be increased or decreased as provided for in the Contract Documents.

Bids will be received by the Purchasing Agent and may be submitted to the receptionist in the foyer of the

Government Center located at 285 Uptown Blvd., Cedar Hill, Texas 75104 until 3:00 PM, local time on

June 25, 2015, and then publicly opened and read aloud in the Multipurpose Court Room. The bid shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope and marked with the project title: MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT and the name and address of the Bidder shall be submitted. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation “BID ENCLOSED: DO NOT OPEN UNTIL BID DATE, MANSFIELD

ROAD CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT, CITY OF CEDAR HILL, on the face of it and addressed to the Purchasing Agent, City of Cedar Hill, 285 Uptown Blvd., Cedar Hill, Texas 75104.

16.

Modification and Withdrawal of Bids.

16.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any time prior to the opening of Bids.

16.2 If, within twenty-four hours after the Bids are opened, any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with the

OWNER and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER that there was a material and substantial mistake in the preparation of the Bid, that Bidder may withdraw his bid. Thereafter, that Bidder will be disqualified from further bidding on the work.

Bids may be rejected if they show alterations of form, additions not called for, conditional bids, incomplete bids, erasures or irregularities of any kind. The OWNER reserves the right to waive any irregularities in the bids as received and to reject any and all bids without qualification(s). More than one bid from an individual, firm or partnership, corporation or association, under the same or different names, will not be considered.

Reasonable grounds for believing that a Bidder is interested in more than one such bid may cause the rejection of all bids in which said Bidder is interested. Bids in which prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected.

18. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance.

All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for ninety (90) calendar days after the day of the Bid opening, but the OWNER may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid prior to that date.

19.1 The OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all bids, to waive any and all informalities except for the time of submission of the Bid and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Bidder. The OWNER also reserves the right to reject all nonconforming, non-responsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids. Also, the

OWNER reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder if the OWNER believes that it would not be in the best interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the

Bidder is unqualified or has doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the OWNER. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum.

19.2 In evaluating Bids, the owner will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, completion time, and other data, as may be requested in the Bid form or prior to the Notice of Award.

19.3 The OWNER may consider the qualifications and experience of any Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which the identity of Subcontractors,

Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must be submitted as requested by the OWNER. The

OWNER also may consider the operating costs, working relationships, maintenance requirements, performance data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for incorporation in the

Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the Notice of Award.

19.4 The OWNER may consider its past experience with the Bidder and any Subcontractors, Suppliers or other persons or organizations proposed to perform any portions of the Work, and the OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all bids from persons or organizations with whom the OWNER has previously experienced problems including but not limited to issues relating to performance, workmanship, and disputes or litigation.

19.5 The OWNER may conduct such investigations as the owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial stability of Bidders, proposed

Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the OWNER's satisfaction within the prescribed time.

19.6 If contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest and best qualified Bidder whose evaluation by the OWNER indicates to the OWNER that the award will be in the best interests of the Project

19.7 If the contract is to be awarded, the OWNER will give the Successful Bidder a Notice of Award within

ninety (90) calendar days after the date of the Bid opening.

Within ten (10) business days after written Notification of Award of the contract, the Successful Bidder shall execute and furnish to the OWNER four (4) original signed contract documents including Addenda, completed Certificate of Insurance, Payment, Performance, and Maintenance Bonds. A conformed contract document and authorized set of construction plans will be issued to the CONTRACTOR from the OWNER for use at the Construction site. Only a complete set of authorized plans and contract documents are to be on site and considered valid.

21. Affidavit of Bills Paid.

Prior to, and as a condition for, final acceptance of this project by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials, and incidentals incurred in the project construction have been paid in full, and that there are no claims pending.

Bid must comply with all Federal, State, County and local laws.

23. Notice to Proceed.

The OWNER will execute the Construction Contract within sixty (60) calendar days after Notice of

Award. Upon execution of the Contract, the OWNER will issue a written Notice to Proceed to the

CONTRACTOR requesting that he proceed with the construction. The CONTRACTOR shall commence work within ten (10) calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed.

The OWNER qualifies as an exempt agency as defined by the Statutes of the State of Texas. The

CONTRACTOR shall comply with all Statutes and Rulings of The State Comptroller.

The CONTRACTOR shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and similar taxes required to be paid by the

CONTRACTOR in accordance with the laws and regulations of the State.

25. Silence of Specification.

The apparent silence of these specifications as to any detail or to the apparent omission from it of a detailed description concerning any point shall be regarded as meaning that only the best commercial practices are to prevail. All interpretations of these specifications shall be made on the basis of this statement by OWNER or their authorized representative.

No oral statement of any person shall modify or otherwise change, or affect the terms, conditions or specifications stated in the resulting contract. All change orders to the contract will be made in writing by the OWNER.

27. Assignment.

The Successful Bidder shall not sell, assign, transfer or convey this contract, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of OWNER.

28. Governing Law and Venue.

This agreement will be governed and construed according to the laws of the State of Texas. Venue for any action arising from or related to this agreement shall be Dallas County, Texas.

Upon City Final Acceptance, any contractor doing work in Cedar Hill is required to provide the city with a minimum Two (2) year Maintenance Bond. The maintenance bond shall be in the amount of Fifty

(50%) percent of the amount of the contract amount (minus the landscaping amount). The date of

Final Acceptance will coincide with the beginning of the project’s two (2) year warranty period and the one (1) year landscape warranty/maintenance period.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

BID FORM

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

PW08-0050

BID OF:

(NAME OF FIRM)

THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: CITY OF CEDAR HILL, TEXAS (OWNER)

C/O PURCHASING AGENT

285 UPTOWN BLVD., CEDAR HILL, TEXAS

The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only person or parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named herein, that this proposal is made without collusion with any other person, firm, or corporation, that he has carefully examined the Forms of Contract, Invitation for Bids, specifications and the plans therein referred to, and has carefully examined the location, conditions, and classes of materials of the proposed work, and agrees that he will provide all the necessary labor, machinery, tools, apparatus, and other items incidental to construction, and will do all the work and furnish all the materials called for in the contract and specifications in the manner prescribed therein.

It is agreed that the quantities of work to be done at unit prices and materials to be furnished may be increased or diminished as may be necessary to complete the work fully as planned and contemplated, and that all quantities of work, whether increased or decreased, are to be performed at the unit prices set forth below except as provided for in the specifications.

It is further agreed that lump sum prices may be increased to cover additional work not shown on the plans or required by the specifications, in accordance with the provisions of the General

Conditions. Similarly, the price may be decreased to cover deletions of work so ordered.

It is understood and agreed that the work is to be completed in full within the time designated in the Special Conditions of these specifications.

Accompanying this proposal is a (Certified or Cashier's Check payable to the OWNER) (Bid

Bond) in the amount of:

Dollars ($ ).

The bid security accompanying this proposal shall be returned to the bidder, unless in case of the acceptance of the proposal the bidder shall fail to execute a contract and file a performance bond and a payment bond within ten (10) days after its acceptance, in which case the bid security shall become the property of the OWNER and shall be considered as payment for damages due to delay and other inconveniences suffered by the OWNER on account of such failure of the bidder. It is understood that the

OWNER reserves the right to reject any and all bids.

ITEM

NO.

SPEC.

ITEM

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

BASE BID - PAVING AND DRAINAGE

1 NCTCOG

202.1

TREE, SHRUBBERY & VEGETATION REMOVAL

2

SC 25/53

SC 88 MOBILIZATION

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

TxDOT

502

BARRICADES, SIGN & TRAFFIC HANDLING

TxDOT

508

CONSTRUCTING DETOURS

TxDOT

423/403

RETAINING WALL (TEMP WALL)/TEMPORARY SPL SHORING

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (FUR & INST)(LOW PROF)(TY 1)

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (FUR & INST)(LOW PROF)(TY 2)

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (MOVE)(LOW PROF)(TY 1)

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (MOVE)(LOW PROF)(TY 2)

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (REMOVE)(LOW PROF)(TY 1)

TxDOT

512

PORT CTB (REMOVE)(LOW PROF)(TY 2)

TxDOT

662

WK ZN PAV MRK (REMOV)(W)(4")(SLD)

TxDOT

662

WK ZN PAV MRK (REMOV)(Y)(4")(SLD)

TxDOT

662

WK ZN PAV MRK (REMOV)(W)(4")(BRK)

NCTCOG

402

REMOVING CONC

NCTCOG

203.4

SC 34

NCTCOG

203.7

UNCLASS STREET EXCAVATION

FILL (FINAL)(DENS CONT)(TY C)

NCTCOG

203.7

SELECT BACKFILL

NCTCOG

301.3

CEMENT TREATED BASE (PLANT MIX)(9")

NCTCOG

303

SC 23

NCTCOG

302

CONC PVMT+BIKE LANES (CONT REINF-CRCP)(9")

HMAC (2")

NCTCOG

303

SC 23/75

TxDOT

560

CONC DRIVEWAY

MAILBOX INSTALL

TxDOT

423

SC 23

TxDOT

423

SC 24

TxDOT

496

RETAINING WALL

RETAINING WALL (TY 6)

REMOV STR (HEADWALL)

TxDOT

496

REMOV STR (PIPE)

TxDOT

496

REMOV STR (BOX CULVERT)

EST.

QUANTITY

UNIT

1 per unit

1 per unit

19 per unit

9,784

LS

LS

MO

SY per unit

1,200 per unit

5,280 per unit

380 per unit

3,380 per unit per unit

5,280 per unit

300

380 per unit

43,837 per unit per unit

169 per unit

30,722

3,867

SF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

SY per unit

92,664 per unit

85,456 per unit

5,016 per unit

22,150

CY

CY

CY per unit

82,694 SY per unit

2,437 TON per unit

2,431 per unit

SY

23 EA per unit

11,365 per unit

16

CY

SF

CY per unit

16 per unit

979 per unit

160 per unit

EA

LF

LF

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

ITEM

NO.

29

30

31

32

33

34

SPEC.

ITEM

NCTCOG

305.1

SC 23

NCTCOG

305.3

SC 23

NCTCOG

305.3

SC 23

NCTCOG

305.2

SC 23

NCTCOG

305.2

SC 23

NCTCOG

301.5

CONC CURB (MONO)(TY II)

MEDIAN NOSE (TY 1)

MEDIAN NOSE (TY 2)

CONC TRAIL (5")

CONC SIDEWALK (4")

CRUSHED STONE or SAND BASE (2")

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

35

36

37

38

NCTCOG

303

SC 88

NCTCOG

305.3

SC 88

TxDOT

531

SC 23

TxDOT

542

CROSSWALKS - STAMPED CONCRETE

MEDIANS - STAMPED CONCRETE

PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMPS

REMOVING METAL BEAM GUARD FENCE

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

TxDOT

540

MBGF TRANS (TL2)

TxDOT

541

SINGLE GUARDRAIL TERMINAL

NCTCOG

803.3

SC 23

TxDOT

432

SC 23

NCTCOG

801.5

SC 70

NCTCOG

801.5

SC 70/88

NCTCOG

801.5

SC 70

NCTCOG

801.4

RIPRAP (CONC)(4")

RIPRAP (CONC)(MOW STRIP)(4")

REMOVE FENCE (USACE)

INSTALL FENCE (5-STRAND BARB WIRE, USACE)

REMOVE & RELOCATE FENCE (PRIVATE)

8' CHAIN LINK FENCE W/ BLK VINYL FABRIC

47

48

49

50

51

NCTCOG

801.4

4' GATE (SNGL)

NCTCOG

801.4

14' GATE (DBL)

TxDOT

450

RAIL (TY PR1)

NCTCOG

801.3

SC 88

SC 88

PED RAIL (SPECIAL)

STONE COLUMNS

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

TxDOT

462

CONC BOX CULV (3 FT X 3 FT) (1 RUN)

TxDOT

462

CONC BOX CULV (4 FT X 4 FT) (1 RUN)

TxDOT

462

CONC BOX CULV (8 FT X 8 FT) (1 RUN)

NCTCOG

501.23

HDPE PIPE (24 IN)

NCTCOG

501.23

HDPE PIPE (27 IN)

NCTCOG

508.3

508.6.1

NCTCOG

508.3

508.6.1

RC PIPE (CL III)(24 IN)

RC PIPE (CL III)(27 IN) per unit

1 per unit

3 per unit

960 per unit

400 per unit

12 per unit

25 per unit per unit

161 per unit

115

3,479 per unit

886 per unit per unit

702 per unit

4,606

EST.

QUANTITY

33,134

UNIT

LF per unit per unit

2 per unit

10

13,760 per unit

6,501

EA

EA

SY

SY per unit per unit

527 per unit

1,126

211 per unit

14 per unit

100

CY

SY

SY

EA

LF per unit

4 per unit

4 per unit

222 per unit

45

EA

EA

CY

CY per unit

6,276 per unit

5,475 per unit

3,793 per unit

122

LF

LF

LF

LF

EA

EA

LF

LF

EA

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

ITEM

NO.

59

SPEC.

ITEM

NCTCOG

508.3

RC PIPE (CL III)(30 IN)

60

61

62

NCTCOG

508.3

RC PIPE (CL III)(36 IN)

NCTCOG

508.3

RC PIPE (CL III)(54 IN)

NCTCOG

508.3

RC PIPE (CL III)(60 IN)

63

64

65

66

67

68

NCTCOG

702

SC 23

NCTCOG

702

SC 23

NCTCOG

702

SC 23

NCTCOG

502.1

HEADWALL (LARGE)

HEADWALL (MEDIUM)

HEADWALL (SMALL)

MANHOLE TY A

NCTCOG

502.1

MANHOLE TY B

NCTCOG

702.8

10' RECESSED INLET

69

70

71

72

73

74

75

76

77

78

79

80

81

82

83

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

NCTCOG

702.8

20' RECESSED INLET

NCTCOG

702.8

4-GRATE INLET

NCTCOG

702.8

5' CURB INLET

NCTCOG

702.8

10' CURB INLET

TxDOT

465

20' CURB INLET

NCTCOG

803.2

FRENCH DRAIN AND GABION APRON

NCTCOG

803.3

RIPRAP(CONC)(CL B)

NCTCOG

803.3

RIPRAP(STONE PROTECTION)(18 IN)

NCTCOG

201.9

SC 53

NCTCOG

201.11

SC 26

NCTCOG

201.5

SC 53

NCTCOG

201.14

SC 53

NCTCOG

201.14

SC 53

TxDOT

164

ROCK FILTER DAMS (INSTALL & REMOVE)

CONTRUCTION ENTRANCE/EXIT (STONE) (INSTALL & REMOVE)

SILT FENCE (INSTALL & REMOVE)

INLET PROTECTION (TYPE A CURB) (INSTALL & REMOVE)

INLET PROTECTION (DROP INLET) (INSTALL & REMOVE)

BROADCAST SEEDING (TEMP)(WARM OR COOL)

SC29/53 VMAX 350

84 SC29/53 VMAX 550

85 ITEM VOIDED

86

87

88

89

TxDOT

672

PAVMRKRCLB-TYII C-R

TxDOT

672

PAVMRKRCLA-TYII C-R

TxDOT

672

PAVMRKRCLA-TYW

TxDOT

672

PAVMRKRCLB-TYII-A-A

EST.

QUANTITY

873

UNIT

LF per unit per unit

125 per unit

236

17

LF

LF

LF per unit

4 per unit

2 per unit

8 per unit per unit

11 per unit

1

11 per unit

15 per unit

33 per unit

1 per unit

5

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA per unit

2 per unit

29 per unit

12 per unit

417 per unit

356 per unit

9,126 per unit

12,183 per unit

34 per unit

4 per unit

91,292 per unit

23,028 per unit

5,211 per unit

EA

EA

CY

CY

LF

SF

LF

EA

EA

SY

SY

SY

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID per unit

432 per unit

277 per unit

277 per unit

54 per unit

EA

EA

EA

EA

ITEM

NO.

90

91

92

SPEC.

ITEM

TxDOT

672

PAVMRKRCLB-TY1-A-Y

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)(WORD)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)(ARROW)

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(Y)4"(SLD)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(Y)4"(BRKN)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)4"(DOT)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)4"(SLD)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)4"(BRKN)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)8"(SLD)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)12"(SLD)

TxDOT

666

PAVMRKTYI(W)24"(SLD)

Plan

Details

PAVMRKTYI(G)60"(SLD)

TxDOT

644

SIGNASSYW/1REG.SIGN

TxDOT

644

SIGNASSYW/2REG.SIGN

TxDOT

644

SIGNASSYW/1WARN.SIGN

TxDOT

644

SIGNASSYW/2WARN.SIGN

SC 88 BOLLARDS

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

TxDOT

416

SHAFTTRFSIGPOLE36"

TxDOT

618

PVCSCHD403"

TxDOT

618

PVCSCHD404"

TxDOT

620

CONDRNO.6BARE

TxDOT

620

CONDRNO.6INSULATED

TxDOT

620

CONDRNO.8INSULATED

TxDOT

624

BOXTYC162911W/APRON

TxDOT

682

PLATE12"3SEC

TxDOT

682

PLATE12'4SEC

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12"LEDGRNARW

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12"LEDGRN

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12"LEDYELARW

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12"LEDYEL

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12"LEDRED

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

EST.

QUANTITY

90

UNIT

EA per unit

97 per unit

99

EA

EA per unit per unit

2,546 per unit

629

502 per unit

21,153 per unit per unit

1,453 per unit

5,393

2,367 per unit

595 per unit

238 per unit

59 per unit

3

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

EA

EA per unit

20 per unit

11 per unit

32 per unit

6

EA

EA

EA

LF per unit

215 per unit

875 per unit

90 per unit

1,080 per unit per unit

9 per unit

2,940

13 per unit

3 per unit per unit

10 per unit

6

9 per unit

10 per unit

10 per unit

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

ITEM

NO.

121

122

123

SPEC.

ITEM

TxDOT

682

SIGSEC12'LEDREDARW

TxDOT

684

SIGCBLETYA14AWG20 CONDR

TxDOT

686

TRFSIGPLAM(s) 1ARM(36') - 19' POLE

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

124

125

TxDOT

686

TRFSIGPLAM(s) 1ARM(36') - 30' POLE

TxDOT

686

TRFSIGPLAM(s) 1ARM(36') - LUM

126

127

128

129

TxDOT

686

TRFSIGPLAM(s) 1ARM(40') - LUM

TxDOT

686

TRFSIGPLAM(s) 1ARM(48') - LUM

TxDOT

687

PEDPOLEASSY

TxDOT

688

DETECT2"PUSHBTN

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

TxDOT

6266

COAXIALCABLE

TxDOT

6266

PROCESSORSYS

TxDOT

6266

CAMERAASSY

TxDOT

6266

SETUPSYS

TxDOT

8206

COUNTDOWNPEDSIGNALMODWHOUSING

TxDOT

8317

SYSEXTERNALBATTCABINET

SC 88 GPSOPTICOMSYSINCLCABLE

137 SC 88

ILSNLED

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

TxDOT

6006

ETHERNETRADIOSUBSCRIBERUNITINSTL

TxDOT

628

SRVTYD120/24060(NS) SS (E) PS (US)

TxDOT

680

HWYTRFSIG(ISOLATED)

TxDOT

620

STREET LIGHT FOUNDATION

TxDOT

620

CONDT (PVC) (SCHD 40) ( 2")

TxDOT

620

ELEC CONDR (NO. 4) INSULATED

TxDOT

620

ELEC CONDR (NO. 4) BARE

TxDOT

620

ELEC CONDR (NO. 6) INSULATED

TxDOT

620

ELEC CONDR (NO. 6) BARE

TxDOT

628

ELEC CONDR (NO. 8) INSULATED

SC 88 ELEC CONDR (NO. 8) BARE

149 SC 88 ELC SRV TY D 120 / 240 100 (NS) SS (E) SP (O)

EST.

QUANTITY

6

UNIT

EA per unit

3,545 per unit

2

LF

EA per unit

1 EA per unit

per unit

2

EA

EA per unit

1 per unit

6 per unit

14 per unit

2,315 per unit

2

EA

EA

EA

LF

EA per unit

10 per unit

2

EA

EA per unit

14 per unit

4 per unit

2 per unit

6 per unit

2 per unit

2 per unit

2 per unit

45

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA per unit

25,870 per unit

9,690 per unit

1,865 per unit

17,750 per unit

4,920 per unit

28,440 per unit

4,190 per unit

11 per unit

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

EA

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

ITEM

NO.

150

SPEC.

ITEM

SC 88 RECEPTACLE PEDESTAL

151 SC 88 SIGN ILLM

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

152 SC 88 GROUND BOX TY D (162922) W/ APRON

BASE BID - BRIDGE

153 TxDOT CEM STABIL BKFL

400

154

155

156

157

TxDOT

420

SC 23

TxDOT

420

SC 23

TxDOT

420

SC 23

TxDOT

425

CL S CONC (APPR SLAB)

CL C CONC (ABUT)

CL S CONC (SLAB)

PRESTR CONC GIRDER (TX46)

158

159

160

161

NCTCOG

801.3

SC 88

TxDOT

450

SC 23

TxDOT

450

SC 23

TxDOT

454

PED RAIL (SPECIAL)

RAIL (TY C402)

RAIL (TY 551)

SEALED EXPANSION JOINT (4IN)(SEJ-A)

162

163

164

165

TxDOT

442

STRUCTURAL STEEL (MISC BRIDGE)

TxDOT

416

SC 23

TxDOT

416

SC 23

TxDOT

432

SC 23

18" DRILLED SHAFTS

36" DRILLED SHAFTS

5" RIPRAP (CONC)(CL B)(RR8)

BASE BID - LANDSCAPING

166 SC 88 65 GAL TREE

167 SC 88

45 GAL TREE

168 SC 88 30 GAL TREE

169 SC 88 15 GAL TREE

170 SC 88 1 GAL SHRUB

171 SC 88

HYDROMULCH

172 SC 88 SOD

173 SC 88 IRRIGATION

174 SC 88 TOPSOIL (4")

175 SC 88

LANDSCAPING PLANT MIX

EST.

QUANTITY

45

UNIT

EA per unit

12 per unit

EA

50 EA per unit

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

460 per unit

77 per unit

137 per unit

211 per unit

985 per unit

260

CY

CY

CY

CY

LF

LF per unit

260 per unit

260 per unit

166 per unit

588 per unit

360

LBS

LF per unit

405 per unit

301 per unit

LF

LF

LF

LF

CY

215 per unit

61 per unit

240 per unit

112 per unit

47,037 per unit

314,339 per unit

218,024

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

SF

SF per unit

1 per unit

6,572 per unit

14,958 per unit

LS

CY

CY

ITEM

NO.

176

SPEC.

ITEM

SC 88

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

18" MULTI FLOW SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

177 SC 88 6" PVC PIPE

178 SC 88

MONUMENT SIGN

179 SC 88

CONCRETE MOW STRIP

180 SC 88

PLANTING AT ROYAL VISTA DR

181 SC 88

BENCH

182 SC 88 TRASH RECEPTACLE

183 SC 88 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE (1 YR)

BASE BID - WATER/WASTEWATER

184 NCTCOG

6" PVC WATER MAIN W/ EMBEDMENT, TRENCH SAFEY & FITTINGS

501.14

502.4

185

502.5

504, 506

NCTCOG

501.14

8" PVC WATER MAIN W/ EMBEDMENT, TRENCH SAFETY & FITTINGS

186

187

188

502.4

502.5

504, 507

NCTCOG

501.14

502.4

502.5

504, 508

NCTCOG

501.14

502.4

502.5

504, 509

NCTCOG

503.3

12" PVC WATER MAIN W/ EMBEDMENT, TRENCH SAFETY & FITTINGS

16" PVC WATER MAIN W/ EMBEDMENT, TRENCH SAFETY & FITTINGS

12" PVC WATER MAIN BY BORING W/ CASING

189

190

191

NCTCOG

509.3

509.6

NCTCOG

509.3

509.6

NCTCOG

502.3

16" CASING

20" CASING

FIRE HYDRANT

192 NCTCOG

502.3

REMOVE, SALVAGE & DELIVER EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT

193 NCTCOG

502

DUAL PRV

194 NCTCOG

502.6

COMBINATION AIR VALVE

195 NCTCOG

502.6

6" GATE VALVE

196 NCTCOG

502.6

8" GATE VALVE

197 NCTCOG

502.6

12" GATE VALVE

198 NCTCOG

502.6

16" GATE VALVE

199 NCTCOG

502.10

16" x 8" TAPPING SLEEVE & VALVE

200 NCTCOG

502.10

WATER SERVICES

EST.

QUANTITY

9,920

UNIT

LF per unit

950 LF per unit

1 per unit per unit

1 per unit

5 per unit

5 per unit

4,905

1 per unit

EA

LF

LS

EA

EA

LS

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

150 LF per unit

3,870 LF per unit

8,240 LF per unit

880 LF per unit

390 per unit

410 per unit

100 per unit

11 per unit

5 per unit

1 per unit

1 per unit

6 per unit

17 per unit

18 per unit

2 per unit

2 per unit

30 per unit

LF

LF

LF

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

ITEM

NO.

SPEC.

ITEM

NAME OF PAY ITEM WITH

UNIT PRICE IN WORDS

201 NCTCOG

502.6

ADJUST 8"GATE VALVE

219 per unit

202 NCTCOG

502.6

ADJUST 16"GATE VALVE per unit

203 NCTCOG

502.6

ADJUST 16" BUTTERFLY VALVE & BOX per unit

204 NCTCOG

502.6

ADJUST 20" BUTTERFLY VALVE & BOX

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215 per unit

NCTCOG

502.6

ADJUST AIR RELEASE VALVE per unit

PAVEMENT REPAIR (ASSUMES 3-FOOT REPAIR TRENCH ALONG ANDERSON - CONC PVMT)

NCTCOG

501.15

502.4

504, 507

NCTCOG

509.3

509.6

NCTCOG

509.3

509.6

NCTCOG

502.1

NCTCOG

303

402.4

NCTCOG

301.5

402.4

NCTCOG

202.4

202.6

NCTCOG

501.15

504, 507

NCTCOG

501.15

504, 507

NCTCOG

501.15

502.4

504, 507

PAVEMENT REPAIR (ASSUMES 3-FOOT REPAIR TRENCH ALONG ANDERSON - 6" GRAVEL)

PAVEMENT REPAIR (ASSUMES 5-FOOT REPAIR TRENCH ALONG ANDERSON - SOD)

8" PVC PRESSURE RATED WASTEWATER MAIN W/ TRENCH SAFETY, EMBEDMENT & TV

12" PVC PRESSURE RATED WASTEWATER MAIN W/ TRENCH SAFETY, EMBEDMENT & TV per unit

10" PVC WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN W/ TRENCH SAFETY, CONC BLOCKING, EMBEDMENT &TV

60" WASTEWATER MANHOLE per unit per unit per unit per unit per unit

12" PVC WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN W/ TRENCH SAFETY, CONC BLOCKING, EMBEDMENT & TV

14" STEEL CASING

20" STEEL CASING per unit per unit per unit per unit

216 NCTCOG

502.1

60" DROP WASTEWATER MANHOLE per unit

217 NCTCOG

502.1

CONNECT TO EXISTING WASTEWATER MANHOLE per unit

218 NCTCOG

502.1

VACUUM TEST FOR MANHOLE per unit

NCTCOG

502.6

COMBINATION AIR VALVE per unit

220 NCTCOG

502.1

REMOVE EXISTING WASTEWATER MANHOLE per unit

221 NCTCOG

502.1

ADJUST WASTEWATER MANHOLE per unit

222 NCTCOG

202.4

202.6

PAVEMENT REPAIR (ASSUMES 5-FOOT REPAIR TRENCH ALONG ANDERSON - SOD) per unit

EST.

QUANTITY

44

2

1

2

1

110

10

990

700

1,370

170

1,870

180

110

10

3

3

13

1

1

20

200

UNIT

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

SF

CY

SY

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

LF

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

EA

SY

UNIT

PRICE

AMOUNT

BID

ALTERNATE BID #1-DECORATIVE PED RAIL (SPECIAL) ALONG RETAINING WALLS

49 TxDOT

RAIL (TY PR1)

450

49A SC 88 PED RAIL (SPECIAL)

ALTERNATE BASE BID-DECORATIVE PED RAIL (SPECIAL) ALONG RETAINING WALLS

TOTAL BID FOR ALL ITEMS (WORDS AND FIGURES)

ALTERNATE BID #2-LAKEVIEW DRIVE STREET REPAIR

223 NCTCOG CEMENT TREATED BASE (PLANT MIX)

301.3

224 NCTCOG

303

CONC PVMT (CONT REINF-CRCP)(8")

SC 23

ALTERNATE BASE BID-LAKEVIEW DRIVE STREET REPAIR

TOTAL BID FOR ALL ITEMS (WORDS AND FIGURES)

per unit per unit per unit per unit

-960

960

2,500

2,300

LF

LF

CY

CY

CITY OF CEDAR HILL BID SCHEDULE SUMMARY

FOR

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

PROJECT NO. PW08-0050

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT – PAVING AND DRAINAGE $_______________

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT – BRIDGE $_______________

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT – LANDSCAPING $_______________

TOTAL BASE BID AMOUNT – WATER/WASTEWATER $_______________

TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #1 AMOUNT $_______________

TOTAL ALTERNATE BID #2 AMOUNT $_______________

GRAND TOTAL OF ALL ITEMS $_______________

The contract will be awarded to the low bidder based on the Grand Total of All Items.

The City of Cedar Hill reserves the right to reject any portion of this project as it may deem necessary to stay within the City’s available funds. Should the City elect to reject any portion, the contract quantities will be adjusted accordingly. The City may elect to award the Base Bid with or without Decorative Ped Rail (Alternate #1) or Lakeview Drive Street Repair (Alternate #2) or a combination thereof.

SUBMITTED ON (DATE):

The work proposed to be done shall be accepted when fully completed and finished in accordance with the plans and specifications and to the satisfaction of the OWNER and ENGINEER.

The CONTRACTOR shall begin the work as specified in the work order and agrees to complete the work within 400 Working Days from the date specified in the work order.

In the event of the award of a contract to the undersigned, the undersigned will furnish a

Performance Bond and Payment Bond for the full amount of the contract.

The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in this proposal have been carefully checked and are submitted as correct and final.

NOTE: Unit and lump sum prices must be shown in words and figures for each item listed in the proposal and in the event of discrepancy the words shall control.

Receipt is hereby acknowledged for the following addenda to the contract documents:

Addendum No. 1 dated Received

Addendum No. 2 dated Received

Addendum No. 3 dated Received

Addendum No. 4 dated Received

Addendum No. 5 dated Received

CONTRACTOR

By: please print name)

Signature:

Title:

Seal and Authorization

(If a Corporation) Address

City, County, State and Zip

Telephone

E-Mail Address:

Fax No.

NON-COLLUSION STATEMENT

The undersigned affirms that they are duly authorized to execute this contract, that this company, corporation, firm, partnership or individual has not prepared this bid in collusion with any other Bidder, and that the contents of this bid as to prices, terms or conditions of said bid have not been communicated by the undersigned nor by any employee or agent to any other person engaged in this type of business prior to the official opening of this bid.

Vendor:

Address:

City, State, Zip Code:

Phone:

Fax:

Authorized Rep. (Name):

Position with Company:

E-Mail (if available)

EXCEPTIONS (IF ANY) FROM BID SPECIFICATIONS:

BIDDER TO INSERT BID BOND HERE

(The rest of Page is blank)

SECTION 2 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

(The rest of Page is blank)

STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT

STATE OF TEXAS }

COUNTY OF DALLAS }

THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of ,

A.D. 2015, by and between of the County of acting through

Dallas

Its Mayor

The City of Cedar Hill and State of Texas, thereunto duly authorized so to do,

Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed OWNER, and of the City of

State of

, County of

, Party of the Second Part, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. and

WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (OWNER), and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR), hereby agrees with the said Party of the First Part (OWNER) to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows:

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General Conditions of the Agreement and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in accordance with the Notice to CONTRACTORs, General and Special

Conditions of Agreement, Exhibits and other drawings and printed or written explanatory matter thereof, and the Specifications and addenda therefore, as prepared by the City of Cedar Hill, each of which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR and the

ENGINEER, together with the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the General Conditions of the Agreement, and the

Performance and Payment Bonds hereto attached; all of which are made a part hereof and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.

The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him, and to complete the same within 400 Working Days after the date of the written notice to commence work, subject to such extensions of time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions.

THE OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in the proposal, which forms a part of this contract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special Conditions of the contract. written.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year and day first above

City of Cedar Hill, Texas

Party of the First Part (OWNER) Party of the Second Part (CONTRACTOR)

By: By:

Attest:

Robert K. Franke, Mayor

Attest:

CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE

After award of contract, CONTRACTOR will provide OWNER with Certificate of Insurance which will be executed and bound here with Final Documents

(The rest of Page is blank)

General Instructions for Bonds

A. The surety on each bond must be a responsible surety company which is qualified to do business in

Texas and satisfactory to the OWNER.

B. The name, and residence, of each individual party to the bond shall be inserted in the body thereof, and each such party shall sign the bond with his usual signature on the line opposite the scroll seal, and if signed in Maine, Massachusetts or New Hampshire, an adhesive seal shall be affixed opposite the signature.

C. If the principals are partners, their individual names will appear in the body of the bond, with the recital that they are partners composing a firm, naming it, and all the members of the firm shall execute the bond as individuals.

D. The signature of a witness shall appear in the appropriate place, attesting the signature of each individual party to the bond.

E. If the principal or surety is a corporation, the name of the State in which incorporated shall be inserted in the appropriate place in the body of the bond, and said instrument shall be executed and attested under the corporate seal, the fact shall be stated, in which case a scroll or adhesive seal shall appear following the corporate name.

F. The official character and authority of the person or persons executing the bond for the principal, if a corporation, shall be certified by the secretary or assistant secretary according to the form attached hereto. In lieu of such certificate, records of the corporation as will show the official character and authority of the officer signing, duly certified by the secretary or assistant secretary, under the corporate seal, to be true copies.

G. The date of this bond must not be prior to the date of the contract in connection with which it is given.

PERFORMANCE BOND

STATE OF TEXAS }

COUNTY OF DALLAS }

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That of the City of

County of , and State of , as

,

Principal, and authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto

(OWNE in the penal sum of

R),

Dollars

($______________________) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents:

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the OWNER, dated the day of , 2015, to

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;

(Article 5472d for Private Work)* of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein."

Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anyway affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day

Principal Surety

Address: Address:

The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is

* Not applicable for federal work. See "The Miller Act," 40 U.S.C. §270.

PAYMENT BOND

STATE OF TEXAS }

COUNTY OF DALLAS }

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That of the City of ,

County of

Principal, and

, and State of authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto in the penal sum of

, as

(OWNER

),

Dollars

($______________________) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents:

WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the OWNER, dated the day of , 2015, to

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;

Statutes of Texas as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.

Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this day

Principal Surety

Address:

The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is

Address:

MAINTENANCE BOND

THE STATE OF TEXAS

COUNTY OF DALLAS

THAT and

}

}

}

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

the laws of acknowledge themselves to be held and bound to pay unto the

, as Principal,

, a Corporation organized under

, as sureties, do hereby expressly

, a Municipal Corporation, Texas, the sum of and of the total contract amount of ($ unto said

Cents ($ ), which this amount is

Dollars

%

), for the payment of which sum will and truly be made

, and its successors, said principal and sureties do hereby bind themselves, their assigns and successors jointly and severally.

THIS obligation is conditioned; however, that whereas, the said has this day entered into a written contract with the said City of Cedar Hill, Texas to build and construct

MANSFIELD ROAD

CAPACITY IMPROVEMENTS PROJECT

CITY OF CEDAR

HILL

which contract and the plans and specifications therein mentioned, adopted by the The City of Cedar Hill are hereby expressly made a part thereof as through the same were written and embodied herein.

WHEREAS, under the plans, specifications, and contract, it is provided that the CONTRACTOR will maintain and keep in good repair, the work herein contracted (except landscaping) to be done and performed, for a period of two (2) years from the date of the acceptance of said work, and to do all necessary repairs and/or reconstructing in whole or in part of said improvements that should be occasioned by settlement of foundation, defective workmanship or materials furnished in the construction or any part thereof or any of the accessories thereto constructed by the CONTRACTOR. It being understood that the purpose of this section is to cover all defective conditions arising by reason of defective material and charge the same against the said CONTRACTOR, and sureties on this obligation, and the said CONTRACTOR and sureties hereon shall be subject to the liquidation damages mentioned in said contract for each day's failure on its' part to comply with the terms of said provisions of said contract. Now, therefore, if the said CONTRACTOR shall keep and perform its' said agreement to maintain said work and keep the same in repair for the said maintenance period of two (2) years, as provided, then these presents shall be null and void, and have not further effect, but if default shall be made by the said CONTRACTOR in the performance of its' contract to so maintain and repair said work, then these presents shall have full force and effect, and said City of Cedar Hill, Texas shall have and receive from the said CONTRACTOR and its' principal and sureties damages in the premises, as provided; and it is further agreed that this obligation shall be a continuing one against the principal and sureties, hereon, and that successive recoveries may be and had hereon for successive branches until the full amount shall have been exhausted; and it is further understood that the obligation herein to maintain said work shall continue throughout said maintenance period, and the same shall not be changed, diminished or in any manner affected from any cause during said time.

IN WITNESS THEREOF, the said caused these presents to be executed by has and the said hereunto set his hand, the

SURETY: day of to be executed by its' Attorney in fact and the said Attorney in fact

, 2015.

PRINCIPAL:

has caused these presents

, has

By:

By:

WITNESS:

ATTEST:

Secretary

NOTE: Date of Maintenance Bond must not be prior to date of Contract.

SECTION 3 – STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

The City of Cedar Hill, Texas has adopted the North Central Texas Council of

Governments (NCTCOG) Public Works Construction Standards-North Central Texas

(latest edition) and the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard

Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges

(2004). The NCTCOG and TxDOT Specifications apply to this project, except as noted herein. In the case of a contradiction between the NCTCOG and/or TxDOT

Specifications and this document, the information in this document shall control.

Bidders are specifically directed to become thoroughly familiar with the NCTCOG

Specifications prior to submitting a bid. The Specifications may be purchased from:

North Central Texas Council of Governments

616 Six Flags Drive

P.O. Drawer COG

Arlington, Texas 76005-5888

817/461-3300 (Metro)

Unless otherwise specifically noted on the plans, or in these specifications, all applicable sections of the NCTCOG and TxDOT Standard Specifications are in effect. In this case of a contradiction between the NCTCOG and TxDOT Standard Specifications and this document, the information in this document shall control.

SECTION 4 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS

SC.01 GENERAL

SC.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS

SC.03

SC.04

LOCATION OF PROJECT AND SCOPE OF WORK

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

SC.06

SC.07

SC.08

SC.09

FORMS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

AWARD OF CONTRACT AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

SC.10 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

SC.11 INDEMNIFICATION

SC.12

SC.13

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY BY CONTRACTOR

SC.14

SC.15

SC.16

SC.17

SC.18

SC.19

SC.20

SC.21

SC.22

SC.23

SC.24

SC.25

SC.26

DELAYS: EXTENSION OF TIME: LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS

TRADE NAMES AND MATERIALS

PERMITS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

GUARANTY AGAINST DEFECTIVE WORK

CITY OF CEDAR HILL MONUMENTS

PROJECT MAINTENANCE

CONSTRUCTION STAKES

CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL

PROTECTION OF TREES

STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE

SC.28 SITE

SC.29 FENCES AND DRAINAGE CHANNELS

SC.30 MOWING & DEBRIS MAINTENANCE

SC.34 EXCAVATION

SC.35 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND SURPLUS EXCAVATION AND CONCRETE

SC.36

SC.37

INSPECTION

LIGHTS AND POWER

SC.38

SC.39

SC.40

SC.41

SC.42

SC.43

SC.44

WAGE RATES

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

COORDINATION WITH OTHERS

BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, DETOURS AND SEQUENCE OF WORK

CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES OR INJURY

OWNER’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE

POLICY ENDORSEMENTS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS

SC.46

SC.47

SC.48

SC.49

SC.50

PAYMENT WITHHELD

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR

DISTINGUISHING EXTRA WORK

ANTITRUST

SC.52

SC.53

SC.55

SC.57

SC.58

SC.59

SC.60

SC.61

SC.62

SC.63

SC.64

SC.65

SC.66

SC.67

SC.70

SC.71

SC.72

SC.73

SC.74

SC.75

SC.76

SC.77

SC.78

SC.79

SC.80

SC.81

SC.82

SC.83

SC.84

SC.86

SC.87

SC.88

PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION BY ENGINEER

EROSION CONTROL

FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

PARTIAL PAYMENTS

GRASS REPAIR

TRENCH SAFETY

DAMAGES TO CITY PROPERTY

EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER PROPERTY

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL(S) INCIDENT

EXISTING FACILITIES

PROJECT VIDEO

STREET CLEANUP

WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION

SEWER PIPE AND WATER MAIN SEPARATION

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING FENCES

RESTORATION

SPRINKLER REPAIR

RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT SURFACES

CLEANUP

CONSTRUCTION IN PUBLIC ROADS AND PRIVATE DRIVES

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF STREET AND DRIVEWAY PAVING

JACKING, BORING OR TUNNELING

PVC SEWER PIPE

SERVICE LATERALS

PIPE PLUGGING AND SANITARY SEWERS TO BE ABANDONED

SANITARY SEWER LINE CONNECTION

STEEL ENCASEMENT PIPE

SANITARY SEWER LINE AND MANHOLE TESTING

WATER PIPE

WATER VALVES

WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS

FURTHER BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

SC.01 GENERAL

The work shall be performed in accordance with the current General Provisions of Public Works Construction

Standards-North Central Texas, and shall be maintained unless there exists a conflict with the provisions of this section, in which case the Special Conditions shall govern. Construction shall be in accordance with and as indicated on the plans, City of Cedar Hill Standard Construction Details, or in these Special Conditions.

SC.02 DEFINITION OF TERMS

Engineer: The word “ENGINEER” in these specifications shall be understood as referring to the staff of Jacobs

Engineering Group Inc., ENGINEER of the OWNER, or such other representatives as may be authorized by said

OWNER to act in any particular position.

Working Day: Working day is defined as the time during the day, except holidays, in which the CONTRACTOR shall be permitted to work. Normal work hours shall be 7:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m. Monday through Friday. Permitted work that needs to be performed after 7 p.m. Monday through Friday or on Saturday must be approved 24 hours in advance. The CONTRACTOR will not be allowed to work City of Cedar Hill holidays unless an exception is given by the City, and it is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to verify the City’s holiday schedule. Sunday work is not allowed unless deemed an emergency and approved by the Owner or its representative. Inspection overtime charges will apply to work outside of normal work hours.

Substantial Completion: The date of substantial completion of a project or specified area of a project is the date when the construction is sufficiently completed, in accordance with the contract documents, as modified by any change order agreed to by the parties, so that the OWNER can occupy, use completed street for traffic, or utilize the project or specified area of the project for the use for which it was intended. This event will occur prior to the final inspection and development of the final punch list.

Final Completion: For the purpose of tracking time, issuing payment of retainage or incentives and assessing liquidated damages, Final Completion shall be defined as the date upon which all items identified during the walk through (the punch list) have been completed and the OWNER has issued the Final approval and acceptance.

Landscaping maintenance shall commence after the date of Final completion.

SC.03 LOCATION OF PROJECT AND SCOPE OF WORK

The work awarded under this contract shall include the following locations:

 Mansfield Road from West of Anderson Road to West of W. Beltline Road, Cedar Hill, TX 75104.

 Anderson Road from Sontera Drive to Mansfield Road, Cedar Hill, Texas 75104.

 Lakeview Drive from Mansfield Road to Lake Ridge Parkway, Cedar Hill, TX 75104.

The work under this contract includes furnishing of all labor, tools, material, and equipment, and for performing all work necessary for reconstruction of: widening Mansfield Road from a two lane undivided roadway to a 4 lane divided roadway including two concrete I-girder bridges. Work also includes the installation of an enclosed storm drainage system, installation of water/wastewater lines, installation of permanent traffic signals, in-roadway lighting system, landscape and irrigation installation, and any other work deemed necessary by the City of Cedar Hill, Texas.

Construction plans were prepared and provided by JACOBS ENGINEERING GROUP INC.

SC.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The quantities for construction are estimated, based on calculated quantities. Monthly pay estimates will be based on the completion of each unit, as determined by the OWNER's representative.

All minor details of work which are not shown on the plans, as well as such items which are not specifically mentioned in the specifications, but are obviously necessary for the proper completion of the work, shall be considered as incidental, and as being a part of and included with the work for which prices are given in the proposal, and no extra compensation shall be allowed the contractor for the performance thereof.

SC.06 FORMS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Plans, specifications and bidding documents may be obtained at MS Dallas, 2300 Reagan Street, Dallas, TX 75219.

Non-refundable charges for the set are as follows: Full Size - $450 per set; Half Size - $150 per set; PDF on a CD

- $10 per CD. Bidder should contact MS Dallas 214-521-7000, 24 hours in advance of picking up the set. At pick up the bidder is required to sign and log their information on the plan holders list for the project.

SC.07 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Contract Documents shall consist of the following:

 The written Construction Contract;

 Any listed and numbered addenda;

 The Specifications and the Project Drawings; including City of Cedar Hill Construction Standards and

Manuals; TxDOT Standards and Specifications, NCTCOG Specifications.

 The Special Conditions;

 The Notice to the CONTRACTOR;

 A Performance Bond;

 A Payment Bond;

 A Maintenance Bond;

 The CONTRACTOR’s bid

The Contract Documents are complementary and what is called for by one shall be as binding if called for by all. In the event of an inconsistency in any of the provisions of the Contract Documents, the inconsistency shall be resolved by giving precedence to the Contract Documents in the order in which they are listed above.

SC.08 AWARD OF CONTRACT AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

The CONTRACTOR shall complete the execution of the required performance and payment bonds, and contract, within ten (10) calendar days of such notice, or the OWNER shall be entitled to the proceeds of the proposal guaranty in accordance with Item 102.5 of the General Provisions of NCTCOG

SC.09 PERFORMANCE OF THE WORK

At such time as actual construction has been started, the work will not be stopped or delayed without written permission of the OWNER, excluding delays caused by adverse weather conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall

maintain at all times sufficient equipment and personnel on the project to produce satisfactory progress during the construction period.

SC. 10 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY

Delete the last paragraph of Section 107.13 in its entirety.

SC.11 INDEMNIFICATION

Delete Section 107.2 of NCTCOG specifications in its entirety and substitute therefore the following:

The CONTRACTOR and his sureties shall indemnify, defend and save harmless the OWNER and all of its officers, agents and employees, ENGINEER and all of its officers and employees from all suits, actions or claims of any character, name and description brought for or on account of any injuries, including death or damages received or sustained by any person, persons or property on account of the operations of the CONTRACTOR, his agents, employees or subcontractors; or on account of any negligent act or fault of the CONTRACTOR, his agents, employees or subcontractors in the execution of said contract; or on account of the failure of the CONTRACTOR to provide the necessary barricades, warning lights or signs; and shall be required to pay any judgment, with cost, which may be obtained against the OWNER or ENGINEER growing out of such injury, including death or damage.

SC.12 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

Prior to starting work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a proposed schedule for the work included herein and shall submit any major revisions to this schedule as the project progresses. Contractor shall also submit an updated schedule with critical path events with each application for payment. This schedule shall provide for completion and list of critical events of the project within the time provided in the specifications.

The schedule shall include a construction-phasing plan to insure minimum interruption of traffic on streets and driveways, as detailed in the plans. No more than one (1) Phase or Stage shall be under construction simultaneously without approval of the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall apply continuous work on Phase No. 1 until completed, proceed to Phase No. 2 and apply continuous work until completed, etc. The schedule shall also include a construction-phasing plan to construct the improvements along Anderson Road that require lane closures or road closures.

SC.13 INCENTIVE/DISINCENTIVE (LIQUIDATED DAMAGES)

The OWNER desires to expedite construction on this contract to minimize the inconvenience to the travelling public and to reduce the time of construction. In order to achieve this, an incentive/disincentive provision is established for this contract.

For the purposes of this Contract, the Daily Value is $1,000.00

In the event the Contract takes less than the total Working Days bid to construct the project, there will be incentives award of $1,000 per day. The total incentive payment for this Contract shall not exceed $100,000 (100 days).

This incentive does not apply to work performed as part of the repair of Lakeview Drive associated with Item

Nos. 218 & 219.

In the event the contract takes longer than the total Working Days bid to construct the project, there will be liquidated damages assessed of $1,000 per day with no limit on the amount of disincentive.

Lakeview Drive Repair: Prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a schedule for completion of Lakeview Drive repairs for approval. All repairs must be completed and the roadway opened to traffic no later than February 1, 2016. The liquidated damages of $1,000 per day will

apply beyond February 1, 2016 for this Phase of the contract. An exhibit showing the limits of repair is included in Appendix A.

SC.14 DELAYS: EXTENSION OF TIME: LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

In addition to the requirements of NCTCOG Item 108.8 Delays; Extension of Time; Liquidated Damages, the following conditions shall apply:

The term "unforeseeable cause" shall mean:

An act of God in the form of unusually severe weather conditions, including storms, flood, fire or similar event, that could not have been anticipated or guarded against and which materially affects the work site, including access or egress thereto;

A riot or war situation actually involving the site or actually preventing the CONTRACTOR from working on the site, but not including any situation involving suppliers off-site other than those essential suppliers as supplied to

City; or

An unanticipated strike involving the forces actually working on the project or involving the employees of those essential suppliers, but no other labor stoppage.

*CONTRACTOR must set forth essential suppliers in writing within five (5) days of the Notice to Proceed.

No event shall be deemed an Unforeseeable Cause for the purposes of this Agreement unless it actually and directly necessitates a delay in the work which could not be otherwise remedied by taking reasonably prudent steps, and the

CONTRACTOR could not reasonably adjust the schedule of the remaining work to deal with, make up for, or otherwise work around the delays resulting from the Unforeseeable Cause(s).

The notice shall, in writing, specify the Unforeseeable Cause(s) and the anticipated effect it will have on that

CONTRACTOR'S abilities to perform its obligations along with a plan to deal with the effects of such Unforeseeable

Causes and proposed amendments to all affected schedules necessarily resulting therefrom.

No adjustment shall be made to the Contract price, and the CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to claim or receive any additional compensation as a result of or arising out of any delay resulting in the adjustment of the working time, due to any of the factors outlined within this Special Condition and/or NCTCOG Item 108.8.

SC.15 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Five (5) sets of plans and specifications shall be furnished to the CONTRACTOR, at no charge, for construction purposes. Additional copies may be obtained at the cost of reproduction upon request.

SC.16 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS

Where reference is made in these specifications, to specifications compiled by others, such reference is made for expediency and standardization from the material supplier's point of view, and such specifications referred to are hereby made a part of these specifications.

SC.17 TRADE NAMES AND MATERIALS

No material which has been used by the CONTRACTOR for any temporary purposes whatsoever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without written consent of the ENGINEER.

Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand name, it is not the intention of the OWNER to discriminate against an equal product of another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality or

performance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words "equivalent", "proper", or

"equal to" are used, they shall be understood to mean that the thing referred to shall be proper, the equivalent of, or equal to some other thing, in the opinion or judgment of the ENGINEER. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the specifications in connection with material, manufactured article, or process, the material, article or process specifically designated shall be used, unless a substitute shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER and the OWNER, and the OWNER shall have the right to require the use of such specifically designated material, article or process.

SC.18 PERMITS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY

The OWNER will provide rights-of-way for the purpose of construction without cost to the CONTRACTOR, by securing permits in areas of public dedication or by obtaining easements across privately owned property. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, prior to the initiation of construction on easements through private property, to inform the property owner of this intent to begin construction. Before beginning construction in areas of public dedication, the CONTRACTOR shall inform the agency having jurisdiction in the area forty-eight (48) hours prior to initiation of the work.

SC.19 GUARANTY AGAINST DEFECTIVE WORK

The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the OWNER against any repairs which may become necessary to any part of the work performed under the contract, arising from defective workmanship or materials used therein, for a period of two (2) year from the date of final acceptance of the work.

SC.20 CITY OF CEDAR HILL MONUMENTS

The CONTRACTOR shall protect all OWNER and USACE monuments, and when any such monuments are in danger of being disturbed, they shall be properly referenced, and if disturbed, shall be reset at the expense of the

CONTRACTOR, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

SC.21 PROJECT MAINTENANCE

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain, and keep in good repair, the improvements covered by these plans and specifications until Final Acceptance of the project by the OWNER.

SC.22 CONSTRUCTION STAKES & R.O.W. PINS

Delete the first sentence of the first paragraph of NCTCOG Section 105.4 and replace with the following:

The CONTRACTOR will furnish the construction stakes necessary for the construction of the improvements.

The CONTRACTOR shall verify and maintain existing controls as described on the construction drawings.

Additional construction stakes will be provided by the CONTRACTOR per Item 105.4 of the NCTCOG General

Provisions, with the following additional requirements:

The CONTRACTOR will match existing grades and cross slopes on road paving, and match storm sewer soffit/flow lines as appropriate. The CONTRACTOR will provide his own surveying control as he may require for proper grade control.

The contractor will be held responsible for the preservation of all control points and R.O.W. pins established by the engineer and, if any points have been carelessly or willfully destroyed or disturbed by the contractor, they shall be replaced by the contractor or the cost of replacing them will be charged against the contractor and deducted from the payment of the work.

SC.23 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN

The CONTRACTOR shall submit proposed concrete mix design for each class of concrete to the OWNER for review and acceptance by the ENGINEER. The mix designs shall be proportioned in accordance with the requirements of A.C.I. 318-83, and include data from field experience and/or trial mixtures with the results of confirmation cylinders. The mix designs and supporting data shall be submitted and accepted at least ten (10) calendar days prior to placing concrete.

SC.24

1.

TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL

Testing of Materials

Observation of the CONTRACTOR'S work to determine compliance with the plans and specifications will include testing of material installed on the project. Testing of work performed and materials furnished shall be done by an engineering testing laboratory employed by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall use only materials in the work which meet the requirements of the specifications. The City will employ the services of an engineering testing laboratory to make certain inspections and to sample and test the materials to be used in the work. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, at his own expense, all necessary specimens for testing of the materials and when requested, shall furnish a complete written statement of the origin, composition, and/or manufacturer of any or all materials that are to be used in the work. All materials not conforming to the requirements of the specifications will be rejected.

During the construction, the OWNER will retain the engineering testing laboratory to perform services related to checking the quality of the work being performed by the CONTRACTOR to determine if the improvements are being constructed in accordance with the plans and specifications. THIS QUALITY

CONTROL SERVICE DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF HIS RESPONSIBILITY WITH

REGARD TO CONSTRUCTING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT. If the

CONTRACTOR fails to meet specified conditions by the first test, further tests to demonstrate compliance with the contract shall be at the expense of the CONTRACTOR, and payment for the test can be withheld permanently from the CONTRACTOR'S total compensation.

THE CONTRACTOR SHALL GIVE THE ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE OF THE OWNER

SUFFICIENT NOTICE OF HIS INTENTION TO CONSTRUCT PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE

PAVEMENT, STRUCTURAL CONCRETE, OR HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE TO ASSURE THE

ADEQUATE QUALITY CONTROL OF CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP.

3. Testing and Quality Control Services

Testing and Quality Control Services shall include but are not limited to the following: a. Reinforced Concrete Pavement

(1) Analysis of Aggregates b.

(4) Prepare or Check Concrete Batch Design

(5) Slump and Air Content Tests

(6) Flexural or Compressive Strength Tests

Cement Treated Base or Flexible Base

(1) Lime requirements as indicated by test method ASTM D806-11

c. d.

(2) Field Compaction Tests - ASTM D698-90 Method A (Perform one (1) Density Test on compacted subgrade for each 5,000 square feet of area)

Embankment or Pavement Subgrade

(1) Moisture - Density Curves

(2) Field Compaction Tests-Test Method ASTM D698-90 Method A

Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete

(1) Prepare or Check Mix Design

(2) Provide Full Quality Control at Hot Mix Plant

(3) Make Tests from Samples of Mix (a) Extraction (b) Gradation (c) Percent Asphalt (d)

Stability and Density Tests (e) Make Hot Bin Analysis Every 250 Tons

(2)

(3)

Batch Plant Weight and Moisture Checks

Slump and Air Tests

The CONTRACTOR shall make every reasonable effort to protect all trees along the project right-of-way as shown in the plans. No tree as shown in the plans shall be removed without the approval of the OWNER. Minor adjustments in alignment to protect trees are subject to approval of ENGINEER.

Delete the first sentence of the first paragraph of Section 201.11 and replace with the following:

The work shall consist of constructing a temporary stabilized construction entrance as shown in the SWPPP, prepared by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER, and remaining in place for the duration of the construction period to facilitate the removal of sediment and other debris from construction equipment prior to exiting the construction site.

Materials may be stockpiled at locations approved by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall first contact Mr.

Tom Lindsey (432)208-2435 for potential location(s) for the batch plant. All stockpiling methods must be approved by the City of Cedar Hill. Any other locations for batch plants must be reviewed and approval by the City of Cedar

Hill.

The storage site shall be determined at the pre-construction meeting after the award of contract.

CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the storage site.

If necessitated, CONTRACTOR shall erect a temporary fence and store materials inside of the fenced area.

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain the storage area in a neat and orderly manner. If, in the opinion of the

ENGINEER or OWNER, the storage site becomes unsightly, the CONTRACTOR shall clean up the storage site within two (2) days of notification to do so.

At the completion of the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the temporary storage fence and all debris in the area. The CONTRACTOR shall restore the storage site to the original condition, including, if necessary, grading and turf re-establishment.

SC.28 SITE

The CONTRACTOR shall limit his work to the right-of-ways, easements, or construction limits shown on the

Drawings.

SC.29 FENCES AND DRAINAGE CHANNELS

Boundary fences, gates or other improvements removed to permit this construction shall be replaced in the same location and left in a condition as good as or better than that in which they were found except as shown in the plans.

Where surface drainage channels are disturbed or blocked during construction, they shall be restored to their original condition of grade and cross section after the work of construction is completed.

SC.30 MOWING & DEBRIS MAINTENANCE

During construction and through to final acceptance, the CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall be responsible for maintaining the existing turf areas within the work area. The CONTRACTOR shall mow this area as often as necessary to maintain the turf areas, at a 2" to 2½” maximum height. Minimum cutting height for the turf shall be

1½”. At no time shall weeds within the maintenance limits reach a height greater than 12 inches.

If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the site becomes unsightly, the CONTRACTOR shall mow the site within two (2) days after notification from OWNER to do so.

The CONTRACTOR at all times shall keep the construction site free from accumulation of waste materials, rubbish, debris, etc. caused by his operations. Waste materials, rubbish, debris, etc. shall be cleaned up daily and removed from the project site at least once a week.

No payment will be made for this work, its cost being subsidiary to the entire project.

Sprinkling as ordered by the OWNER to mitigate dust on this project will not be paid for directly but shall be considered subsidiary to the various bid items.

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain adequate site drainage at all times. Drainage runoff will be confined to the limits of the construction project and shall not be diverted over private property. Any runoff presently traversing private property shall not be increased by cause of construction. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, maintain and remove all necessary and required erosion control devices in accordance with the applicable North Central Texas

Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.

The contractor will be furnished one (1) set of plans on which all changes made during construction shall be indicated and regularly updated as needed. All notes and comments necessary to give or clear conception of exactly how all items were constructed, including location, shall be shown. This set of plans shall be reviewed with the

Owners representative at the completion of the project and prior to the Final Acceptance.

SC.34 EXCAVATION

No classification will be made for any materials to be excavated under this contract, regardless of the type of material encountered or the methods and equipment required to complete the excavation. No extra compensation will be allowed for encountering different types of material on this project.

The estimated quantities of excavation and fill are shown on the drawing and/or the proposal. Payment for excavation, loading, hauling, sprinkling, manipulation and compacting this material will be bid in accordance with the proposal.

All fill embankment shall be compacted to not less than 95% of test method Tex ll3E at optimum moisture content

(plus four points).

Any trench under existing or proposed roadways and/or alley sections will be select fill backfilled up to within two

(2)feet of the top of the subgrade and the remaining two (2) feet will be compacted to 95% of test method Tex ll3E in one (l) foot lifts at optimum moisture content (plus four points) using the native material, if suitable, or the entire trench will be compacted to 95% of test method Tex ll3E in one (l) foot lifts at optimum moisture content (plus four points) using the native material.

The excess excavation material resulting in this project shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR (at his expense) at sites approved by the City

SC.35 DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND SURPLUS EXCAVATION AND CONCRETE

All excavated earth in excess of that required for backfilling, and all pavement material removed, shall be disposed of in a satisfactory manner. Median areas shall not be filled in excess of the grades and lines as shown in the plans.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide in writing the final destination of this material. This documentation shall be submitted at the time of the SWP3 submittal outlined in SC.53- EROSION CONTROL.

The documentation shall include permission from the property owner and verification from the City Engineer or

USACE Lake Manger in the jurisdiction that the disposal area is outside the FEMA 100 year flood zone.

The disposal site shall be included in the acreage of disturbance for the Construction Site Notice/Notice of Intent and the erosion control/stabilization of the disposal site shall be included in the SWP3 as outlined in SC.53- EROSION

CONTROL. The CONTRACTOR shall first contact Mr. Tom Lindsey (432)208-2435 regarding disposal of excavated earth in excess.

SC.36 INSPECTION

Construction inspection will be performed by representatives of the OWNER, ENGINEER, geotechnical engineer and reviewing authorities and agencies. Unrestricted access shall be provided to them at all times. CONTRACTOR is responsible for understanding and scheduling required inspections. Testing samples shall be collected and processed by certified technicians. The designated representatives will observe and check the construction in sufficient detail to satisfy himself that the work is proceeding in general accordance with the Contract Documents, but he will not be a guarantor of the CONTRACTOR'S performance.

SC.37 LIGHTS AND POWER

The CONTRACTOR shall provide, at his own expense, temporary lighting and power facilities required for the proper prosecution of the work.

SC.38 WAGE RATES

All employees of the CONTRACTOR for the work to be performed under this contract shall be paid the prevailing wage scale in this locality for work of a similar character, and in no event, less than the minimums prescribed in the following schedule:

The "prevailing rates" shown will be the minimum wages acceptable on this project.

If the construction project involves the expenditure of federal funds in excess of $2,000.00, the minimum wages to be paid various classes of laborers and mechanics will be based upon the wages that will be determined by the

Secretary of Labor to be prevailing for the corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on a project of a character similar to the contract work in the City of Cedar Hill or the rate given above, whichever is higher.

Except for work on legal holidays, the "general prevailing rate of per diem wage" for the various crafts or type of workers or mechanics is the product of (a) the number of hours worked per day, except for overtime hours, times (b) the above respective Rate Per Hour.

For legal holidays, the "general prevailing rate of per diem wage" for the various crafts or type of workers or mechanics is the product of (a) one and one-half times the above respective Rate Per Hour, times (b) the number of hours worked on the legal holiday.

The "general prevailing rate for overtime work" for the crafts or type of workers or mechanics is one and one-half times the above respective Rate Per Hour.

The provisions of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Texas Statutes, shall govern penalties incurred by the

CONTRACTOR for violations of these conditions.

SC.39 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and Municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General CONTRACTORs of America except where incompatible with Federal, State, and Municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide such machinery, guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, acting at his discretion as an independent contractor.

SC.40 COORDINATION WITH OTHERS

In the event other contractors are doing work in the same area simultaneously with this project, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate his proposed construction with other contractors. It is very likely the CONTRACTOR will have to coordinate with franchise utilities, TRA, City of Midlothian, City of Grand Prairie, and State Parks.

SC.41 BARRICADES, WARNING SIGNS, DETOURS AND SEQUENCE OF WORK

Throughout the construction operations, streets and intersections will remain open to traffic by constructing the work in stages. All streets, driveways, adjacent business and alleys shall remain open to traffic as far as is practicable.

General Construction - The CONTRACTOR shall plan his work sequence in a manner that will cause minimum interference with traffic during construction operations. Before beginning work on this project, the CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval by the ENGINEER, a plan of construction operations outlining in detail a sequence of work to be followed; setting out the method of handling traffic on streets, roads and driveways along, across and adjacent to the work. If at any time during the construction, the CONTRACTOR'S proposed plan of operation for handling traffic does not provide for safe comfortable movement, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately change his operations to correct the unsatisfactory conditions.

One (1) lane in each direction shall be kept open at all times. If for any reason either lane requires closure, express permission from the OWNER MUST be obtained. The one (1) lane must be kept open and a flagman provided by the CONTRACTOR for vehicles exiting areas of construction. Barricades, portable barriers and other channelizing devices will be placed in accordance with the plans to separate traffic from active work zones as shown in the plans.

Ditches across the traffic lanes will be kept covered with a portable traffic-bearing surface at all times unless work in the ditch is in progress. Only one lane of traffic may be closed at a time when work is in progress in a ditch.

Safety - The CONTRACTOR shall provide, construct and maintain barricades and signs at locations set out in the plans and in the special conditions. In addition, he shall provide and maintain such other barricades and signs as deemed necessary by the ENGINEER, and provide and maintain, between sunset and sunrise, a sufficient number of lights at barricades and points of danger for the protection of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.

All traffic control devices shall have reflective sheeting conforming to TxDOT DMS-8300 TY C. Project limit signs shall be placed on either end of the project and at all intersecting roadways in accordance with TxDOT Standard

Drawing BC(2)-14. CW20-1D signs will be supplemented by Type II Barricades with two Type-A-Low Intensity

Flashers per barricade. Throughout the construction sequence, adequate traffic control measures shall be provided to safely guide traffic through the project.

Barricades shall be placed in such a manner as not to interfere with the sight distance of drivers entering the street from highways or side streets.

During construction, the CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish, place, and maintain in accordance with the

Texas Manual on "Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways", vertical panels along edge of pavements and fills that are hazardous. The vertical panels shall be supplemented with steady burning electric lamps alternated with delineator panels.

The CONTRACTOR shall keep traveled surfaces used in his hauling operation clear and free of dirt or other material.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain qualified flagmen at such points and for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the safety and convenience of public travel and CONTRACTOR'S personnel.

The CONTRACTOR shall arrange his work so that stored machinery or equipment shall not be closer than 5 feet to the traveled roadway after sunset except as authorized by the ENGINEER.

SC.42 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES OR INJURY

If any person files a claim against the OWNER, OWNER”S AGENT or CONTRACTOR for personal injury or property damage resulting from, arising out of, or caused by, the operations of the CONTRACTOR, or any work

within the limits of the project, the CONTRACTOR must either submit to the OWNER a duly executed full release within thirty (30) calendar days from the date of written claim, or immediately report the claim to his liability insurance carrier for their action in adjusting the claim. If the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with this provision within the stipulated time limit, it will be automatically deemed that the CONTRACTOR has appointed the OWNER as its irrevocable Attorney In Fact authorizing the OWNER to report the claim directly with the liability insurance carrier. This provision is in and of itself a Power of Attorney from the CONTRACTOR to the OWNER which authorizes the OWNER to take said action on behalf of the CONTRACTOR without the necessity of the execution of any other document. If the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the provisions of this item, the OWNER, at its own discretion, may terminate this contract or take any other actions it deems appropriate. Any payment or portion thereof due the CONTRACTOR, whether it is a final payment, progress payment, payment out of retainage or refund payment may be withheld by the OWNER as is authorized by Item 109.4 of NCTCOG Specifications as amended by

CITY. Bankruptcy, insolvency or denial of liability by the insurance carrier shall not exonerate the CONTRACTOR from liability.

As a result of the additional work created to OWNER due to non-response of claims for damages by

CONTRACTOR to third parties, CONTRACTOR shall incur penalties for failure to abide by this Special Condition.

The CONTRACTOR shall respond to the claimant in writing regarding the status of the claim, including whether

CONTRACTOR disputes the claim, wishes to settle, or will notify its liability insurance carrier regarding the claim.

CONTRACTOR will be assessed a penalty by OWNER of $75.00 per claim, for its failure to respond to the claimant as described above within thirty (30) calendar days of its written notice of claim by the City.

To ensure CONTRACTOR compliance, the OWNER shall be notified, by copied correspondence of responses or settlement by CONTRACTOR.

SC.43 OWNER’S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY INSURANCE

The OWNER shall be defined as The City of Cedar Hill, its agents and employees. The ENGINEER shall also be an additional insured.

SC.44 POLICY ENDORSEMENTS AND SPECIAL CONDITIONS

"Should any person sustain bodily injury or property damage within the limits of this project, the CONTRACTOR or his insurance agent shall investigate and report immediately his findings in writing to the OWNER. The OWNER, in his sole discretion, may elect at any time to file for coverage directly under the OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's

Protective Liability Policy."

SC.45 SPECIAL WARRANTY

Add the following:

The CONTRACTOR shall provide a Maintenance Bond in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the total amount of the contract guaranteeing the work in accordance with the plans and specifications for a period of two (2) years after acceptance by the City of Cedar Hill. This bond shall provide for repair and/or replacement of all defects due to faulty material and workmanship that appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of completion and acceptance of the improvements by the City of Cedar Hill.

This Special Warranty shall require the replacement of cracked concrete panels within the two years after acceptance by the City of Cedar Hill. Concrete panels observed to have cracked shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s sole expense.

SC.46 PAYMENT WITHHELD

Amendment to NCTCOG Specifications 109.4 - Payment Withheld:

Replace Item No. 6 with the following:

(6) Claim(s) filed against CONTRACTOR by OWNER or third parties or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims. In such event, until CONTRACTOR provides the OWNER with a copy of the settlement between the CONTRACTOR and the party seeking damages or evidence the matter is otherwise adjudicated, the

OWNER, in its discretion, is authorized to withhold sums owed the CONTRACTOR in the amounts for such claim(s) if the OWNER deems liability by the CONTRACTOR is probable. The OWNER may withhold the sums up to two (2) years following final acceptance of the project. This withholding shall confer no rights or benefits for third parties.

Delete the last paragraph and add the following:

“When the above grounds are removed, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them, and the

OWNER shall not be liable to CONTRACTOR for any decisions or actions of withholding payment, interest, attorney fees, costs, expenses, consequential or incidental damages which are a result of any delay in payment.”

SC.47 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

The CONTRACTOR shall submit six (6) sets of shop drawings to the OWNER for review and approval by the

ENGINEER (with concurrence by the OWNER). All copies shall be copies from an original, no fax copies will be permitted. Maximum paper size shall be 11” x 17”.

Submittals shall be made on all materials incorporated into the project and include but not limited to the following:

 Pipe and fittings

 Butterfly valves

 Gate valves

 Concrete mix design/ steel

 Irrigation equipment & supplies

 Traffic buttons

 Erosion control materials

 Electrical conduit

 Screening wall brick

 Precast materials

 Metal Fabrications

 Lake Ridge Monument

 Protective Coatings

 Stamped/colored concrete

 Landscaping and streetscaping items

 Railing – standard and special

 Culvert Head Walls

 Manholes and inlets

 Any other items identified in the specifications and drawings

Review of Shop Drawings by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the sufficiency of the said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformance with the plans and specifications, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor. It being understood and agreed that the

ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules or any means or methods reflected thereby in relation to the safety of either person or property during the contractor’s performance hereunder.

See attached streetscaping technical specifications for additional requirements concerning shop drawings and material approvals.

SC.48 SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR

The CONTRACTOR shall have on the project at all times, as his agent, a competent Superintendent capable of reading and thoroughly understanding the plans and specifications, and thoroughly experienced in the type of work being performed. The Superintendent shall have the ability to communicate clearly with the OWNER’s representative, have full authority to execute orders or directions and to promptly supply such materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals as may be required. Such superintendent shall be furnished irrespective of the amount of work subcontracted.

The Superintendent and the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all work performed by the subcontractor at all times during construction.

SC.49 DISTINGUISHING EXTRA WORK

No work shall be undertaken which requires extra payment without having an executed change order approved by the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, except when so ordered in writing.

SC.50 ANTITRUST

The CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to the OWNER any and all claims for overcharges associated with this contract which arise under the antitrust laws of the United States 15 U.S.C.A. Sec. 1 et seq. (1973).

SC. 51 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP

The ENGINEER is a representative of the OWNER during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract

Documents between the OWNER and the ENGINEER and shall not be extended or limited without written consent of the OWNER and ENGINEER.

SC. 52 PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION BY ENGINEER

The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to familiarize himself generally with the progress of the executed work and to determine if such work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical and functional engineering requirements of the Contract Documents; provided and except, however, that the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspection of the quality or quantity of the work or be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident thereto or in connection therewith. Notwithstanding any other provision of this agreement or any other

Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor or any of the CONTRACTOR's or subcontractor's agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the work.

SC.53 EROSION CONTROL

It shall be the full responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to acquire and comply with any and all permits as may be required to avoid delay of the project. No separate payment will be made for this item and it will be considered subsidiary to the other items bid.

Prior to construction, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with Federal and State storm water management regulations.

The plan shall employ measures to prevent erosion and siltation from the construction disturbance from reaching streambeds, channels, storm water structures, ponds, etc. The plan shall follow the City’s “Erosion and Sediment

Control Ordinance and comply with the requirements of the “Storm Water Quality Best Management Practices for

Construction Activities” manual published by NCTCOG. In the event of a conflict between these requirements and

Federal and State pollution control laws, rules, and regulations or other Federal, State or Local agency laws, rules, and regulations, the more restrictive shall apply. The release of the plan for construction by the City in no way relinquishes the CONTRACTOR of all responsibility and liability for the pollution control.

The cost to the CONTRACTOR for the preparation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) plan shall be included in the unit price bid for SWPPP. Erosion control measures to be incorporated in the above mentioned plan are detailed in the construction plans and are included in this contract as separate pay items. The bid items for the temporary erosion control items include the installation, maintenance (throughout the project duration) and removal of these items.

Every soil disturbing activity shall have an accompanying Erosion Control Plan (ECP), and Notice of Intent (NOI) for those activities disturbing 5 or more acres. A copy of the NOI shall be provided to the City of Cedar Hill and

TCEQ prior to start of construction. The ECP shall be provided to the Cedar Hill Public Works Department prior to grading.

The NOI shall be posted in a location viewable to the public until construction is complete and Notice of

Termination (NOT) submitted. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWP3) shall be readily available for review by Federal, State, or local officials and indicate the CONTRACTOR as the operator.

No soil disturbing activities will occur until the following has been implemented:

 SWP3 signed by both the contractor and owner

 OWNER submits NOI to the State

 CONTRACTOR submits NOI to the State

 SWP3, ECP, and associated Best Management Practices (BMP) being fully implemented and inspected by City of Cedar Hill

 NOI (as appropriate) posted on site and viewable to the public

The contractor shall comply with the City of Cedar Hill’s Storm Water Ordinance, the current NCTCOG Best

Management Practices Manual, the TPDES General Construction Permit TXR150000 and any other State and/or

Local regulations.

The site shall be reviewed by the operator or his representative weekly, and within 24 hours after any major storm event. Adjustments/repairs to the erosion control measures will then be made as needed and inspected and approved by the City of Cedar Hill.

Final acceptance of a site shall be contingent upon vegetation being established per the TPDES General Construction

Permit, and proper NOT submitted to the State. A copy of the NOT shall be provided to the City of Cedar Hill.

Until such final acceptance of the erosion control has been determined, the City of Cedar Hill shall withhold half of the retainage as described in the Progress Payments and Retainage section of this document.

Silt Fence around the rock area (French drain) of ditches and grate inlets within ditches shall be retained and maintained until grass is established.

The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate construction activities with the following affected agencies:

US Corps of Engineers

Jason W. Owen, 817-822-7685

Cedar Hill State Park

Joshua Choate, Superintendent, 214.207.4509

Derek Dye, Asst. Superintendent Operations, 214.460.8120

TRA

Lift Station at Anderson Road:

Gaylin Grant, 214-876-1500

Bobby Mendoza, 214-876-1498

Force Main:

John Durbin, 214-876-1057

City of Grand Prairie

Streets:

Primary contact - Leland Miller office: 972.237.8529 cell: 972.207.6211

Secondary contact – Manuel Alonzo office: 972.237.8530 cell: 214.316.6952

Water Utilities:

Primary contact – Jim Siddall - office: 972.237.8410 cell: 469.371.8487

Secondary contact – Barry Walsh - office: 972.237.8422 cell: 817.683.7544

City of Midlothian

Mike Adams (972) 775-7105

Cedar Hill ISD

Kim Lewis 972 291 1581, x 4023 (ofc); 214 957 5306 (cell)

Mrs. Kellie Spencer, 972 291 1581 x 4059

Atmos

Robert Joe Smith, (972) 228-6395

AT&T

Emergency number 1-800-286-8313, for reporting damage to AT&T

Project Manager Joyce Ingram with CobbFendley Associates, 817-946-5895

AT&T Engineer Robert Aldape, 972-660-0446

ONCOR

John Sprunck, 972-825-7616

Allen Crawford, 214-789-7398

Time Warner Cable

Tim Wenberg, 214-687-1240

City of Cedar Hill

Robert Woodbury, City Engineer – 469-628-6344

Clifton Felts, Parks Superintendent – 469-628-5590

Operations After Hours – 972-780-6643

CONTRACTOR shall inform residences and businesses 48 hours prior to any interruption of sewer and water service or construction in a driveway or entrances.

CONTRACTOR shall schedule the construction activities to minimize any inconvenience to the residents and businesses. Interruptions to existing services may be required to be done during off times and shall be coordinated with the affected agencies.

SC. 55 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

Within ten (10) days after the CONTRACTOR has given the OWNER written notice that the work has been completed, the ENGINEER and the OWNER shall inspect the work. It shall be the duty of the OWNER within ten

(10) days to issue a Final Acceptance of the work to the CONTRACTOR if the work is found to be completed in accordance with the Contract Documents or to advise the CONTRACTOR in writing of the reason for nonacceptance. The date of Final Acceptance will coincide with the beginning of the project’s two year warranty period and the one year landscape maintenance period. Work and materials required as described for Landscaping maintenance and the date to start the maintenance bond’s two year period shall commence after the date of Final

Acceptance.

SC. 56 FINAL PAYMENT

Final Payment will constitute OWNER’s acceptance of project. Final Payment will be made after Final Acceptance and upon receipt of close-out documentation including consent of surety and affidavit that all bills are paid. The bid amount for Landscape Maintenance will not be paid with the Final Payment but will be paid in monthly installments for one year after Final Acceptance. Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a payment request to include a breakdown for individual major activities. 20% of the amount bid for landscape maintenance will be withheld as retainage towards the completion of the one year landscape maintenance phase for the project.

SC.57 PARTIAL PAYMENTS

Any partial payments due the CONTRACTOR, less retainage, shall be paid within thirty (30) calendar days following submittal of a monthly construction estimate. CONTRACTOR shall submit an updated critical path schedule with each monthly payment application.

SC.58 GRASS REPAIR

Unless otherwise specified in the plans, all grass areas damaged by construction shall be replaced with block sod.

Payment shall be contract unit bid price and shall be full compensation for all labor and materials, including water necessary to establish turf. Acceptance of grass repair shall be coordinated with City of Cedar Hill.

SC.59 TRENCH SAFETY

General

Excavation safety systems shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as provided in Subpart P - Excavation,

Trenching and Shoring, Part 1926 of the Code of Federal Regulations which describes safety and health regulations as administered by the U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.). The standards specified by the O.S.H.A. Regulations shall be the minimum allowed on this project. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to provide a design and install adequate safety systems for all applicable excavation on this project.

Core Borings

Any core borings and soil data furnished by the OWNER, are for the convenience of the CONTRACTOR. The

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any additional soil or geotechnical information required. The

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for properly designed excavation safety systems to be utilized for any type of subsurface condition found on this project. The furnishing of soil information by the OWNER in no way relieves the

CONTRACTOR of this obligation.

If no core borings or soil data are furnished by the OWNER, it shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to obtain whatever geotechnical information required for preparation of the excavation safety systems.

Inspections

In addition to the inspections of the excavation and excavation safety systems required of the CONTRACTOR by the

O.S.H.A. Regulations, the City may further inspect the work. The City shall have the right to reject any safety systems which it finds to be inadequate, and the CONTRACTOR shall immediately improve the system to comply with this specification.

Measurement and Payment

Excavation Safety System installed shall not be paid for separately and shall be subsidiary to the pay items requiring trench protection and or other means of temporary protection.

SC.60 DAMAGES TO CITY PROPERTY

If the CONTRACTOR damages any City property, i.e., water mains, he will be assessed applicable charges. All charges will be deducted from the CONTRACTOR'S monthly estimate per NCTCOG Standard Specifications

Section 109.4 and SC.61 - EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER PROPERTY.

SC.61 EXISTING UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER PROPERTY

The CONTRACTOR's attention is directed to the necessity of taking adequate measures to protect all existing structures, improvements and utilities which may be encountered. These may include, but are not limited to the following:

Utilities: Including water mains and services, water meter boxes, oil and air lines, gas mains and services, sanitary sewers and service connections, storm sewers, telephone conduits, and electric conduits.

Street and Drives: CONTRACTOR shall at all times maintain streets and drives in a condition which will provide easy ingress and egress.

It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to cooperate with the Owners of all public and private utilities to locate, prior to opening trench, existing underground facilities and to notify the ENGINEER at once of any conflicts in grades and alignment. Every effort will be made by the ENGINEER to control alignment and grading to avoid conflict with existing utilities, but should change in alignment and grade be necessary, such changes will be made by the CONTRACTOR at his expense and no extra payment beyond the unit prices bid will be allowed by the OWNER.

Where excavation endangers adjacent structures and utilities, the CONTRACTOR shall at his own expense carefully support and protect all such structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure due to settlement, where it is necessary to move services, poles, guy and he shall cooperate with the utility owner.

Except as indicated on the drawings that utilities are to be moved by others, any costs of temporarily or permanently relocating utilities shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR without extra compensation from the OWNER. In case damage to an existing structure or utility occurs, whether failure or settlement; the CONTRACTOR shall restore the structure or utility to its original condition and position without compensation from the OWNER.

Before beginning work on this project the contractor shall submit, for approval by the OWNER, a plan of construction operations outlining in detail a sequence of work to be followed.

The contractor shall, plan his construction phasing in such a manner as to cause minimal interference with traffic during the construction operations.

The contractor shall keep traveled surfaces clean and free of debris or other materials of construction.

To facilitate shifting, barricades and signs used in lane closure or traffic staging may be erected and mounted on portable supports, the design of these being subject to the approval of the engineer.

SC.62 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL(S) INCIDENT

If any acts of the CONTRACTOR or its agents or employees cause City forces to respond to a hazardous materials incident, the CONTRACTOR will be assessed for the expenses incurred. All charges will be deducted from the

CONTRACTOR'S monthly estimate per NCTCOG Standard Specifications Section 109.4 and SC.61 - EXISTING

UTILITIES, STRUCTURES AND OTHER PROPERTY.

SC.63 EXISTING FACILITIES

The CONTRACTOR is responsible for contacting all private and public utilities for determining the location of existing facilities.

SC.64 PROJECT VIDEO

Prior to start of construction, CONTRACTOR shall videotape construction area and property adjacent to construction. This activity will occur in the presence of the OWNER or their representative to determine existing conditions prior to construction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the CITY a copy of the tape that has been transferred into DVD format. This shall be subsidiary to project.

SC.65 STREET CLEANUP

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for keeping streets adjacent to the project free of mud and construction debris at all times or as requested by the City. The CONTRACTOR shall not use a power broom type device on streets outside the construction improvements. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a mechanical or air generated pickup broom with water application.

SC.66 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION

The CONTRACTOR shall make the necessary arrangements for securing and transporting all water required in the construction, including water required for mixing of concrete, water for landscaping, sprinkling, testing, flushing, flooding, or jetting. The CONTRACTOR shall provide water as required at his own expense from the start of the construction phase to the end of construction phase up to the final acceptance for the project. Water required for the landscape maintenance period, after the final acceptance by the OWNER, will be at the OWNER’S expense.

However, CONTRACTOR shall make every effort to not waste water and repair leaks in a timely manner.

Contractor shall provide an estimate for monthly water usage to OWNER for approval 5 weeks prior to the contracted FINAL ACCEPTANCE date. It is expected that the water usage for the landscape maintenance period would be reasonably proportional to the seasonal monthly usage for this estimate. If the water usage for the monthly billing exceeds the estimate for the same month, the CONTRACTOR shall be held responsible for the additional costs..

Any party requesting the use of a temporary meter on a fire hydrant in the City of Cedar Hill shall execute an agreement with the City of Cedar Hill and shall deposit with the City of Cedar Hill the amount required by ordinance. Such deposit shall be returned upon payment of all charges for water use, and upon return of the meter and fittings in their original condition.

It shall be unlawful for any person to open or close any fire hydrant used to obtain water for any purpose with any tool or device other than a standard accepted fire hydrant wrench, which can be supplied by the City of Cedar Hill.

All mobile fire hydrant meters are to be brought to the Public Works Department, Cedar Hill, Texas, between the 1st and 10th of each month to be read.

Temporary fire hydrant meters shall be read monthly by representatives of the City of Cedar Hill, and bills rendered at the current rates for all consumption. Customers using such meters shall comply with the written procedures implemented by the Director of Public Works with regard to making the meters available to be read by

representatives of the Cedar Hill Water Department. It shall be unlawful for any person to fail to make such meter available to be read by representatives of the Cedar Hill Water Department, as required by written procedures issued by the Director of Public Works.

Upon conviction of violation of the above requirements punishment shall be by fine not to exceed Two Thousand

Dollars ($2,000.00). Each day on which a violation exists shall constitute a separate offense.

SC.67 SEWER PIPE AND WATER MAIN SEPARATION

Sanitary sewers or service laterals that are laid in the vicinity of pipelines designated to carry potable water shall meet the following conditions.

1. Parallel Installation - Sewers and Water Mains

Normal Conditions - Any new sanitary sewer or sewer manhole shall be located at least nine (9) feet in all directions from any existing water mains, and any new water lines shall be located at least nine (9) feet in all directions from existing sanitary sewer line or manhole, whenever possible; the distance shall be measured from the outside edge diameters of the pipes.

Unusual Conditions - New Sewer Line Installation - Where the nine (9) foot separation cannot be achieved, the new sewer shall be constructed of PVC pipe meeting ASTM specifications with a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi for both the pipe and joints. The vertical separation shall be a minimum of two (2) feet between outside pipe diameters and the horizontal separation shall be a minimum of four (4) feet. The new sewer shall be located below the existing water main, where it is practical.

2. Crossings - Sewers and Water Mains. Normal Conditions - A vertical separation of at least 24 inches shall be maintained between any potable water supply and sanitary sewers. Additional requirements for utility crossing are indicated in the General Notes of the Contract Drawings.

3. If these minimum clearances cannot be maintained, the water main shall be relocated.

All costs associated with existing utility support shall be considered subsidiary to the other bid items. Additionally,

CONTRACTOR shall coordinate work operations with utility contractors as necessary to facilitate timely completion of utility relocation and construction.

SC.69 EMBEDMENT AND BACKFILL

Backfill trenches as specified in the Standard Specification. The top 12 inches of backfill material shall be select fill, where the pavement or sidewalk is to be constructed. PVC pipe shall be Class 4 (NCTCOG Class “B-2” with granular material) and RCP shall be Class 2 (NCTCOG Class “B-2” with select material). (This replaces the City of

Cedar Hill Standard Construction Details – Water and Sewer Construction General Note No. 2, which lists the use of

Class B+ embedment).

SC.70

1.

2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING FENCES

Coordinate with the property owners and the City prior to removal of existing fences.

Existing fences which require removal because of construction activity shall be removed, disposed of off-site and replaced to the satisfaction of the City and the private property owner. There shall not be a separate pay item for removal and replacement of existing fences for the proposed construction, except as noted on the plans and in the Bid Schedule.

SC.71

1.

RESTORATION

Restore the project site to conditions not less than that existing prior to starting construction unless otherwise required by these specifications, Permits and/or Licenses, or shown on the Plans. a. Coordinate surface restoration work with the affected private property owners and the OWNER. b. Private property over which the OWNER has prior rights (i.e. utility easement, sewer easement) and/or has obtained rights-of-way, agreements, licenses and/or agreements from the property owner to allow construction shall be restored in conformance with the Contract Documents. c. Restore Public property with strict adherence to the requirements of the public body having jurisdiction therein. d. No restoration shall occur until testing is completed and accepted by the OWNER's Representative. e. Complete final surface restoration within three (3) weeks of the end of construction or as directed by the OWNER's Representative.

2. Reference Standards. Surface restoration including pavement, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutters, and sodding shall be in accordance with the City of Cedar Hill Standards and/or Public Works Construction

Standards-North Central Texas by North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG).

3. All disturbed areas except where sod is disturbed shall be seeded. Restore grassed area disturbed by construction with sod to match existing.

4. The contract lump sum unit price for sodding includes furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

SC.72 SPRINKLER REPAIR

The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the repair or replacement of any sprinkler damage caused by his construction.

This repair is subsidiary to the contract unless there is a specific item for sprinkler repair. Repair shall be coordinated and approved by City of Cedar Hill prior to completion.

SC.73 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT SURFACES

1. General a. Restore (unless otherwise specified or directed by the OWNER's Representative in writing) permanent type pavements, alley pavement, sidewalks, driveways, curbs, gutters, and surface structures removed or disturbed during or as a result of construction operations to a condition which is equal in appearance and quality to the condition that existed before the work began. The surface of all improvements shall match the appearance of the existing surface. The asphalt pavement shall be replaced with concrete pavement as per the Standard Construction Details by the City of Cedar Hill. b. Pour concrete only after inspection by the OWNER's Representative at the pouring site to verify proper forms and reinforcement. Reinforcement shall be equal in quantity and type of materials to reinforcement that existed prior to the work, or as indicated on the plans or specifications. c. Saw-cut existing pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters unless otherwise noted on the Drawings to provide a straight joint between the existing and new surface. Saw cutting shall be full depth and square or rectangular in shape.

d. e.

Cure and protect all exposed concrete installed under this contract in accordance with the reference standard.

Remove entire sidewalk squares. Removal of partial squares will not be allowed.

3.

4.

5. a. b. a. Concrete sidewalks shall be in accordance with the standard construction details by the City of

Cedar Hill included in the drawings. Existing sidewalks wider than four (4)-feet shall be replaced to their original widths. b. Saw-cut existing sidewalks at construction joints. Existing sidewalk squares damaged during construction activities shall be replaced.

Concrete Curb and Gutter

Curb and Gutter dimensions and cross sections shall conform to existing installations.

Place one half inch preformed bituminous expansion joint at junctions with existing work and at intervals not exceeding fifty (50) feet, or as directed by the OWNER's Representative. c. Saw-cut control joints at intervals not exceeding twenty (20) feet and at junctions with existing transverse cracks in the pavement, or as directed by the OWNER's Representative.

Concrete Pavement and Driveways. Remove and replace concrete pavement and driveways for the construction as shown in the drawings.

Measurement and Payment

Pavement, sidewalk, driveway, and curb removal and replacement shall be paid for at the Contract

Unit Price for the applicable item as indicated in the Bid Schedule.

Payment will only be made for the maximum allowable surface restoration width as shown on drawings and indicated below:

Pipe diameter less than 24" - Minimum allowable surface restoration width = O.D. of pipe + 3’-4".

Maximum allowable surface restoration width for deep excavations requiring Trench Safety provisions = O.D. of pipe + 4'-4".

Pipe diameter larger than 24" - Minimum allowable surface restoration width = O.D. of pipe + 4'-0".

Maximum allowable surface restoration width for deep excavations requiring Trench Safety provisions = O.D. of pipe + 5’-0".

Measurement will be made along the centerline of the pipe and the appropriate allowable surface restoration width will be applied. If the width of restoration is less than the normal allowable surface restoration width, then payment will still be based on the normal allowable restoration width. If a sidewalk is parallel to a main, and a portion of it falls within the maximum allowable restoration width, then the entire width of the sidewalk will be measured for payment. Variable depth curb length shall be measured from the beginning of the curb to the full depth of the curb. There will not be a separate pay item for variable depth curb, but shall be included in the standard curb.

b. Payment for all other surface restoration shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the

CONTRACTOR and shall be included in the bid price for the item affected thereby. c. Removal and replacement of sidewalk, curb and saw cutting of existing pavement, sidewalk, and curb for installation of service laterals will not be paid separately. The contract unit price for installation of service laterals shall include the above removal and replacement.

SC.74 CLEANUP

During Construction. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep the job site as free from all disposable material, debris, and rubbish as is practicable, and shall remove same from any portion of the job site when it becomes objectionable or interferes with the progress of the project, in the opinion of the ENGINEER or the OWNER.

Broken pipe, including vitrified clay pipe, cast iron pipe, and concrete pipe and other debris resulting from construction shall not be left on the site after the construction work is completed. Upon completion of particular phases of the concrete pavement improvements which can be used by the traveling public during construction, the joints shall be sawed at the proper time, and within ten (10) calendar days after sawing the joints, the joints shall be sealed and the pavement shall then be swept clean with a power-driven broom and opened for traffic. Under no circumstances shall the CONTRACTOR leave the joints unsealed unless written permission is given by the

ENGINEER. Whether permission is given or not for the CONTRACTOR to delay sealing the joints, the

CONTRACTOR shall sweep and clean up the slab for use by the traveling public. Under no circumstances shall the

CONTRACTOR use a completed pavement to stockpile backfill material. During the construction the

CONTRACTOR shall not damage improvements on private property, including shrubs, grass, pavement, walks, curbs and fences.

Final. Upon completion of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall remove from the site all plants, materials, tools and equipment belonging to him and restore the site with an appearance acceptable to the ENGINEER and the OWNER.

The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by him and shall deliver over such materials and equipment in a bright, clean, polished, and new-appearing condition.

SC.75 CONSTRUCTION IN PUBLIC ROADS AND PRIVATE DRIVES

It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to properly light, barricade and mark all bypasses and detours that might be required on and across the roads involved in the work included in this contract.

The CONTRACTOR shall make every effort to complete construction and allow immediate access to adjacent property at driveway entrances located along the alleys.

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all road and entrance reconstruction and repairs and maintenance of same for a period of two years from the date of such reconstruction. In the event the repairs and maintenance are not made immediately to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, and it becomes necessary for the State, County or City to make such repairs, the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the State, County or City for the cost of such repairs.

The CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, keep the width of all adjacent cross-streets, alleys or driveways clear of dirt and other materials to allow the free flow of traffic. The CONTRACTOR shall assume any and all responsibility for damage, personal or otherwise, that may be caused by the construction along the alleys or City streets.

SC.76 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF STREET AND DRIVEWAY PAVING

1. Removal and replacement of street and driveway paving shall be in accordance with the plans, Public Works

Construction Standards-North Central Texas by North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG), standard construction details by City of Cedar Hill, and Special Conditions specified herein.

2. Remove existing street and driveway pavement and curbs as shown on the drawings. Saw cut existing pavement and curb where portion of existing pavement and curb is to remain. Saw cut shall be for the full depth of pavement and curb. Dispose of the removed concrete off site.

3. Existing asphalt pavement shall be removed separately from the base material, stored and disposed of in accordance with the current Federal, State and City regulations.

4. Prepare subgrade for street and driveway pavement by excavating and filling the area as required, to bring the grade to the elevations as shown on the drawings.

5. Thickness of subgrade under the pavement shall be as shown on the plans and included in pavement design report. It shall be cement stabilized and compacted to at least ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D698. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 3 percent of optimum moisture content.

6. Subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition in conformity with the required section and established grade, until the pavement is placed.

7. Place reinforcement as shown in the Standard Construction Details included in the drawings.

8. Concrete for street paving shall have a minimum thickness as indicated in the plans and 4,000 psi compressive strength at twenty-eight (28) days for machine finish and 4,500 psi for hand pour. The minimum thickness of driveway paving shall be 6" and the compressive strength of concrete shall be 4,500 psi at twenty-eight (28) days.

9. Pour concrete only after inspection by the OWNER's Representative at the pouring site to verify proper forms and reinforcement.

10. Cure and protect all exposed concrete installed under this contract in accordance with the reference standard.

11. Saw cut joints shall be placed every 15 feet or in accordance with the plan details.

12. Minimum six (6) inches of topsoil shall be placed in the street parkway (area between right-of-way and edge of pavement) and all the other disturbed areas. Sod the street parkways and all the disturbed areas.

13. Removal of street and driveway concrete paving will be measured and paid at the contract unit price per square yard of concrete removed. Removal of curb, street and driveway paving includes removal and disposal of concrete off site. Saw cut of pavement and curb will not be measured separately and is subsidiary to the concrete removal. The cement treated base (plant mix) will be measured and paid separately per cubic yards. The construction of new concrete pavement and driveways will be measured and paid separately at the contract unit price. The contract unit price includes compensation for furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work, preparation of right-of-way, excavation, borrow, fill, compaction, disposal of excess material, paving, joints, topsoil, and seeding complete in place. The construction of new curb will be measured separately and paid at the contract unit price per linear foot of curb installed.

SC.77 JACKING, BORING OR TUNNELING

The following sentence is deleted from the paragraph 503.3.3.2, Page 503-2, of the Public Works Construction

Standards-North Central Texas, North Central Texas Council of Governments, Item 503.3 – Methods of Jacking,

Boring or Tunneling.

"Lateral or vertical variation in the final position of the pipe in the direction indicated on the plans".

Add the following sentence in place of the above deleted sentence.

503.3.3.2 - "No vertical or lateral variation of slopes and grades shown in the plans will be allowed for installation of pipe."

SC.78 PVC SEWER PIPE

All PVC sewer pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest versions of ASTM 3034, ASTM 794 or

ASTM 2241 and be either SDR-35 or SDR-26. Resin types shall be 12454B or 12454C.

SC.79 SERVICE LATERALS

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for locating service connections prior to construction.

CONTRACTOR shall verify by testing all service connections to determine if they are active or inactive. Only active services shall be connected to the new sanitary sewer system. Inactive services shall be plugged with grout. The

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any liability associated with the accidental plugging of active services. All active laterals shall be removed from the existing sewer line to the private property line. Replace existing laterals with new laterals of same size from the new sewer main to the private property line. In no case shall the size of service lateral be smaller than 4 inches in diameter. A cleanout shall be installed at the property line.

Install wyes at an angle of no more than forty-five degrees (45

) or less with springline.

Install service laterals with a straight alignment and at a uniform grade not less than one percent (1%) unless otherwise specified. Embedment and service lateral connection shall be as per Standard Details of City of Cedar Hill.

All service laterals crossing concrete pavement shall be installed by method other than open-cut (jacking, boring, or tunneling). The CONTRACTOR may, at his option, install the laterals by open cut. However, he must provide a two

(2) year maintenance bond on the lateral and pavement.

Maintain an accurate record of location and size of all active service laterals.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, service laterals installed by open-cut method shall be measured at the contract unit price per each, complete in place. The Contract unit price shall be total compensation for furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete the work, including excavation, concrete encasement, disposal of excess material, backfill, embedment, saw cut, removal and replacement of curb, sidewalks, sod, all in accordance with the plans and specifications. Furnishing and installation of Y connection shall be included

2. in the contract unit price of service laterals. Removal and replacement of pavement will not be measured and paid separately for installation of service laterals.

SC.80 PIPE PLUGGING AND SANITARY SEWERS TO BE ABANDONED

All work related to this item shall be coordinated and approved by the City of Cedar Hill.

1. Prior to plugging of a sewer segment, the CONTRACTOR shall verify that no existing services will be affected.

Physically remove sanitary sewer pipe outside of the manhole for a minimum distance of one (1) foot.

3.

4.

Fill pipe for a minimum length of one (1) foot with non-shrink grout.

Sawcut, removal and replacement of concrete paving for plugging of existing sanitary sewer line shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items.

5.

6.

If the existing sanitary sewer line is to be abandoned, and the new line conflicts with the existing line, then remove the existing line where there is less than 1-foot of clearance between the lines.

The pipe plugging and sanitary sewers to be abandoned shall be considered subsidiary to the other bid items. a. Perform bypass pumping for flow control. No bypassed wastewater shall be discharged into a natural or manmade drainage structure.

2.

3.

1. b. There shall not be a separate pay item for bypass pumping.

SC.81 SANITARY SEWER LINE AND FORCEMAIN CONNECTION

All work related to this item shall be coordinated and approved by the City of Cedar Hill.

Make existing and/or new sewer line connections to existing and/or new manholes as indicated on the drawings.

Perform by-pass pumping for flow control when connecting to existing sewer line or manhole.

There shall not be a separate pay item for connection of new sewer line to existing or new manholes and connection to existing sewer line. New sewer line connections to existing or new manholes and to the existing sewer lines shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items.

4. There is no separate pay item for dewatering existing forcemains for final connections. This includes the connection to the 30” TRA forcemain. All dewatering operations are subsidiary to the cost of the new forcemain.

SC.82

1.

STEEL ENCASEMENT PIPE

Steel encasement pipe shall conform to AWWA C-200. The pipe shall be fabricated in accordance with

ASTM A-570 from steel plates having a minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi. Encasement pipe shall have a minimum of 1/2" wall thickness.

2. Steel encasement pipe shall be painted inside and outside with two coats of KOPPERS CO. Bitumastic Super

Service black or equal coating manufactured by TNEMAC Company, Inc., prior to delivery to the job site.

Minimum thickness of coating inside and outside shall be 12 mils dry film thickness per each coat.

3. Encasement pipe shall be field welded in accordance with AWWA C-206 and AWS D7.0. The welded joints shall be wire brushed and painted with KOPPER's Inertol Quick-Drying primer 626 or equal primer manufactured by TNEMAC Company, Inc.

SC.83 SANITARY SEWER LINE AND MANHOLE TESTING

Each completed sanitary sewer line section shall be tested, prior to the final acceptance of completed section. The following tests shall be performed in accordance with the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Chapter 217, and published in Texas Register (Volume 25, Number 42, November, 2003).

1. Low pressure air test for all Sanitary Sewer Line included in this Contract.

2. Deflection testing (Mandrel Test) after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days.

a. The mandrel shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95% of the inside diameter (I.D.) of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, all dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. b. The mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or a rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least

75% of the inside diameter of the pipe. A proving ring shall be provided and used for each size mandrel in use. c. Adjustable or flexible mandrels are prohibited. A television inspection is not a substitute for the deflection test. A deflectometer may be approved for use on a case-by-case basis. Mandrels with removable legs or runners may be accepted on a case-by-case basis.

3. Acceptance Testing: After the completion of the manhole, the manholes shall be visually inspected by the

ENGINEER and the OWNER before final acceptance. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall perform low pressure vacuum air testing on each manhole. Each manhole shall be tested separately and independently of the sanitary sewer lines. All sanitary sewer lines coming into the manhole shall be sealed with an internal pipe plug. The method of testing shall be by means of creating an air vacuum within the manhole, whereby, a

10" Hg. (mercury) vacuum will be developed. The air vacuum shall then be monitored once it has reached

10" Hg. for a test period of two (2) minutes. The allowance drop in air vacuum shall be no greater than 1"

Hg. during the two-minute test period.

The air vacuum testing procedures for the manholes shall be according to the recommendations of Cheme Industries,

Inc., (Air-Loc Vacuum Manhole Tester), or such other manufacturers/suppliers that would have acceptable equipment designed specifically for air vacuum testing of manholes.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the OWNER with certified documentation that the test procedures were conducted as recommended by the equipment manufacturers and the test results were actual numbers recorded in the field. The CONTRACTOR shall record and certify to the following information: a. b. c.

Date and time of testing

Name of contractor's representative performing the tests

Equipment used and calibration procedures g. h.

Drop of air vacuum within the test period

Other observers at the testing site

SC.84 WATER PIPE

All 6-inch, 8-inch and 12-inch water mains to be AWWA C900 DR-14 (200 Pressure Class) PVC pipe or polywrapped ductile iron. All water line fittings to be ductile iron. All valves shall be AWWA approved resilient wedge gate valves. Minimum cover shall be a minimum of 4.0 feet.

Fire hydrants shall be three way breakaway type no less than 5-1/4 inches in size and must conform to AWWA specifications C-502. They shall be Mueller “Super Centurion”, American Flow Control “Waterous Pacer” with all bronze to bronze moving parts. Two 2-1/2-inch NST hose connections are required. The 4 ½ -inch steamer connection shall be 4.800 pitch diameter with 4 threads per inch. The operating nut shall be 1-1/2 –inch P to F pentagon nut, open left. Mechanical joint connection is required.

All bolts and nuts for mechanical joints and other fittings shall be forged stainless steel confirming to ASTM A 182,

Grade F316.

Fire hydrants will be placed 2 to 3 feet from back of curb unless otherwise indicated on the plans, or as required to clear sidewalks.

A Blue Stimsonite, Fire –Lite reflector (or approved equal) shall be placed in the center of the street opposite each fire hydrant. The fire hydrant shall be painted with two coats of Rust-oleum #1510 chrome paint or approved equal, and two coats of primer.

Valves 4” through 12” shall be Resilient Seated Gate Valves and must conform to AWWA Standard C-509. They shall be Mueller or approved equal.

Valves over 16” shall be butterfly valves and must conform to AWWA Standard C-504 and shall have mechanical seals.

Install 2’ x 2’ x 4” thick, concrete block around all water valves outside of concrete pavement.

Valve extensions shall be provided on all valves with operating nuts greater than 4’ below finished ground or paving grade and be brought to within 1 Ft. of finished grade.

SC.87 WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS

All water services locations shall be coordinated and approved by the City of Cedar Hill. They shall be located in the center of the lot, unless replacing an existing service then the new service shall be located in the same area as existing service.

All water services shall be 1-inch minimum or polyethylene tubing meeting AWWA C-901 and ASTM D-2737, 1inch minimum compression fitting angle stop, and meter box. Angle stops will be located within the meter box and facing toward the lot per City of Cedar Hill Construction Details.

Each meter box will be located adjacent to the curb and installed after street pavement has been completed and curbs backfilled. Meter box shall be DFW Plastics DFW1814BTL or equal with a 2” minimum metal locator plate in the recess for ¾” to 1” meters, and shall be DFW2818PLCIR or equal for 1-1/2” to 2” meters.

SC.88 FURTHER BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

BASE BID – PAVING AND DRAINAGE

ITEM NO. 1 TREE, SHRUBBERY & VEGETATION REMOVAL

This item shall include all work necessary to remove trees and vegetation as designated in the plans including but not limited to trees, limbs, stumps, and roots. The method for removal of tree stumps will be at the discretion of the

CONTRACTOR, however any root system should be grounded or removed to a minimum depth of 18 inches. In the event that any utility is damaged or destroyed, the repair or replacement of said utility shall be at the

CONTRACTOR’S expense.

ITEM NO. 2 MOBILIZATION

The work under this item shall include the establishment of offices and other facilities on the project site and the movement of personnel, construction equipment and supplies to the project site or to the vicinity of the project site in order to enable the CONTRACTOR to begin work on the contract. The cost of all bonds, insurance, and

Partnering Workshop for the project will also be considered part of this item.

Mobilization will be measured as a lump sum item as the work progresses. Partial payments for mobilization shall be paid for at the Total Unit Price as shown in the bid proposals with the regular monthly estimates as follows: The adjusted contract amount for construction times as used below is defined as the total contract amount less the lump sum bid for mobilization. a. When 1% and less than 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction items is completed, 50% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. b. When 5% and less than 10% of the adjusted contract amount for construction times is completed, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under this section will be deducted from this amount. c. When 10% or more of the adjusted contract amount for construction items is completed, 95% of the mobilization lump sum bid will be paid. Previous payments under this section will be deducted from this amount. d. Payment for the remainder of the lump sum bid for “Mobilization” will be made on the final estimate.

A field office will be required for this project in accordance with TxDOT item 504 “Field Office and Laboratory” and is considered subsidiary to mobilization. The following amendments are made to TxDOT item 504:

Article 504.2: Equipment. A. General: The first, second and third paragraphs of the article are voided in its entirety and replaced with the following:

The building shall be provided, operational, on the job site as soon as possible after the contract is executed, prior to commencement of any work. It shall remain in place until the project is accepted by the City as complete, unless its earlier removal is authorized by the City. It shall be located near the Contractor’s work area, adjacent to the project, at a location acceptable to the City. The building shall be an independent unit and shall be primarily for the use of the CONTRACTOR and City inspection forces.

Article 504.2: Equipment. A. General . 2. Buildings, b. Laboratory: This item is hereby voided and not replaced.

Article 504.2: Equipment. A. General . 3. Field Office and Laboratory Appurtenances: This item is hereby voided and replaced with the following:

Provide workbenches and tables at least 3 feet wide and 6 feet long, chairs and filing cabinets in the quantity acceptable to the City. Provide solar screens, blinds or shades if deemed necessary by the City inspector.

Provide potable water, electricity, heating/cooling, collection and disposal of trash and janitorial services acceptable to the City.

B. Structure Type.

a. Type C Structure (Field Office). Provide at least 400 sq. ft. of gross floor area in rooms 8 ft. high. Partition the floor area into at least 2 interconnected rooms with doors, 2 exterior doors, and at least 1 window in each room.

ITEM NO. 3 BARRICADES, SIGN & TRAFFIC HANDLING

Three (3) project signs as shown in Appendix A, Figure 2 are subsidiary to this pay item. These shall be placed at location as specified by the OWNER.

ITEM NOs. 24 & 25 RETAINING WALLS

All retaining walls shall be form-lined with an Austin Ashlar 17002 pattern by Fitzgerald or approved equal. Color/stain shall be H&C Concrete Stain (Sherwin-Williams) Color Aztec Sand HC136 or approved equal. CONTRACTOR shall provide shop drawings of the form liner and samples of the stain concrete.

Cost associated with the pattern and staining will not be paid for separately and will be considered to the pay items of the walls.

ITEM NOs. 30 & 31 MEDIAN NOSE (TY 1) & (TY 2)

Median noses shall be monolithic with pavement and constructed per the details provided. Buttons shall be installed and oriented as directed by the City of Cedar Hill.

ITEM NOs. 35 & 36 CROSSWALKS & TRAFFIC ISLANDS – STAMPED CONCRETE

Crosswalks shall be constructed with full-depth paving section with stamped pattern. See technical specifications Section 321316 ‘Colored Concrete Paving’ for additional materials and requirements.

The following shall supersede NCTCOG 305.3.3.4.Finishing: Concrete Traffic Islands (or medians) as identified in the plans shall be finished as identified in technical specifications Section 321316 ‘Colored

Concrete Paving’.

ITEM NO. 44 INSTALL FENCE (5-STRAND BARB WIRE, USACE)

I. GENERAL: Contractor will furnish all labor, materials, equipment and any other incidentals regarding the entire fence along Mansfield Rd., bordering Cedar Hill State Park to include removal of existing fence, posts etc., and construct a new replacement boundary fence with new wire, posts, bracing etc. at Cedar Hill State Park in strict accordance with these specifications and other contract documents.

II. FENCE LOCATIONS: The proposed fence lines are indicated in the attached maps.

III. FENCE DESCRIPTION: Fence will be composed of 5-strands of all steel wire following this configuration:

Top wire is smooth wire; three middle wires are barbed wire; bottom wire is smooth wire.

IV. MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS:

1. BARBED WIRE: The barbed wire shall be new, double stranded at least 12 ½ gauge malleable steel, galvanized, and 2 point barbed wire at 80 rods/roll. New CF&I brand or equivalent and meet ASTM-Class 1 specification.

Spacing between bottom wire strands will be 18” from bottom (ground level). Strands 2 through 5 will be spaced 10” apart. All fences will be constructed of at least five strands of wire with a total height of fence to the top wire to be not less than 52 inches.

2. POST:

A. Line Posts-Steel Pipe

1. New steel pipe of high quality shall be used as line posts. The pipe shall be 2-inch (2.375 inch outside diameter) nominal standard steel pipe (schedule 40). Wire shall be attached to post by wrapping with 16 gauge or larger galvanized tie wire.

2. Length - Length must be sufficient to provide for the construction of at least 52 inch-high fence of 5 wires, and must be set solidly in the ground to a minimum depth of three feet on deep soils or two feet in rocky soils. Posts will be set in cement as specified in section C.

3. Spacing- Maximum intervals for steel pipe line posts shall be 225 feet.

4. Pull Post Assemblies- In straight level sections of fence, anchor or pull posts shall be spaced in intervals, approximately 1320’. Pull posts are needed more frequently in rough terrain. Pull posts shall be constructed as a “H” brace or as a single post dead-manned in both directions.

Material shall be of steel pipe as specified in section 2A-1 and welded if applicable.

B. Line Posts-“T” steel posts

1. New standard “T” steel posts weighing not less than 1.33 pounds per foot of length, exclusive of anchor plate shall be used. The “T” post shall be American manufactured, be rolled from high carbon steel, and shall have a protective coating-either galvanized by the hot dip process, or painted with one or more coats of high grade weather resistant steel paint, or enameled and baked. Steel “T” posts shall be stubbed, embossed, or punched for the attachment of wire to the posts. All posts shall be of the same color and match any existing “T” posts in color. Barbed wire shall be attached to the posts by using manufacturer’s specially designed clips.

2. Length- Steel “T” posts must be six feet in length and be sufficient to construct a fence of at least 52 inches in height to the top wire. “T” posts shall be set solidly in the ground to a minimum depth of 20 inches in deep soils or 18 inches in rocky soils. Regardless all posts will protrude above ground the same distance as to provide for equal exposed measurements.

C. Corner, Gate and Brace Posts-Steel

1. New steel pipe or used steel pipe of high quality shall be used as corner and brace posts. The steel pipe shall equal or exceed the requirements for 3-inch (3.5 inch outside diameter) nominal size standard steel pipe (schedule 40).

2. Steel posts shall be set a minimum of 36 inches below natural ground in a hole having a minimum diameter of 12 inches. Each post will be raised above the bottom of the hole by placing it on a small rock or brick. As a result, a hole in excess of 36 inches must be dug for each post.

Solid rock-18”

Caliche-34”

Dirt-38”

3. The hole shall be filled with concrete in such a way as to allow the embedment material to flow around and into the base of the post. The top of the concrete embedment material shall be mounted around the base of the corner or brace post and shall slope to natural ground at the edge

of the concrete to prevent water from ponding around the posts. Concrete will be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours prior to stretching wire.

4. Steel pipe posts shall be capped in such a way as to prevent rain from entering the pipe.

5. Steel pipe should be galvanized or painted. If painted, it should be brushed with a wire brush, treated with a rust inhibitor, primed with a metal primer paint, and then painted with two coats of a high grade weather resistant steel paint.

3. BRACING:

A. All horizontal bracing will consist of steel pipe and shall be equal to or exceed the requirements for

2-inch (2.375 inch outside diameter) nominal size standard steel pipe (schedule 40).

B. Steel braces shall be of a length sufficient to allow a minimum spacing of six feet between corner or gate posts and the brace post.

C. Steel braces should be galvanized or painted. If painted, refer to section C-5.

4. STAYS: Minimum of 9.5 gage galvanized 48” in length placed 5 ft. between “T” posts in line, closer in swale areas.

5. GATES: Existing gates along the fence should be relocated to the new locations. The concrete footing for the gate post will be 4’ deep minimum.

6. GAPS:

A. The following specifications apply when fencing is required across a deep gully, ditch, or creek bed.

1. 3” steel pipe posts shall be set on each side of the gully, ditch, or creek bed. The posts shall be set in the ground as specified in section 2C.

2. Swales: See attached drawing.

B. The fence across the gully, ditch, or creek bed shall have a wire stay at least every 5 linear feet.

Additional information and specifications shall be followed in accordance with Attachment A, #3 and #4.

V. CONSTRUCTION OF FENCE:

1. Attaching to Existing Fence: Contractor is responsible for reattaching existing fence (fence that is not to be replaced) to an “H” brace, corner brace or a T brace so that the integrity of the existing fence is not compromised.

2. Old Fence Removal: Contractor will remove all old fencing, “T” posts, line posts, corner posts, “H” braces etc. and is responsible for proper disposal.

3. Brush Removal: Contractor is to clear only brush necessary for new fence construction. Limits of clearing are 8’ wide by hand tools to ensure minimal ground disturbance on the state park side of the boundary.

Tree removal: prior approval by Park Superintendent only.

4. Contractor will place all line posts, corner posts, brace posts and terminal posts in concrete. Contractor will mix the concrete for setting posts in the correct proportion of potable water, cement, sand and aggregate to obtain a compressive strength of 2500 lb./PSI in 28 days.

5. Wire is to be attached on the outside of posts facing away from state park property. (wire will be on adjacent landowners side of fence)

VI. INSTALLATION:

1. SPLICING: Splicing shall be done by the “Western Union” method.

2. TENSION: All barbed wires shall be taut, but not so taut as to put undue tension on the pull (or stretch) posts.

3. UNIQUE TOPOGRAPHY: About changes in the ground level will necessitate an in-line brace at the edge of and escarpment, a high point, and low point. Additional strands of wire may be needed in swales. Detail

#4.

4. STEEL “T” POST SPACING: Steel line posts are to be spaced every 10 feet apart.

5. “H” BRACE SPACING INLINE: “H” braces shall be placed approximately 1320 feet (80 rods).

6. “T” Brace (3 H braces forming a T) will be used in tying in existing park fence and adjoining landowners’ fence when a corner brace cannot be utilized.

7. CONTRACTOR to purchase and install signs for USACE property fence. Assume nineteen (19) signs.

VII. SPECIAL CONDITIONS:

1. Fire Safety: Contractor will provide adequate fire protection during construction fence. A spotter must be utilized in all welding applications and adhere to 2009 IFC Chapter 26 (2603 and 2604). The following requirements should be followed: a. Welders should be licensed. b. A spotter is present to locate sparks/fires in the immediate and remote areas of the welding operation. c. Minimum of a 2-A:20-B:C rating fire extinguisher is present during welding operation. d. Conduct a 30 minute fire watch after the conclusion of all welding activities.

City Fire Marshall Reginald J. Alexander can be contacted at 972-291-1011 if there are any questions related to fire safety.

2. Construction Equipment: All equipment shall be in good working order, free of fuel or oil leaks and proper spark arrestors on equipment mufflers. In case of an accidental spill the contractor is responsible for immediate removal of contaminated soil and dispose of off park property at contractor’s expense. Bulk fuel tanks, storage, changing fluids on park property are prohibited.

INFORMATION:

Welded / Bolted Steel

Corner, Gate, And Angle Brace

NOTE 1: Three inch nominal size standard weight steel pipe with a nominal weight per foot of 7.58.

NOTE 2:

NOTE 3:

Two inch nominal size standard weight steel pipe with a nominal weight per foot of 3.65 pounds.

3/4” galvanized bolts, nuts and washers

Steel posts shall be set a minimum of 36 inches below natural ground in a hole having a minimum diameter of 12 inches. Each post will be raised above the bottom of the hole by placing it on a rock or brick. The hole shall be filled with concrete in such a way to allow the embedment material to flow around and into the base of the post. The tops of the concrete embedment material shall extend 2 inches above natural ground at the post or brace and shall slope to natural ground at the edge of the concrete to prevent water from ponding around the posts.

ITEM NO. 50 PED RAIL (SPECIAL)

See attached technical specifications Section 323100 ‘Ornamental Metals’ for additional materials and requirements. Drawing details are shown on sheet 204 of the contract plans.

ITEM NO. 51 STONE COLUMNS

This item shall include all work necessary to install STONE COLUMNS integral with ITEM NO. 48 ‘PED

RAIL (SPECIAL)’ as identified in the plans. The per each unit price shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work. See technical specifications Section 042200 ‘Unit Masonry’ for additional materials and requirements.

ITEM NO. 83 VMAX 350

The composite turf reinforcement mat (C-TRM) shall be a machine-produced mat of 100% coconut fiber matrix incorporated into permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting. The matrix shall be evenly distributed across the entire width of the matting and stitch bonded between super heavy duty

UV-stabilized nettings with 0.50 x 0.50 in. (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings, an ultra-heavy duty UV-stabilized, dramatically corrugated (crimped) intermediate netting with 0.5 x 0.5 in. (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings, and covered by a super heavy duty UV-stabilized nettings with 0.50 x 0.50 in. (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings. The middle corrugated netting shall form prominent closely spaced ridges across the entire width of the mat.

The three nettings shall be stitched together on 1.50 in. (3.81 cm) centers with UV-stabilized polypropylene thread to form permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting. All mats shall be manufactured with colored thread stitched along both outer edges as an overlap guide for adjacent mats.

The C350 shall meet Type 5A, B and C specification requirements established by the Erosion Control

Technology Council (ECTC) and Federal Highway Administration’s (FHWA) FP-03 Section 713.18.

ITEM NO. 84 VMAX 550

The composite turf reinforcement mat (C-TRM) shall be a machine-produced mat of 100% UV stable polypropylene fiber matrix incorporated into permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting. The matrix shall be evenly distributed across the entire width of the matting and stitch bonded between a ultraheavy duty UV stabilized nettings with 0.50 x 0.50 inch (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings, an ultra-heavy UV stabilized, dramatically corrugated (crimped) intermediate netting with 0.5 x 0.5 inch (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings, and covered by an ultra-heavy duty UV stabilized nettings with 0.50 x 0.50 inch (1.27 x 1.27 cm) openings. The middle corrugated netting shall form prominent closely spaced ridges across the entire width of the mat. The three nettings shall be stitched together on 1.50 inch (3.81cm) centers with UV stabilized polypropylene thread to form permanent three-dimensional turf reinforcement matting. All mats shall be manufactured with a colored thread stitched along both outer edges as an overlap guide for adjacent mats.

The P550 shall meet Type 5A, 5B, and 5C specification requirements established by the Erosion Control

Technology Council (ECTC) and Federal Highway Administration’s (FHWA) FP-03 Section 713.18

ITEM NO. 106 BOLLARDS

Removable bollard shall be a 4 inch medium security carbon steel bollard model No. IBP04080 as manufactured by Calpipe Security Bollards, 19440 S. Dominguez Hill Dr, Rancho Dominguez, CA 90220,

Phone 877.283.8518, email: [email protected]

or approved equal. Bollard shall be power coated; color to be selected by Owner’s representative. Bollard shall include heavy duty key lock with 2 keys.

ITEM NO. 129 DETECT2”PUSHBTN (Detect 2” Push Buttons)

Pedestrian push buttons and assemblies shall be Bulldog Ped Buttons by Consolidated Traffic Supply or approved equal.

ITEM NO. 133 SETUPSYS (Set up System)

Video detection system shall be Autoscope Video Detection system or approved equal.

ITEM NO. 137 FUR & INSTL INTERNALLY LIGHTED STREET NAME SIGN (ILSN LED)

ASSEMBLIES

These items shall be performed in accordance with Plan details. CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings for review prior to installation. Sign and assembly shall be Duralight or approved equal. This item shall include all work necessary to install ILSN LED at each of the intersections as identified in the plans. The per each unit price shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work.

ITEM NO. 138 unit Installed)

ETHERNETRADIOSUBSCRIBERUNITINSTL (Ethernet Radio subscriber

Minimum allowable signal strength shall be -80dB.

ITEM NO. 140 HWYTRFSIG(ISOLATED) (Highway Traffic System)

All mast arm mounted signs and mounting hardware shall be supplied by Astro-Brac or approved equal.

ITEM NO. 141 STREET LIGHT FOUNDATION

Materials and foundations shall conform to applicable standards and specifications per Oncor. This item shall include all work necessary to install foundations for roadway illumination at each location as identified in the plans. The unit price shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work.

ITEM NO. 150 RECEPTACLE PEDESTAL

Receptacles shall be Pedoc 1P18-C-HT-G or approved equal. This item shall include all work necessary to install receptacles at each roadway illumination pole as identified in the plans. The unit price shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the construction/installation of the concrete base and junction box associated with each receptacle

ITEM NO. 151 SIGN ILLM (Sign Illumination)

Sign illumination shall be Insight Medley X MX/9/RGB/12°/U/SMS/48/REM/TBL/LV and remote power supply shall be RPS/100/DAT/WET or approved equals. This item shall include all work necessary to

install sign illumination as identified in the plans. The unit price shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the work including connections to ground boxes.

BASE BID – LANDSCAPING

ITEM NOs. 166 THRU 183

See technical specifications included under SC 88 for materials and requirements.

BID ALTERNATES

ALTERNATE BID #1

ITEM NO. 48A PED RAIL (SPECIAL) FOR RETAINING WALLS

See specifications and details included under Section 323100 – Ornamental Metal Pedestrian Rail.

ALTERNATE BID #2

ITEM NOs. 219 & 220 LAKEVIEW DRIVE STREET REPAIR

This item consists of removal of failed panels along Lakeview Drive, per the geotechnical report for the

Mansfield Road project, from Mansfield Road to Lake Ridge Parkway, and replacing these panels with cement treated base (CTB) and 8” reinforced concrete, per City of Cedar Hill standard details. The limits of construction for Lakeview Drive repairs are as shown on Figure 3 of Appendix A. All connections to existing pavement shall by be in accordance to the pavement header detail found in SD-105, City standard details. The depth of the CTB is 8”, except in some isolated areas where the depth of CTB is specified to be 20”. This repair work will be done at the direction of the City, whereby the City will identify the panels which have to be removed and will inform the CONTRACTOR as to the depth of the CTB. This roadway is a 4-lane divided thoroughfare. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the repair work on one side of the street while traffic control measures are in place for 1-lane operation in each direction on the other side.

The CONTRACTOR is fully responsible for the preparation and implementation of a traffic control plan, which is incidental to the concrete and CTB items for this work. The CONTRACTOR must use a type of concrete which is cured in seven (7) days, after concrete test is complete and passes expected results.

Removal and disposal of existing roadway materials including but not limited to concrete and base materials is subsidiary to the cost of these items and shall not be paid separately.

The CONTRACTOR shall do this work as part of Phase I of this Mansfield Road project. All the repairs must be complete and the roadway must be open to traffic by February 1, 2016. The liquidated damages will apply beyond February 1, 2016, for this segment of the work.

SECTION 5

SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS

ITEM NO. 2 MOBILIZATION

“PARTNERING WORKSHOP” is considered subsidiary to Item No. 2 Mobilization.

The City of Cedar Hill Department of Public Works invites the CONTRACTOR to join it in a “Partnering” arrangement for the work covered by this contract. If the partnering invitation is accepted the following criteria will apply:

1. WHO – Key personnel from the CONTRACTOR, i.e., Project Manager, Project Superintendent, a representative from the paving crew, excavation crew, structure crew, and storm sewer and/or utility crew, major sub-contractors, any on site project representatives from the City of Cedar Hill Public Works.

2. WHEN – There will be two partnering workshops, they will be conducted prior to the pre-construction meeting and also post construction. The meeting time will include lunch.

3. WHERE – The partnering workshop will be conducted in the Multipurpose Court Room of the City of

Cedar Hill Government Center, 285 Uptown Blvd., Bldg. 100, Cedar Hill, Texas 75104.

4. FACILITATOR – The facilitator for this workshop will be the Director of Public Works for the City of

Cedar Hill or a person designated by the Director.

5. EXPENSES – The City of Cedar Hill will provide the meeting place. The CONTRACTOR shall provide lunch. Lunch expenses shall not exceed $15.00 per person including cost of food and drink, taxes, tip and delivery charges. All other expenses associated with the workshop such as personnel time shall be considered subsidiary to this bid item.

6. Either partner may withdraw from the Partnership Arrangement upon written notice to the other. However, no claim or dispute settled or change approved during the existence of the partnership shall be revived.

7. The sole remedy for non-performance of the partnership shall be termination of the Partnership Arrangement as set out in paragraph 6 of this section.

SECTION 6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TRAFFIC SIGNAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS

Standard and Special Specifications for Traffic Signal Installation

The following is a list of the governing specifications for the traffic signal installation at the intersections of

Mansfield Road at Lake Ridge Parkway and Lakeview Drive in Cedar Hill, Texas.

All specifications applicable to traffic signal equipment and construction for this project are identified as follows:

TxDOT Standard Specifications: Adopted by the Texas Department of Transportation June 1, 2004.

Standard specifications are incorporated into the contract by reference.

Item 416

Item 502

Item 618

Item 620

Item 624

Item 680

Item 682

Item 684

Item 686

Item 688

Drilled Shaft Foundations (421)(440)(448)

Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling

Conduit

Electrical Conductors

Ground Boxes

Installation of Highway Traffic Signals (610)(636)(656)

Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Heads

Traffic Signal Cables

Traffic Signal Pole Assemblies (421)(441)(442)(445)(449)

Pedestrian Detectors and Vehicle Loop Detectors (618)(624)(682)(684)

Special Provisions: Special provisions will govern and take precedence over the specifications enumerated hereon wherever in conflict therewith.

Special Provision to Item 416 (416---001)

Special Provision to Item 502 (502---033)

Special Provision to Item 620 (620---001)

Special Provision to Item 624 (624---014)

Special Provision to Item 636 (636---014)

Special Provision to Item 643 (643---001)

Special Provision to Item 682 (682---003)

Special Provision to Item 6266 (6266---017)

TxDOT Special Specifications:

Item 6006

Item 6266

Spread Spectrum Radios for Traffic Signals

Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System

Item 8040

Item 8317

LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module

Battery Back-up System for Signal Cabinets

City of Cedar Hill Special Specifications:

Radio Activated, GPS-based Traffic Signal Priority Control System

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

416---001

Drilled Shaft Foundations

For this project, Item 416, “Drilled Shaft Foundations,” of the Standard Specifications, is hereby

amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this

Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 416.5. Payment, Section A. Drilled Shaft is voided and replaced by the following.

A. Drilled Shaft. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Drilled

Shaft” or “Drilled Shaft (Non-reinforced)” or “Drilled Shaft (Sign Mounts)” or “Drilled Shaft

(High Mast Pole)” or “Drilled Shaft (Roadway Illumination Pole)” or “Drilled Shaft (Traffic

Signal Pole)” of the specified diameter, subject to the limitations for overruns authorized by the

Engineer given in Section 416.5.A.1, “Overrun.”

Article 416.5. Payment, Section A. Drilled Shaft, Section 2. Maximum Plan Length Shaft is supplemented by the following.

For roadway illumination poles, the maximum plan length shaft is the maximum length shaft, regardless of diameter, for any roadway illumination pole included in the contract.

• For traffic signal poles, the maximum plan length shaft is the maximum length shaft, regardless of diameter, for any traffic signal pole included in the contract.

09-04

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

502---033

Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling

For this project, Item 502, “Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling,” of the Standard

Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 502.4. Payment, Section C. Maximum Total Payment Prior to Acceptance is voided and replaced by the following:

C. Maximum Total Payment Prior to Acceptance. The total payment for this Item will not exceed 10% of the total Contract amount before final acceptance in accordance with Article 5.8,

“Final Acceptance.” The remaining balance will be paid in accordance with Section 502.4.E,

“Balance Due.”

10-07

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

620---001

Electrical Conductors

For this project, Item 620, “Electrical Conductors,” of the Standard Specifications, is hereby

amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this

Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 620.2 Materials. The fourth and fifth paragraphs are void and replaced by the following:

Use white insulation for grounded (neutral) conductors, except that grounded conductors

AWG No. 4 and larger may be black with white tape marking at every accessible location. Do not use white insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically shown on the plans.

Ensure that insulated grounding conductors are green except that insulated grounding conductors

AWG No. 4 and larger may be black with green tape marking at every accessible location. Do not use green insulation or marking for any other conductor except control wiring specifically shown on the plans.

09-04

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

624---014

Ground Boxes

For this project, Item 624, “Ground Boxes,” of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 624.1. Description is voided and replaced by the following:

Construct, furnish, and install ground boxes complete with lids. Remove existing ground boxes.

Article 624.2 Construction and Materials. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

Provide new materials that comply with the details shown on the plans and meet the following requirements:

 Construct cast-in-place concrete ground boxes and aprons in accordance with Item 420,

“Concrete Structures,” and Item 440, “Reinforcing Steel.”

 Provide fabricated precast polymer concrete ground boxes, and precast concrete ground boxes that comply with DMS-11070, “Ground Boxes.”

 Construct a concrete apron, when shown on the plans, in accordance with Item 432, “Riprap,” and Item 440, “Reinforcing Steel.”

Article 624.2. Construction and Materials is supplemented by the following:

Remove existing ground boxes to at least 6 in. below the conduit level. Uncover conduit to a sufficient distance so that 90 degree bends can be removed and conduit reconnected. Clean the conduit in accordance with Item 618, “Conduit” and pull, splice, or terminate new conductors as indicated in the plans. Cleaning of conduit is subsidiary to this Item. Pulling, splicing, or terminating conductors will be paid under Item 620, “Electrical Conductors.” Backfill area to ground level with acceptable material upon completing adjacent work related to conduit and conductors.

Article 624.3. Measurement is voided and replaced by the following:

This Item will be measured by each ground box complete in place or by each ground box removed.

Article 624.4. Payment is voided and replaced by the following:

The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Ground Boxes” of the types and sizes specified and for “Remove Existing Ground Boxes.” This price is full compensation for excavating and backfilling; constructing, furnishing, installing, and removing the ground boxes and concrete aprons when required; and equipment, labor, materials, tools, and incidentals.

10-10

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

636---014

Aluminum Signs

For this project, Item 636, “Aluminum Signs,” of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended

with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 636.1. Description is voided and replaced by the following:

Installation. Furnish, fabricate, and erect signs. Sign supports are provided for under other

Items.

Replacement. Replace existing signs on existing sign supports.

Refurbishing. Refurbish existing signs on existing sign supports.

Article 636.2. Materials, Section A. Sign Blanks is voided and replaced by the following:

A. Sign Blanks. Furnish sign blank substrates in accordance with DMS-7110, “Aluminum Sign

Blanks” or DMS-8305, “Fiberglass Sign Substrate,” and in accordance with the types shown on the plans. Use single-piece sheet-aluminum substrates for Type A (small) signs. Use either extruded aluminum or fiberglass substrates for Type G (ground-mounted) or Type O

(overhead-mounted) signs as shown on the plans.

Article 636.2. Materials, Section B. Sign Face Reflectorization is supplemented by the following:

Ensure that sign legend, symbols, borders, and background exhibit uniform color, appearance, and retroreflectivity when viewed both day and night.

Article 636.2. Materials, Section C. Sign Messages. The last two bullets are voided and replaced by the following:

 Fabricate non-reflective black film legend from materials meeting DMS-8300.

 Furnish direct-applied route markers and other attachments within the parent sign face, unless otherwise specified in the plans.

Article 636.2. Materials, Section D. Hardware is supplemented by the following:

Furnish sign hardware for fiberglass signs in accordance with the fiberglass substrate manufacturer’s recommendations.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 1. Sign Blanks. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

10-08

Furnish sign blanks to the sizes and shapes shown on the plans and that are free of buckles, warps, burrs, dents, cockles, or other defects. Do not splice individual extruded aluminum or fiberglass panels.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 2. Sheeting Application is voided and replaced by the following:

2. Sheeting Application. Apply sheeting to sign blanks in conformance with the sheeting manufacturer’s recommended procedures. Meet the fabrication requirements of DMS-8300,

Section 8300.7.F, “Sign Fabrication” for white, orientation non-compliant sheeting listed on the Department’s Material Producer List entitled “Sign Face Materials.” Clean and prepare the outside surface of extruded aluminum or fiberglass flanges in the same manner as the sign panel face.

Minimize the number of splices in the sheeting. Overlap the lap-splices by at least 1/4 in. Use butt splices for Type C microprismatic, Type D, and Type E reflective sheeting. Provide a 1-ft. minimum dimension for any piece of sheeting. Do not splice sheeting for signs fabricated with transparent screen inks or colored transparent films.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section A. Fabrication, Part 3. Sign Assembly. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

3. Sign Assembly. Assemble extruded aluminum signs in accordance with the details shown on the plans. Assemble fiberglass signs in accordance with the fiberglass manufacturer’s recommendations located on the Department’s Material Producer List entitled “Fiberglass

Sign Substrates.” Sign face surface variation must not exceed 1/8 in. per foot. Surface misalignment between panels in multi-panel signs must not exceed 1/16 in. at any point.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section B. Storage and Handling. The last paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

Store all finished signs off the ground and in a vertical position until erected. Store finished sheet-aluminum substrate signs in a weatherproof building. Extruded aluminum and fiberglass substrate signs may be stored outside.

Article 636.3. Construction, Section E. Replacement is supplemented by the following:

Mounting hardware for fiberglass signs will be per the fiberglass substrate manufacturer’s recommendations.

10-08

Article 636.3. Construction, Section H. Documentation is added.

H. Documentation. Provide a notarized original of the Signing Material Statement (Form 2273) with the proper attachments for verification of compliance.

Article 636.5. Payment. The first paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under “Measurement” will be paid for at the unit price bid for “Aluminum Signs,”

“Fiberglass Signs,” “Signs,” “Replacing Existing Aluminum Signs,” “Replacing Existing

Fiberglass Signs,” “Refurbishing Aluminum Signs,” or “Refurbishing Fiberglass Signs,” of the type specified.

Article 636.5. Payment, Section B. Replacement is voided and replaced by the following:

B. Replacement. This price is full compensation for: furnishing and installing new aluminum or fiberglass signs and hardware; removal of existing signs; fabrication of sign panels; treatment of sign panels required before application of the background materials; application of the background materials and messages to the sign panels; furnishing and fabricating frames, wind beams, stiffeners, or required joint backing strips; furnishing bolts, rivets, screws, fasteners, clamps, brackets, and sign support connections; assembling and erecting the signs; preparing and cleaning the signs; salvaging and disposing of unsalvageable material; and equipment, materials, labor, tools, and incidentals.

10-08

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

643---001

Sign Identification Decals

For this project, Item 643, “Sign Identification Decals,” of the Standard Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 643.2. Materials. Figure 1 and Table 1 are replaced by the following:

TxDOT

J F M A M J J A S O N D 2

200 201 202 203 204

3

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4

Sheeting MFR - Substrate

A B C D E F G H J K L M 5

Film/Ink MFR

A B C D E F G H J K L M 6

Sheeting MFR - Legend

A B C D E F G H J K L M 7

Installation Date

0 1 2 3 8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9

J F M A M J J A S O N D 10

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12

Figure 1

Decal Design (row numbers explained in Table 1).

03-09

Table 1

Decal Description

Row Explanation

1 – Sign Fabricator

2 – Month Fabricated

3 – First 3 Digits of Year Fabricated

4 – Last Digit of Year Fabricated

5 – Manufacturer of the Sheeting Applied to the Substrate

6 – Film (colored transparent or non-reflective black) or Screen Ink Manufacturer

7 – Manufacturer of the Sheeting for the Legend

8 – Tens digit of Date Installed

9 – Ones Digit of Date Installed

10 – Month Installed

11 – First 3 Digits of Year Installed

12 – Last Digit of Year Installed

Article 643.3. Construction, Section A. Sign Fabricator. Replace the first bullet with the following:

 “C” if fabricated by a commercial sign fabricator or “T” if fabricated by the

Department or the Texas Department of Criminal Justice,

Article 643.3. Construction, Section A. Sign Fabricator. Replace the last bullet with the following:

 sheeting, film, and ink manufacturers (codes for these manufacturers are located in the Department’s approved Material Producer List, “Sign Face Materials”)

Article 643.3. Construction, Section B. Contractor. This section is voided and not replaced.

03-09

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

682---003

Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Heads

For this project, Item 682, “Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Heads,” of the Standard

Specifications, is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 682.2. Materials, Section B. General. The first and second paragraphs are voided and replaced by the following:

Provide vehicle signal heads in accordance with DMS-11120, “Vehicle Signal Heads” and

DMS-11121, “12 Inch LED Traffic Signal Lamp Unit.” Provide vehicle signal heads from manufacturers prequalified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of prequalified vehicle signal head manufacturers.

Provide pedestrian signal heads in accordance with DMS-11130, “Pedestrian Signal Heads,” and

DMS-11131, “Pedestrian LED Countdown Signal Modules.” Provide pedestrian signal heads from manufacturers pre-qualified by the Department. The Traffic Operations Division maintains a list of pre-qualified pedestrian signal head manufacturers.

1-1 682---003

08-12

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION

6266

Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System

1. Description. Install a Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System (VIVDS) that monitors vehicles on a roadway via processing of video images and provides detector outputs to a traffic controller or similar device.

A VIVDS configuration for a single intersection will consist of 4 variable focal length cameras, VIVDS card rack processor system, and all associated equipment required to setup and operate in a field environment including a video monitor and/or laptop (if required), connectors and camera mounting hardware.

The system is composed of these principal items: the camera(s), the field communications link between the camera and the VIVDS processor unit, and the VIVDS processor unit along with a PC, video monitor or associated equipment required to setup the VIVDS and central control software to communicate to the VIVDS processor.

The VIVDS Card Rack Processor must be either NEMA TS 2 TYPE 1 or TYPE 2. TYPE 2 must have RS 485 SDLC.

2. Definitions.

A. VIVDS Processor Unit. The electronic unit that converts the video image provided by the cameras, generates vehicle detections for defined zones and collects vehicular data as specified.

B. VIVDS Processor System. One or more VIVDS processor modular units required to handle the number of camera inputs.

C. Central Control. A remotely located control center, which communicates with the

VIVDS. The VIVDS operator at the central control has the ability to monitor the operation and modify detector placement and configuration parameters. The equipment that constitutes central control is comprised of a workstation microcomputer along with the associated peripherals as described in this special specification.

D. Field Setup Computer. A portable microcomputer used to set up and monitor the operation of the VIVDS processor unit. If required to interface with the VIVDS processor unit, the field setup computer with the associated peripherals described in this special specification and a video monitor, also described in this special specification, must be supplied as part of the VIVDS.

E. Field Communications Link. The communications connection between the camera and the VIVDS processor unit. The primary communications link media may be coaxial cable or fiber optic cable.

09-05

F. Remote Communications Link. The communications connection between the VIVDS processor unit and the central control.

G. Camera Assembly. The complete camera or optical device assembly used to collect the visual image. The camera assembly consists of a charged coupled device (CCD) camera, environmental enclosure, sun shield, temperature control mechanism, and all necessary mounting hardware.

H. Occlusion. The phenomenon when a vehicle passes through the detection zone but the view from the sensor is obstructed by another vehicle. This type of occlusion results in the vehicle not being detected by the sensor.

Or

When a vehicle in one lane passes through the detection zone of an adjacent lane. This type of occlusion can result in the same vehicle being counted in more than one lane.

I. Detection Zone. The detection zone is a line or area selected through the VIVDS processor unit that when occupied by a vehicle, sends a vehicle detection to the traffic controller or freeway management system.

J. Detection Accuracy. The measure of the basic operation of a detection system (shows detection when a vehicle is in the detection zone and shows no detection when there is not a vehicle in the detection zone).

K. Live Video. Video being viewed or processed at 30 frames per second.

L. Lux. The measure of light intensity at which a camera may operate. A unit of illumination equal to one lumen per square meter or to the illumination of a surface uniformly one meter distant from a point source of one candle.

M. Video Monitor. As a minimum must be a 9-in. black and white monitor with BNC connectors for video in and out.

3. Functional Capabilities.

The system software must be able to detect either approaching or departing vehicles in multiple traffic lanes. A minimum of 4 detector outputs per video processor module card and each card must have a minimum of 24 detection zones. Each zone and output must be user definable through interactive graphics by placing lines and/or boxes in an image on a video or VGA monitor. The user must be able to redefine previously defined detection zones.

The VIVDS must provide real time vehicle detection (within 112 milliseconds (ms) of vehicle arrival).

The VIVDS processor unit must be capable of simultaneously processing information from various video sources, including CCTV video image sensors and video tape players. The video sources may be, but are not required to be, synchronized or line-locked. The video must be processed at a rate of 30 times per second by the VIVDS processor unit.

09-05

The system must be able to detect the presence of vehicles in a minimum of 12 detection zones within the combined field of view of all cameras (a minimum of 12 detection zones per camera input to the VIVDS processor unit).

Detection zones must be provided that are sensitive to the direction of vehicle travel. The direction to be detected by each detection zone must be user programmable.

The VIVDS processor unit must compensate for minor camera movement (up to 2% of the field of view at 400 ft.) without falsely detecting vehicles. The camera movement must be measured on the unprocessed video input to the VIVDS processor unit.

The camera must operate while directly connected to VIVDS Processor Unit.

Once the detector configuration has been downloaded or saved into the VIVDS processor unit, the video detection system must operate with the monitoring equipment (monitor and/or laptop) disconnected or on-line.

When the monitoring equipment is directly connected to the VIVDS processor unit, it must be possible to view vehicle detections in real time as they occur on the field setup computer's color VGA display or the video monitor.

4. Vehicle Detection.

A. Detection Zone Placement. The video detection system must provide flexible detection zone placement anywhere within the combined field of view of the image sensors.

Preferred presence detector configurations must be lines or boxes placed across lanes of traffic or lines placed in line with lanes of traffic. A single detector must be able to replace one or more conventional detector loops. Detection zones must be able to be fully overlapped. In addition, detection zones must have the capability of implementing

“AND” and “OR” logical functions including presence, extension and delay timing.

These logical functions may be excluded if provisions are made to bring each detector separately into the controller and the controller can provide these functions.

B. Detection Zone Programming. Placement of detection zones must be by means of a graphical interface using the video image of the roadway. The monitor must show images of the detection zones superimposed on the video image of traffic while the

VIVDS processor is running.

The detection zones must be created by using the mouse or keypad to draw detection zones on the monitor. The detection zones must be capable of being sized, shaped and overlapped to provide optimal road coverage and detection. It must be possible to upload detector configurations to the VIVDS processor unit and to retrieve the detector configuration that is currently running in the VIVDS processor unit.

The mouse or keypad must be used to edit previously defined detector configurations so as to fine tune the detection zone placement size and shape. Once a detection configuration has been created, the system must provide a graphic display of the new configuration on its monitor. While this fine-tuning is being done, the detection must continue to operate from the detector configuration that is currently called.

09-05

When a vehicle occupies a detection zone, the detection zone on the live video must indicate the presence of a vehicle, thereby verifying proper operation of the detection system. With the absence of video, the card must have an LED that will indicate proper operation of the detection zones.

Detection zones must be provided that is sensitive to the direction of vehicle travel. The direction to be detected by each detection zone must be user programmable. The vehicle detection zone should not activate if a vehicle traveling any direction other than the one specified for detection occupies the detection zone. Cross-street and wrong way traffic should not cause a detection.

C. Design Field of View. The video detection system must reliably detect vehicle presence in the design field of view. The design field of view must be defined as the sensor view when the image sensor is mounted 24 ft. or higher above the roadway, when the camera is adjacent (within 15 ft.) to the edge of the nearest vehicle travel lane, and when the length of the detection area is not greater than 10 times the mounting height of the image sensor. Within this design field of view, the VIVDS processor unit must be capable of setting up a single detection zone for point detection (equivalent to the operation of a 6 ft. by 6 ft. inductive loop). A single camera, placed at the proper mounting height with the proper lens, must be able to monitor up to and including 5 traffic lanes simultaneously.

D. Detection Performance. Detection accuracy of the video detection system must be comparable to properly operating inductive loops. Detection accuracy must include the presence of any vehicle in the defined detection zone regardless of the lane, which the vehicle is occupying. Occlusion produced by vehicles in the same or adjacent lanes must not be considered a failure of the VIVDS processor unit, but a limitation of the camera placement. Detection accuracy (a minimum of 95%) must be enforced for the entire design field of view on a lane by lane and on a time period basis. When specified in the plans, furnish up to 24 continuous hours of recorded video of all installed intersection cameras within the 30 day test period for verification of proper camera placement, field of view, focus, detection zone placement, processor setup and operation. The video from each camera must show vehicle detections for all zones.

E. Equipment failure, either camera or VIVDS processor unit, must result in constant vehicle detection on affected detection zones.

5. VIVDS Processor Unit.

A. Cabinet Mounting- The VIVDS processor unit must be rack mountable.

B. Environmental Requirements - The VIVDS processor unit must be designed to operate reliably in the adverse environment found in the typical roadside traffic cabinet. It must meet the environmental requirements set forth by the latest NEMA (National Electrical

Manufacturers Association) TS1 and TS2 standards as well as the environmental requirements for Type 170, Type 179 and 2070 controllers. Operating temperature must be from -30°F to +165°F at 0% to 95% relative humidity, non condensing.

C. Electrical - The VIVDS must have a modular electrical design.

09-05

The VIVDS must operate within a range of 89 to 135 VAC, 60 Hz single phase. Power to the VIVDS must be from the transient protected side of the AC power distribution system in the traffic control cabinet in which the VIVDS is installed.

Serial communications to the field setup computer must be through an RS 232, USB or

Ethernet port. This port must be able to download the real time detection information needed to show detector actuations. A connector on the front of the VIVDS processor unit must be used for serial communications.

The unit must be equipped with RS 170 (monochrome) or RS170A (color) composite video inputs video inputs, so that signals from image sensors or other synchronous or asynchronous video sources can be processed in real time. BNC connectors on the front of the VIVDS processor unit or video patch panel must be used for all video inputs.

The unit must be equipped with a single RS 170 composite video output. This output must be capable of corresponding to any one of the video inputs, as selected remotely via the field setup computer or front panel switch. Multiple video outputs requiring external cable connections to create a combined single video output must not be acceptable. A BNC or RCA connector must be used for video output on the front of the processor unit. Any other video formats used must prior approval by TxDOT TRF

Signal Operation Engineer.

Software upgrades and/or changes MUST be presented to and approved by TXDOT

TRF-TM division, before being used. Failure to do so will be grounds for termination of contract and probation for responsible party(s).

The unit software and the supervisor software must include diagnostic software to allow testing the VIVDS functions. This must include the capability to set and clear individual detector outputs and display the status of inputs to enable setup and troubleshooting in the field.

6. Camera Assembly.

A. Camera. The video detection system must use medium resolution, monochrome image sensors as the video source for real time vehicle detection. The cameras must be approved for use with the VIVDS processor unit by the supplier of the VIVDS. As a minimum, each camera must provide the following capabilities:

1. Images must be produced with a Charge Coupled Device (CCD) sensing element with horizontal resolution of at least 480 lines for black and white or 470 lines for color and vertical resolution of at least 350 lines for black and white or color.

Images must be output as a video signal conforming to RS170.

2. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image must be produced when those features have luminance levels as low as 0.1 lux for black and white, and as low as 1.0 lux for color, for night use.

3. Useable video and resolvable features in the video image must be produced when those features have luminance levels as high as 10,000 lux during the day.

09-05

4. The camera must include an electronic shutter or auto-iris control based upon average scene luminance and must be equipped with an electronic shutter or autoiris lens with variable focal length and variable focus that can be adjusted without opening up the camera housing to suit the site geometry. The variable focal length must be adjustable from 6 mm to 34 mm.

B. Camera and Lens Assembly. The camera and lens assembly must be housed in an environmental enclosure that provides the following capabilities:

1. The enclosure must be waterproof and dust tight to the latest NEMA 4 specifications.

2. The enclosure must allow the camera to operate satisfactorily over an ambient temperature range from -30°F to +165°F while exposed to precipitation as well as direct sunlight.

3. The enclosure must allow the camera horizon to be rotated in the field during installation.

4. The enclosure must include a provision at the rear of the enclosure for connection of power and video signal cables fabricated at the factory. Input power to the environmental enclosure must be nominally 115 VAC 60 Hz.

5. A thermostatically controlled heater must be at the front of the enclosure to prevent the formation of ice and condensation, as well as to assure proper operation of the lens's iris mechanism. The heater must not interfere with the operation of the camera electronics, and it must not cause interference with the video signal.

6. The enclosure must be light colored or unfinished and must include a sun shield to minimize solar heating. The front edge of the sunshield must protrude beyond the front edge of the environmental enclosure and must include provision to divert water flow to the sides of the sunshield. The amount of overhang of the sun shield must be adjustable to block the view of the horizon to prevent direct sunlight from entering the lens. Any plastics used in the enclosure must include ultra violet inhibitors.

7. The total weight of the image sensor in the environmental enclosure with sunshield must be less than 10 lb.

8. When operating in the environmental enclosure with power and video signal cables connected, the image sensor must meet FCC class B requirements for electromagnetic interference emissions.

The video output of the cameras must be isolated from earth ground. All video connections for the cameras to the video interface panel must also be isolated from earth ground.

Use waterproof, quick disconnect connectors to the image sensor for both video and power.

A camera interface panel capable of being mounted to sidewalls of a controller cabinet must be provided for protection of the VIVDS processor unit, camera video and power inputs/outputs. The panel must consist of, as a minimum, 4 Edco CX06 coax protectors, a

09-05

Edco ACP-340 for the cameras and VIVDS processor unit power, a 10 amp breaker, a convenience outlet protected the ACP-340 and a terminal strip with a minimum of sixteen 8-

32 binder head screws. The terminal strip must be protected by a piece of 1/8 in. Plexiglas.

When the connection between the image sensor and the VIVDS processor unit is coaxial cable, the coaxial cable used must be a low loss, 75 ohm, precision video cable suited for outdoor installation, such as Belden 8281 or TxDOT approved equal.

Camera mounting hardware must allow for vertical or horizontal mounting to the camera enclosure. Pelco AS-0166-4-62 or equivalent is acceptable.

7. Field Communication Link. The field communications link must be a one way communications connection from the camera to the equipment cabinet. The primary communications link media may be coaxial cable or fiber optic cable accompanied by a 3 conductor minimum 18 AWG, 24 VDC or 115 VAC camera power cable, or appropriate cable as approved.

The following requirements must govern for the various types of field communications link media described on the plans:

A. Coaxial Cable. In locations where the plans indicate coaxial cable is required as the primary communications link, this cable must be of the RG 59 type with a nominal impedance of 75 ohms. All cable must have a polyethylene dielectric with copper braid shield having a minimum of 98 percent shield coverage and not greater than 0.78 dB attenuation per 100 ft. at 10 MHz with a minimum 18 AWG external 3 conductor power cable or approved equivalent as directed by the Engineer.

B. Fiber Optic Cable. If specified by the plans, furnish fiber optic cable in accordance with the special specification for fiber optic cable.

C. Twisted Wire Pairs. Must be Belden 9556 or equivalent 18 AWG TWP control cable.

All connection cables must be continuous from the equipment cabinet to the camera. No splices of any type will be permitted.

Install lightning and transient surge suppression devices on the processor side of the field communications link to protect the peripheral devices. The suppression devices must be all solid state. Lightning protection is not required for fiber optic communication lines. The devices must present high impedance to, and must not interfere with, the communications lines during normal operation. The suppression devices must not allow the peak voltage on any line to exceed 300% of the normal operating peak voltage at any time. The response time of the devices must not exceed 5 nanoseconds.

8. VIVDS Set-Up System. The minimum VIVDS set-up system, as needed for detector setup and viewing of vehicle detections, must consist of a field setup computer and Windows based interface software (if required) or a video monitor with interface software built-in to the VIVDS processor unit. Live video (30 frames per second) must be available on the field setup computer to determine proper operation of detectors. The field set-up computer as a minimum, must have an NTSC video input port or equivalent.

09-05

If a field setup computer is required for system set-up, it must be supplied by the supplier of the VIVDS.

The field setup computer must include all necessary cabling and a Windows based program to interface with the VIVDS processor unit. This software must provide an easy to use graphical user interface and support all models/versions of the supplied VIVDS.

Live video with the detection overlaid is required for field verification of the system.

9. Temporary Use and Retesting.

A. Temporary Use. When shown on the plans, the VIVDS equipment must be used to provide vehicle detection on a temporary basis. When the permanent vehicle detection system and related equipment are installed and made operational, the VIVDS equipment must be carefully removed and delivered to the location shown on the plans.

B. State Retesting and Acceptance. Prior to acceptance, all VIVDS equipment may be retested by the State, even if the system was operating properly before removal. Repair or replace any equipment damaged during removal or transport and any equipment that does not meet the various test requirements.

10. Operation from Central Control. The central control must transmit and receive all information needed for detector setup, monitor the vehicle detection, view the vehicle traffic flow at a rate of 2 frames per second or greater for telephone, or 5 frames a second or greater for ISDN lines (as specified by the plans), and interrogate all required stored data. The remote communications link between the VIVDS processor unit and central control may be dial-up (telephone or ISDN lines) or dedicated twisted wire pair communications cable which may be accompanied with coaxial cable or fiber-optic cable, as shown on the plans.

Communications with the central control must not interfere with the on-street detection of the VIVDS processor. Quality of the video at 2 frames per second rate must be such that the view with the traffic flow is clear and in focus.

11. Installation and Training. The supplier of the video detection system must supervise the installation and testing of the video and computer equipment. A factory certified representative from the supplier must be on site during installation.

In the event that the field setup computer is furnished by TxDOT, such installation and testing must be done at the time that training is conducted.

Provide up to 2 days of training to personnel of TxDOT in the operation, setup and maintenance of the video detection system. Provide instruction and materials for a maximum of 20 persons and conduct at a location selected by TxDOT. TxDOT will be responsible for any travel and room and board expenses for its own personnel.

Instruction personnel are required to be certified by the equipment manufacturer. The User's

Guide is not an adequate substitute for practical, classroom training and formal certification by an approved agency.

Formal levels of factory authorized training are required for installers, contractors and system operators. All training must be certified by the manufacturer.

09-05

12. Warranty, Maintenance and Support. The video detection system must be warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years from date of shipment from the supplier’s facility. During the warranty period, the supplier must repair with new or refurbished materials, or replace at no charge, any product containing a warranty defect provided the product is returned FOB to the supplier’s factory or authorized repair site.

Return product repair or replaced under warranty by the supplier with transportation prepaid.

This warranty does not apply to products damaged by accident, improperly operated, abused, serviced by unauthorized personnel or unauthorized modification.

During the warranty period, technical support must be available from the supplier via telephone within 4 hours of the time a call is made by a user, and this support must be available from factory certified personnel or factory certified installers.

Ongoing software support by the supplier must include updates of the VIVDS processor unit and supervisor software (if a field setup computer is required for set up). Provide these updates free of charge during the warranty period. The update of the VIVDS software to be

NTCIP compliant must be included.

The supplier must maintain a program for technical support and software updates following expiration of the warranty period. Make this program available to TxDOT in the form of a separate agreement for continuing support.

The supplier must maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the wireless camera system. This technical support must be available via telephone or personnel sent to the installation site.

The supplier must maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance and repair of the camera system.

13. Measurement. The VIVDS will be measured as each major system component furnished, installed, made fully operational, and tested in accordance with this special specification or as directed by the Engineer.

The VIVDS communication cable will be measured by the linear foot of the appropriate media type furnished, installed, made fully operational, and tested in accordance with this specification, other referenced Special Specifications or as directed by the Engineer.

When the VIVDS is used on a temporary basis, the VIVDS must be measured as each system furnished, installed, made fully operational, including reconfiguration and removal if required by the plans, and tested in accordance with this special specification or as directed by the Engineer.

This is a plans quantity measurement Item. The quantity to be paid is the quantity shown in the proposal unless modified by Article 9.2, “Plans Quantity Measurement.” Additional measurements or calculations will be made if adjustments of quantities are required.

When recorded video is required by the plans it will be paid for by each camera recorded.

14. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for

"VIVDS Processor System", "VIVDS Camera Assembly", "VIVDS Central Control",

09-05

"VIVDS Set-up System", "VIVDS Temporary", "VIVDS Communication Cable (Coaxial),"

"VIVDS Communication Cable (Fiber Optic)", “VIVDS Video Recording”, and all accompanying software. These prices are full compensation for furnishing, placing, and testing all materials and equipment, and for all tools, labor, equipment, hardware, operational software package(s), supplies, support, personnel training, shop drawings, documentation, and incidentals. A 3-conductor power cable must be included with the communication cable.

These prices also include any and all interfaces required for the field and remote communications links along with any associated peripheral equipment, including cables; all associated mounting hardware and associated field equipment; required for a complete and fully functional visual image vehicle detection system component.

09-05

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL PROVISION

TO

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION

6266--017

Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System

For this project, Special Specification Item 6266, “Video Imaging Vehicle Detection System,” is hereby amended with respect to the clauses cited below, and no other clauses or requirements of this Item are waived or changed hereby.

Article 1. Description. The second paragraph is voided and replaced by the following:

A VIVDS configuration for a single intersection will consist of variable focal length cameras,

VIVDS card rack processor system, and all associated equipment required to setup and operate in a field environment including a video monitor and/or laptop (if required), connectors and camera mounting hardware.

Article 6. Camera Assembly, Section B. Camera and Lens Assembly. Section 2 is voided and replaced by the following:

2. The enclosure must allow the camera to operate satisfactorily over an ambient temperature range from -30°F to +140°F while exposed to precipitation as well as direct sunlight.

07-09

2004 Specifications CSJ 8170-12-006, etc.

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION

8040

LED Countdown Pedestrian Signal Module

1. Description. This Item will govern for the furnishing LED “walking person” and “hand” icon pedestrian signal modules with countdown (hereafter called module or modules).

2. Materials. Ensure electrical materials and construction methods conform to the current

National Electric Code (NEC) and additional local utility requirements.

Furnish new materials. Ensure all materials and construction methods conform to the requirements of this Item and the following pertinent requirements:

• Item 682, “Vehicle and Pedestrian Signal Heads”

• "Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications" published by the State of California,

Business, Transportation & Housing Agency; Department of Transportation

(CALTRANS), dated January, 1989, and all current addenda and Revisions. In case of conflict, TxDOT specifications will govern over the CALTRANS specifications.

• “Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications” published in the Equipment and Materials

Standards of the Institute of Transportation Engineers, (referred to in this document as

“PTCSI”)

• National Electric Code (NEC); the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

Materials used for the lens and LED module construction shall conform to ASTM specifications where applicable. Enclosures containing the power supply and electronic components of the LED module shall be made of UL94VO flame retardant materials. The lens of the LED module is excluded from this requirement.

3. Construction.

A. General.

1. Modules designed as retrofit replacements for existing pedestrian signal indication lamps shall not require special tools for installation. Retrofit replacement modules shall fit into existing pedestrian signal housings built for the PTCSI sizes stated in

Section 1 of the “walking person” and “hand” icon pedestrian signal indication

Standard without modification to the housing. See PTCSI 4.2.1 for housing sizes.

2. All LED’s used shall be rated for 100,000 hours of continuous operation over a temperature range of -40°C to +74°C. The modules shall be rated for a minimum life of 72 months. Modules shall meet all parameters of this specification throughout this 72-month period. Installation of a retrofit replacement module into an existing pedestrian signal housing shall only require the removal of the existing optical unit components, i.e., lens, lamp module, gaskets, and reflector; will be

02-08

weather tight and fit securely in the housing; and shall connect directly to existing electrical wiring.

B. The Module.

1. The retrofit module shall be capable of replacing the optical unit. The module lens may be a replaceable part without the need to replace the complete module. The walking person and hand icons (16 in. x 18 in. size only) shall be full (not outlines).

The countdown digits shall be made up of two rows of LEDs. Each digit shall be a minimum of seven inches in height.

2. For each nominal message bearing surface (module) size, use the corresponding H

(height) and W (width):

Bearing

Surface

H

Module Size

(16 x 18 in.)

Icon

Height

Icon

Width

Min 7 in. 7 in.

Countdown

Height

Min 9 in.

Countdown

Width

6.5 in.

3. The units shall not have any attachments or options that will allow the mode to be changed from counting the clearance cycle, to the full walk/don’t walk cycle.

4. The module shall be a single, self-contained device, not requiring on-site assembly for installation into existing traffic signal housing. The power supply shall be designed to fit and mount inside the pedestrian signal module. The assembly and manufacturing process for the module shall be designed to assure all internal LED and electronic components are adequately supported to withstand mechanical shock and vibration from high winds and other sources.

C. Environmental Requirements. The module shall be rated for use in the ambient operating temperature range, measured at the exposed rear of the module, of –40°C to

+74°C (–40°F to +165°F). The pedestrian module shall be designed to meet NEMA

250 Hose down Test. The test is to be conducted on a stand-alone unit. No protective housing shall be used. The module lens shall be UV stabilized.

D. Signal LENS.

1. The lens of the LED pedestrian and countdown signal modules shall be polycarbonate UV stabilized and a minimum of 1/4 in. thick.

2. The exterior of the lens of the LED pedestrian and countdown signal module shall be smooth and frosted to prevent sun phantom.

F. Module Identification. Each module shall be identified on the backside with the manufacturer’s name, model numbers and serial number. The following operating characteristics shall be identified: nominal voltage, power consumption, wattage and

Volt-Ampere.

02-08

G. Photometric Requirements.

1. Luminance, Uniformity & Distribution. For a minimum period of 72 months, the maintained minimum luminance values for the modules under normal operating conditions shall not be less than 5300 cd/m

2

for the Walking Person icon and

3750 cd/m

2

for the Hand icon when measured perpendicular to the surface of the module at nine (nine) separate points on the icon. These values may decrease up to

50% of these table values beyond 15 o

from the perpendicular in either to the left or right on a horizontal plane.

The uniformity of the walking person and hand icons’ illumination shall meet a ratio of not more than 1 to 5 between the minimum and maximum luminance measurements (in Cd/m2).

2. Chromaticity. The standard colors for the LED Pedestrian Signal Module shall be

White for the walking person and Portland Orange for the hand icon and countdown digits.

H. Electrical.

1. General. The modules shall be operationally compatible with traffic signal controllers, cabinets and accessories manufactured to the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans) Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications,

January 1989 Edition.

Maximum power consumption requirements for each indication are as follows (in

Watts):

Icon

Waking Person

Countdown 2 digit

25 C

9.0W

8.0W

74 C

12.0W

11.0W

All wiring and terminal blocks shall meet the requirements of Section 13.02 of the

VTCSH Standard. Three secured, color coded, 914 mm (36 in) long 600 V, 16

AWG minimum, jacketed wires, conforming to the National Electrical Code, rated for service at +105°C, are to be provided for electrical connection.

Each LED signal module shall be designed so that there is no noticeable light output when connected to rated voltage through an impedance of 15 Kohm (either resistive or capacitive). The signal module shall be designed so that, under normal operation, an AC voltage of no greater than 10 volts RMS shall be developed across the unit when it is connected in series with any value of impedance greater than 15 Kohms and for any applied AC voltage between 95 and 135 volts RMS that is connected across this series combination. In addition, the signal module shall be designed so that the voltage across the module shall reduce in value to less than 10 volts RMS within 100 msec when the module is switched off by any solid state switch or switch pack having an impedance of 15 Kohms or greater.

02-08

2. Voltage Range. a. LED modules shall operate from a 60 ± 3 Hertz ac line power over a voltage range from 80 to 135 VAC RMS. The current draw shall be sufficient to ensure compatibility and proper triggering and operation of load current switches and conflict monitors. Nominal operating voltage for all measurements shall be 120 ± 3 Volts rms. Fluctuations in line voltage over the range of 80Vac to 135Vac shall not affect luminous intensity by more than ± 10%. The LED circuitry shall prevent flickering at less than 100 Hz over the voltage range stated above. The modules shall be designed and constructed so that the failure of a single LED will not result in the loss of additional LEDs. b. There should be no illumination of the module when the applied voltage is less than 35 VAC RMS. To test for this condition the each icon must first be fully illuminated at the nominal operating voltage. The applied voltage shall then be reduced to the point where there is no illumination. This point must be greater than 35 VAC RMS. c. Turn-On and Turn-Off Time: The each icon of the module shall reach

90% of their full illumination (turn-on) within 100 ms. of the application of the nominal operating voltage. The modules shall not be illuminated

(turn-off) after 100 ms. of the removal of the nominal operating voltage. d. For abnormal conditions when nominal voltage is applied to the unit across the two-phase wires (rather than being applied to the phase wire and the neutral wire) the pedestrian signal unit shall default to the hand symbol.

3. Transient Voltage Protection. The module’s on-board circuitry shall include voltage surge protection to withstand high-repetition noise transients and lowrepetition high-energy transients as stated in Section 2.1.6, NEMA Standard TS-2,

1998, or the latest version.

4. Electronic Noise. The modules and associated on-board circuitry must meet

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Sub Part B, Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.

5. Power Factor (PF) and AC Harmonics. The modules shall provide a power factor of 0.90 or greater when operated at nominal operating voltage, and 25ºC (77ºF).

Total harmonic distortion induced into an AC power line by the module, operated at nominal operating voltage, at 25ºC (77ºF) shall not exceed 20%.

I. Module Functions.

1. Cycle. The module shall operate in one mode: Clearance Cycle Countdown

Mode Only. The module will start counting when the flashing clearance signal turns on and will countdown to “0” and turn off when the steady “Don’t Walk” signal turns on. Module will not have user accessible switches or controls for modification of cycle.

02-08

2. Learning Cycle. At power on, the module enters a single automatic learning cycle.

During the automatic learning cycle, the countdown display shall remain dark.

3. Cycle Modification. The unit re-programs itself if it detects any increase or decrease of Pedestrian Timing. The counting unit will go blank once a change is detected and then take one complete pedestrian cycle (with no counter during this cycle) to adjust its buffer timer.

4. Recycling. The module shall allow for consecutive cycles without displaying the steady Hand icon (“Don’t Walk”).

5. Preemption. The module shall recognize preemption events and temporarily modify the crossing cycle accordingly. If the controller preempts during the walking man, the countdown will follow the controller's directions and will adjust from walking man to flashing hand. It will start to count down during the flashing hand. If the controller preempts during the flashing hand, the countdown will continue to count down without interruption. The next cycle, following the preemption event, shall use the correct, initially programmed values.

6. “Don’t Walk” Steady. If the controller output displays Don’t Walk steady condition and the unit has not arrived to zero or if both the hand and man are dark

J. Quality Assurance.

1. General. for some reason, the unit suspends any timing and the digits will go dark. a. Unless otherwise specified all of the test will be conducted at an ambient temperature of 25°C and at the nominal operating voltage of 120 VAC

RMS. b. The following production quality assurance tests shall be performed on each new module prior to shipment. Before any measurements are made, the unit shall be energized at the rated voltage for a 30-minute burn-in period at an ambient temperature of +25 o

C (+77 o

F). Following the burnin period, the initial luminous intensity shall be measured. A single point measurement with a correlation to the intensity requirement of Section

1.04 of VTCSH for circular indications may be used. The current flow and power factor shall also be determined. Units found to have parameters outside the ranges allowed by this specification shall be rejected. c. The modules shall be manufactured in accordance with a vendor quality assurance (QA) program. The QA program shall include two types of quality assurance: (1) design quality assurance and (2) production quality assurance. QA process and test result documentation shall be kept on file for a minimum period of seven years.

02-08

2. Conformance. The module designs not satisfying design qualification testing and the production quality assurance testing performance requirements shall not be labeled, advertised, or sold as conforming to this specification.

3. Design Qualification Assurance. Design Qualification testing shall be performed on new module designs, and when a major design change has been implemented on an existing design. Unless otherwise specified, all of the tests shall be conducted on the same set of randomly selected modules, hereafter called the sample set, at an ambient temperature of 25°C and at the nominal operating voltage of 120 VAC RMS. Testing shall be performed once every 5 years or when the module design or LED technology has been changed. Test data shall be retained by the module manufacturers for a minimum period of 7 years and for a period of at least 5 years beyond the last date of manufacture of that model type.

4. Production Quality Assurance. All new modules shall undergo Production Quality

Assurance testing prior to shipment. Failure of any module to meet requirements of the QA tests shall be cause for rejection. QA test results shall be maintained for a period of 4 years. The production quality assurance shall include statistically controlled routine tests to ensure minimum performance levels of modules built to meet this specification. Prior to packaging for shipment, each module shall be visually inspected for any exterior physical damage or assembly anomalies.

Careful attention shall be paid to the surface of the lens to ensure there are no scratches (abrasions), cracks, chips, discoloration or other defects.

5. Delivery and Acceptance. Compatibility with a controller unit, conflict monitor and load switch will be tested by connecting the module under test to the output of a standard load switch connected to a variable AC voltage supply with the output of the load switch in the off state. The AC voltage developed across each

LED module so connected shall not exceed 10 Vrms as the input to the LED module is varied from 95 Vrms to 135 Vrms.

K. Warranty. LED signal modules shall be replaced or repaired if it fails to function as intended due to workmanship or material defects within the first 60 months from date of delivery.

4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by each installed LED Countdown Pedestrian

Module.

5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "LED

Countdown Pedestrian Module." This price is full compensation for furnishing, installing, and testing the completed installation and equipment, labor, tolls, and incidentals.

02-08

2004 Specifications

SPECIAL SPECIFICATION

8317

Battery Back-Up System for Signal Cabinets

1. Description: Install a Battery Back-Up System (BBU System) for traffic signals that will provide reliable emergency power in the event of utility power failure or interruption. The system will also function as a power conditioner and/or voltage regulation device.

A BBU System consists of inverter/charger, manual bypass switch, power transfer switch or automatic bypass switch, batteries, battery monitoring device, wiring, external cabinet or stand-alone cabinet, concrete pad, all necessary hardware and software, and all associated equipment required to operate in a field environment.

The BBU System shall be capable of operating an “LED only” signalized intersection (700W load) for 4 hours of full runtime when utility power is disabled and under ambient temperatures of 25 o

C. The BBU System shall switch the intersection to flash mode of operation when approximately 40% of battery charge is remaining, via relay contact connection points on the front panel of the unit. The BBU system shall operate the intersection in the flash mode of operation (300W load) for an additional 2 hours. BBU system components shall be rated for a minimum 1400W load capacity.

The BBU shall be designed for outdoor applications in accordance with NEMA TS2-2003,

Section 2. All components of the BBU system shall be rated to operate under temperature extremes of -34 o

C to +74 o

C.

2. Definitions.

A. Automatic Bypass Switch. A unit connected between the utility power supply and the inverter/charger which can automatically switch power to the controller cabinet service panel from inverter output power to utility line power.

B. Battery Back-Up System (BBU System). The battery back-up system includes but is not limited to a manual bypass switch, automatic bypass switch or power transfer switch, inverter/charger, batteries, battery monitoring device, wiring, external cabinet and all necessary hardware for system operation.

C. Battery Back-Up System Software (BBU System software). All software associated with operation, programming and functional requirements of the BBU system.

D. Battery Monitoring Device. The device which monitors battery temperatures and charge rate of the batteries used in the BBU system.

E. Batteries. Standard 12V batteries wired in series to create a 48VDC to 96VDC voltage storage.

1-8 8317

09-12

F. Boost. When enabled, the BBU inverter/charger shall automatically switch into this mode to raise the utility line voltage when it drops below a preset limit. The limit may be user defined or use manufacturer default settings (typically 100V AC).

G. Buck. When enabled, the unit shall automatically switch into this mode to reduce the utility line voltage when it rises above a preset limit. The limit may be user defined or use manufacturer default settings (typically 135V AC).

H. External or Stand-Alone Cabinet. The structure which houses the system components and/or batteries for the BBU System.

I. Inverter/Charger. The unit which converts the DC voltage input into 120 VAC output for the traffic signal cabinet to operate. As a minimum the inverter/charger shall be rated for 1400 watts.

J. Inverter Line Voltage. The power supplied from the BBU system to the traffic signal cabinet from the BBU System inverter.

K. Manual Bypass. Manual switch that allows user to bypass BBU power to service system equipment. Manual bypass switch switches utility line power directly to cabinet.

L. Power Transfer Switch. A unit connected between the utility power supply and the inverter/charger which can automatically switch from utility line power to inverter output power. The power transfer relay may be a separate unit or combined with the manual bypass switch. In the event of battery voltage loss, the power transfer switch will automatically return to utility line power.

M. Signal Operation Mode. A signalized intersection generating a 700W load when running in normal operation.

N. Signal Flash Mode. A signalized intersection generating a 300W load when running in the flash mode of operation.

O. Utility Line Voltage. The 120V AC power supplied to the BBU system.

3. Equipment. Ensure electrical materials and construction methods conform to the current

NEC and additional local utility requirements. Furnish new materials. Ensure all materials and construction methods conform to the details shown on the plans, the requirements of this

Item, and the pertinent requirements of the following Items:

• Item 420, “Concrete Structures”

• Item 620, “Electrical Conductors”

Provide and install a BBU system that is able to fulfill the following requirements:

A. Method of Operation. The BBU system shall operate using one or more of the following methods:

1. Buck and Boost Method. When the buck and boost functions are enabled they shall set the upper and lower control limit allowable for the utility line voltage.

2-8 8317

09-12

If the utility line voltage fluctuates above or below the buck and boost values, the

BBU system shall raise or lower the voltage by approximately 10-15% of the utility line voltage in an attempt to bring the voltage back into the upper and lower control limits. Buck and boost shall have preset manufacturer defaults.

If the utility line voltage falls above or below the functional capabilities of buck and boost, then the BBU system will transfer power from the utility line voltage to the inverter line voltage.

2. Stand-by Method. The stand-by method shall set upper and lower control limits for the utility line power. If the utility line voltage falls above or below the upper or lower control limits, then the BBU system will transfer power from the utility line voltage to the inverter line voltage.

3. Continuous Operating Mode, Double Conversion Method. The continuous method supplies the cabinet with inverter line voltage at all times. This method requires the disabling of buck and boost functions.

B. System Capabilities. The BBU system shall be capable of providing 1400W peak load, with a minimum of 80% inverter efficiency, for at least 10 seconds.

The BBU system shall be capable of providing 700W signal operation load for a minimum of 4 hours, and then switching to and providing 300W signal flash load for an additional 2 hours minimum, when batteries are fully charged.

When the BBU system is running on battery power, the inverter/charger shall be capable of allowing the voltage at which the transition from normal operating load to flash mode occurs (usually 47.5V) to be selected by a user, via relay contacts and connection points on the front panel of the inverter/charger.

The transfer time allowed, from disruption of normal utility line voltage to stabilized inverter line voltage from batteries, shall be less than 65 milliseconds. The same allowable transfer time shall also apply when switching from inverter line voltage to utility line voltage.

The BBU system shall bypass utility line voltage whenever the utility line voltage is outside of the manufacturer’s default, or a user-programmed voltage range, ±2VAC.

When the utility line power has been restored to a normal operating voltage for more than a user defined setting (default 30 seconds), the BBU system shall transfer from inverter line voltage to utility line voltage. The BBU system shall be equipped to prevent a malfunction feedback to the cabinet or from feeding back to the utility service.

The BBU system shall be compatible with TS1, TS2 and Model 170/2070 controllers and cabinet components for full run-time operation.

The BBU system shall be shelf-mounted in TS1 and TS2 cabinets, and rack-mounted for

Model 170/2070 332 cabinets. The manual bypass switch shall be able to be mounted on the shelf or side of cabinets. The interconnect cables shall be no less than 10 feet in length.

3-8 8317

09-12

Relay contact wiring for each set of NO/NC relay contact closure terminals shall be no less than 6 feet long and #18 AWG wire. Use manufacturer recommendations for size of wire for any cables lengths greater than 10 feet.

The BBU system shall have lightning surge protection compliant with IEEE/ANSI

C.62.41 latest edition and meeting all current UL1449 standards. Lightning surge protection shall be provided to the utility line voltage coming into the inverter/charger.

The surge protection device shall be easily accessible and mounted externally from the inverter/charger.

The BBU system, including batteries and hardware, shall be easily replaceable and shall not require any special tools for installation.

The BBU system shall operate in automatic “fail-safe” mode. Should a breaker trip on the inverter/charger and/or the power transfer switch, the system will automatically operate from utility line power and bypass the BBU system.

As stated above, in addition to the inverter/charger, the BBU shall be provided with both an external manual bypass switch and either an external automatic transfer switch or external automatic bypass switch.

The BBU system shall be capable of logging up to 100 events. Events shall date- and time-stamp faults with utility line voltage and battery voltages. At the minimum, the

BBU system shall log an event when:

the utility line voltage falls above or below the upper or lower control limits,

the BBU system automatically switches to battery power, and

when self-monitoring BBU system components fail.

C. Displays, Controls, Diagnostics and Maintenance. The BBU system shall include a front panel display. All applicable programmable functions of the operational methods described in this specification shall be viewable from the front panel display.

All events described in Section 3.B shall be viewable from the front panel display.

The BBU system software shall be programmable from the front panel of the inverter/charger by means of a keyboard or momentary buttons allowing user to step through menu driven software.

A 10/100 Ethernet port shall be provided on the front panel of the inverter/charger.

A RS232 port shall be provided on the front panel of the inverter/charger.

The BBU system software shall be provided for the operational needs of the BBU system. The user/operator shall be able to access all system software via the Ethernet and

RS232 ports on the front panel of the inverter/charger. The user shall be able to read logged events and change programmable parameters from the keyboard, laptop or local area network via the Ethernet port.

4-8 8317

09-12

System software shall be upgradeable via the RS232 port on the front panel of the inverter/charger.

D. Inverter/Charger. The inverter/charger is the unit that provides the voltage regulation; power conditioning of utility line power; convert the DC voltage input into 120 VAC output for the traffic signal cabinet to operate; provides emergency backup power upon loss of utility power and provides for temperature compensated battery charging. As a minimum the inverter/charger shall be rated for 1400 watts. Provide a minimum of 6 sets of normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) single-pole double-throw dry contact relay closures on the front face of the inverter/charger and labeled so as to identify each contact. The relay closures shall consist a set of NO/NC contact closures that shall be energized whenever the unit switches to battery power (contact shall be labeled or marked as “On Battery” or equivalent) and a second set of NO/NC contact closures shall be energized whenever the battery approaches 40% remaining capacity (contact shall be labeled or marked as “Low battery” or equivalent”), which will determine when the unit will switch from normal operation to flash. A third set of NO/NC contact closures shall be energized after a user settable time after the unit switches to battery power. The contact may be labeled “Timer. The remaining relays shall be user definable.

Operating temperature range for both the inverter/charger and power transfer relay shall be -34°C to +74°C. When battery power is used, the BBU system output voltage shall be between 110VAC and 125VAC, pure sine wave output, ≤ 3% THD, 60Hz ± 3Hz.

E. Manual Bypass Switch. The manual bypass switch shall be provided as a separate unit external to the inverter/charger unit. The manual bypass switch shall consist of housing, two position switch, terminal blocks, internal wiring, service outlet, circuit breakers and mounting hardware. All components shall be rated at a minimum of 240VAC / 30 amp.

Provide the manual bypass switch with # 8 terminal blocks. The manual bypass switch shall be 2 position and allow the user to switch utility line power directly to the cabinet service panel. The switch positions will provide the following functions. In the “Bypass” position the inverter is bypassed, utility power is removed from the BBU and passed directly to the signal power panel. In the “UPS” position the inverter / switch is powered and the signal circuits are supplied by the output of the inverter. When the manual bypass switch is in the “Bypass” position the user may replace the automatic bypass switch (or transfer switch) and the inverter/charger without interrupting power to the intersection.

Provide the manual bypass switch with over current protection (20 Amp circuit breaker).

F. Power Transfer Switch. These requirements are for BBU systems provided with a power transfer switch. The power transfer switch will operate such that the inverter/charger input and cabinet power panel are supplied with power from the utility line, in the event that the utility line power is lost or requires conditioning (buck or boost) the power transfer switch will automatically connect the inverter/charger output to the cabinet power panel such that the inverter/charger output provides the power. In the event of inverter/charger failure, battery failure, or complete battery discharge, the power transfer shall revert to the NC (de-energized) state, where utility line power is connected to the cabinet service panel.

5-8 8317

09-12

All wire to the power transfer switch from the manual bypass switch, to and from the inverter/ charger and from the manual bypass switch to utility power service shall be sized accordingly with system requirements.

G. Automatic Bypass Switch These requirements are for BBU systems provided with an automatic bypass switch. The automatic bypass switch will operate such that the inverter/charger input is supplied with power from the utility line and the cabinet power panel is supplied with power from the output of the inverter/charger. In the event of inverter/charger failure, battery failure, or complete battery discharge, or other loss of power from the output of the inverter/charger, the automatic bypass switch shall revert to the NC (de-energized) state, where utility line power is connected to the cabinet service panel.

H. Batteries. Provide batteries from the same manufacturer/vendor of the BBU system.

Individual batteries shall be 12V type, and shall be easily replaceable and commonly available for purchase by common off-the-shelf equivalent.

Batteries shall be sized and rated to operate a 700W load for 4 hours (normal operation) followed by a 300W load for 2 hours (flash operation) for a total of 6 hours.

Battery configuration shall consist of 12V batteries arranged for total voltages of 48V,

60V, 72V, 84V or 96V.

Batteries shall be deep-discharge, sealed prismatic lead-calcium based, valve-regulated maintenance-free batteries.

Batteries shall operate over a temperature range of -34°C to +74°C.

Batteries shall indicate maximum recharge data and recharging cycles, and manufacturer defaults on the inverter/charger shall not allow the recharging process to exceed the batteries maximum values.

Battery interconnect wiring shall connect to the inverter unit via modular harness with red and black cabling that terminates into a typical power pole style connector. Harness shall be equipped with mating power flag style connectors for batteries and a single insulated plug-in style connection to inverter/charger unit. Harness shall allow batteries to be quickly and easily connected in any order and shall be keyed to ensure proper polarity and circuit configuration. A fusible link or device sized accordingly with system requirements and to protect against currents exceeding each battery current rating shall be provided within 3 inches of the negative and positive leads of each battery. Fusible links shall be insulated stranded wire.

Insulated covers shall be provided at the connection points (post) as to prevent accidental shorting.

Battery cables provided to connect battery to battery harness main cable shall be a minimum of 18 in. or long enough to accommodate the battery covers provided with the battery ground box, whichever is longer. Battery harness shall be sized accordingly with system requirements.

6-8 8317

09-12

I. Battery Monitoring System. The BBU system shall use a temperature-compensated battery charging system. The charging system shall compensate over a range of 2.5 – 4.0 mV/°C per cell.

The temperature sensor shall be used to monitor the temperature and regulate the charge rate of the batteries. Unless required otherwise by the plans the temperature sensor wire shall be as follows:

8 feet long if external side-mounted cabinet is attached to existing controller cabinet.

8 feet long if batteries are housed in traffic signal base used for cabinet foundation and batteries are stored on shelf within base.

8 feet long if stand-alone cabinet is used.

Should the temperature sensor fail, the inverter/charger shall not allow the BBU system to overcharge the batteries. The BBU system shall provide an alarm should the temperature sensor fail.

Recharge time for the batteries to obtain 80% or more of full battery charge capacity shall not exceed 20 hours at 21°C (70°F).

Batteries shall not be charged when battery temperature exceeds 50°C ±3°C.

The BBU system shall monitor battery strings within a system and set a fault indicator if battery voltage falls below normal operating voltage.

J. Battery Housing.

1. External Battery Cabinet. The external cabinet shall be NEMA type 3R allaluminum with stainless-steel hardware, or approved equivalent. The external cabinet shall be designed to attach on the side of a TS2 size 6 base-mount cabinet. The batteries, inverter, transfer switches, manual bypass and all associated hardware shall be housed in the external cabinet.

The external cabinet shall be equipped with proper ventilation, electric fan, and air filter in accordance with TS2 standards.

External cabinets will be equipped with a door opening to the entire cabinet. The door shall be attached to the cabinet with a full length stainless steel piano hinge or four, two-bolts per leaf, hinges. The door shall be provided with the same latch and lock mechanism as required for standard traffic signal cabinet. In addition, a padlock clasp will be provided.

When using battery ground boxes, an external cabinet is required for the non-battery components.

2. Stand-alone BBU/Battery Cabinet. When required for installation by the plans a stand-alone cabinet in accordance with the following shall be provided.

7-8 8317

09-12

The stand-alone cabinet shall conform to all the specifications of the External

BBU/Battery Cabinet, except that it will not mount to the controller cabinet. The stand-alone cabinet shall be designed to attach to a concrete pad.

K. Concrete Pad. Provide a class B concrete pad as a foundation for stand-alone cabinets of the size shown in the plans. For external cabinets, extend the controller foundation to provide a class B concrete pad under the external cabinet of the size shown in the plans.

L. Documentation. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided. The operation manual shall include a block diagram schematic of all system hardware components. The manual shall include instructions for programming and viewing software features. The manual shall include all uploading/downloading (communications protocol) requirements via RS232 or Ethernet port.

Board level schematics shall be provided when requested.

Battery documentation and replacement information shall be provided.

M. Testing. The Department reserves the right to do testing on BBU systems to ensure

Quality Assurance on unit before installation and random sampling of units being provided to the State. BBU systems that fail will be taken off the Qualified Products List

(QPL).

Department QPL testing procedures will check compliance with all the criteria of this specification including the following:

Event logging for fault/alarm conditions

Demonstrated use of one or more of the operating methods described in section 3.A

Testing of ability to power a 700W load for 4 hours, transfer to flash mode and power a 300W load for 2 additional hours, at an ambient temperature of +25°C.

Testing of all components in environmental chamber (temperature ranges from -

30°C to +74°C) following NEMA TS2 2003 standards, section 2.

N. Warranty, Maintenance and Support. The Contractor shall provide a manufacturer’s 5 year full replacement warranty on all components of the BBU system except batteries.

The warranty period starts on the date of final acceptance.

Batteries shall be warranted for full replacement for 5 years. Batteries shall be defined as bad if they are not able to deliver 80% of battery rating.

4. Measurement. This Item will be measured by each BBU system installed.

5. Payment. The work performed and materials furnished in accordance with this Item and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for "BBU

System" of the type (type of BBU cabinet) specified. This price is full compensation for furnishing, installing, and testing the completed installation, BBU system and associated equipment, mounting hardware, class B concrete pad, software, conduit, conductors; and equipment, labor, tools; and incidentals.

8-8 8317

09-12

Radio

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIAL PROVISIONS

029520

040513

042200

044200

047200

079200

129300

312313

321316

323100

328000

329113

329213

329223

329300

Landscape Maintenance

Masonary Mortar

Unit Masonary

Exterior Stone Cladding

Architectural Cast Stone

Joint Sealants

Site Furnishings

Subgrade Preparation

Colored Concrete Paving

Ornamental Metals

Irrigation

Planting Soils

Seeding

Sodding

Planting

SECTION 029520 – LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The maintenance work consists of providing all labor, materials, equipment, permits and incidentals necessary to perform the following for a period of one (1) year after final payment has been issued to the Contractor.

B. The Contractor will be responsible for providing landscape and irrigation maintenance as described below in order to maintain in a living and thriving condition, all existing landscape materials within the construction limits and all newly planted landscape materials, from the Notice to Proceed date (as issued by the City), until final payment has been issued to the Contractor.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Section 329113 – Plantings Soils

Section 328000 – Irrigation

Section 329213 – Seeding

Section 329223 – Sodding

Section 329300 - Planting

1.4 PROTECTION maintenance procedures and protect all plants and wildlife in the application of chemicals. When using chemicals and equipment use according to

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 1

manufacturer's directions and specifications. Contractor shall submit a copy of the pest control licenses to the City. Repair or replace any damage caused through improper use of equipment or application of chemicals. Apply all chemicals after 24 hour notice to the City's representative and at a time and in such a manner that the public will not be in contact with, or have any real or imagined harm done to them by the application.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate and schedule all work through the City's Representative. The

Contractor shall submit a detailed maintenance schedule for the one (1) year maintenance period to the City for review 21 working days prior to completion of the planting phase of work. Reference the Landscape Services Exhibit for additional information.

1.6 QUALITY OF OPERATION

A. Provide the maintenance services in a professional manner and keep all areas in a clean, orderly, and safe condition, satisfactory to the City at all times. Abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations.

1.7 PERSONNEL

A. During all maintenance work hours, provide a qualified and competent person in the work or who is authorized to supervise the maintenance operations and to represent and act for the Contractor.

1.8 CHECKLISTS

A. Weekly checklists shall be completed by the Contractor's maintenance personnel in the course of their work. The checklists shall indicate the tasks completed, observations of damages, plant materials requiring special care or replacement, and situations detrimental to health and vigor or the lawns and plantings.

1.9 REPORTS

A. On or before the date prescribed by the City's Representative each month, submit for approval a written report describing in detail all work performed by the Contractor under this contract during the past month; observations of the general health and vitality of all plantings and lawns; the locations and severity of any pests encountered; detailed descriptions of all chemical treatments applied; the general condition of areas maintained; descriptions of damage and vandalism; repair or maintenance recommendations; and the proposed general and landscape maintenance program to be performed by the Contractor during the next month. The report shall include copies of the weekly checklists.

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 2

1.10 ROUTINE MONTHLY INSPECTIONS

Representative on a monthly basis at a time scheduled by the City's Representative.

Maintenance problems identified during these inspections will be listed by the

Contractor and be incorporated into that month's work plan, unless otherwise indicated by the City's Representative.

1.11 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT

A. All work shall be guaranteed during the one (1) year maintenance period. All plants shall be alive and in satisfactory growth throughout the guarantee period.

B. The Landscape Contractor shall notify the City in writing 10 days prior to expiration of guarantee periods; and said guarantee period shall be continued

C. until such time as written notification is received.

At the end of the guarantee period, an inspection will be made by the Contractor and the City. All plants that are dead, or fail to meet the grade requirements initially specified, or are otherwise considered in unsatisfactory condition, as determined by the City, shall be removed from the site and immediately replaced with approved plants meeting the original specifications.

D. All replacements shall be plants of the same species and size as specified in the

Plant List. They shall be furnished and planted as specified with no additional cost to the City.

E. All replacements shall become guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final payment and acceptance of new replacements. A written agreement is required to be submitted by the Contractor for this additional guarantee.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Water: Use water free of elements toxic to plant or animal life. Obtain water from approved sources.

B. Replacement Plants: Conform to the type, species, grade, standard and size to match existing plants. Replacement plants which are smaller or otherwise differ from the original plants must have the prior approval of the City.

C. Topsoil: Topsoil material shall meet the requirements of Section 329113 -

Planting Soil, and be free from subsequent hard clods, stiff clay, hard pan, stones larger than one inch (I") in diameter, noxious weeds and plants including nut grass and torpedo grass, sods partially disintegrated debris, insects or any other undesirable material, plants, or seeds, that would be toxic or harmful to growth.

Beds which contain topsoil contaminated with nut grass or torpedo grass shall have the top 24" of soil removed and replaced with uncontaminated soil or

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 3

D. fumigated at no additional cost to the City. Topsoil shall be obtained from approved sources and shall contain 25 % organic matter. Ph shall range from 6.0 to 6.8 inclusive.

Planting Bed Preparation: All planting areas shall be covered with 3” of compost and tilled to a depth of 6-8 “.

E. Fertilizer:

1. Lawn Fertilizer: Granular, 20-5-10 analysis with 50% of the nitrogen in a slow release form. Product used should contain micronutrients.

F. fertilizer: Granular 20-5-15 analysis with 500/o of the nitrogen in a slow release form micronutrients.

Mulch: Shredded hardwood mulch, clean bright and free of weeds, moss, sticks and other debris.

G.

H.

Herbicides: Use herbicides recommended for the control of the types of weeds encountered. Herbicides shall be EPA approved.

Insecticides: Use insecticides recommended for the control of the types of insect pests encountered. Insecticides shall be EPA approved.

I. Fungicides: Use fungicides recommended for the control of the types of fungi encountered. Fungicides shall be EPA approved.

J. Rodenticides: Use rodenticides recommended for the control of the type of rodents encountered. Rodenticides shall be EPA approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

B. condition.

Lawn and Wildflower Maintenance:

1. Buffalo Grass Mowing: Following lawn establishment, as specified in

Section 329223 – Sodding, lawn areas shall be mowed once a year at the end of the growing season after the first frost once the grass has gone dormant. It shall be mowed at a height of 3" with a rotary mower.

Scheduled cycles shall be included in the detailed maintenance schedule

(to be submitted by the Contractor). Mowing wet grass shall be avoided.

2. Wildflower Mowing: Following wildflower establishment, as specified in

Section 329213 – Seeding, wildflower areas shall be mowed once a year at the end of the growing season after the first frost once the wildflowers have frozen and gone dormant. They shall be mowed at a height of 4"

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 4

3.

4.

5.

6. with a rotary mower. Scheduled cycles shall be included in the detailed maintenance schedule (to be submitted by the Contractor). Mowing wet grass shall be avoided.

Weed Control: Apply weed control in late fall and early spring using chemical and mechanical means to prevent weeds and undesirable grasses from encroaching into lawn areas, concrete medians, fence lines, sidewalk joints, etc. Apply spot treatments as necessary to control localized weed problems throughout the one (I) year maintenance period.

Fill any depressions or settlement that occurs within ninety (90) days following installation. Re-seed or re-sod bare spots which occur during the maintenance period as directed by the City’s Representative.

Keep lawn areas clean and protected from damage during the maintenance period. Debris or trash which accumulates shall be removed from the site.

Promptly repair damaged lawn or wildflower areas throughout the one (1) year maintenance, as directed by the City Representative.

Irrigate as required to supplement natural rainfall so that all lawn and wildflower areas receive sufficient water for normal plant growth. Furnish all irrigation equipment needed for watering and be responsible for securing adequate supply of water if an automatic irrigation system does not exist or is not operating.

7. A second fertilizer application shall be made at the end of the first growing season at a rate specified by the seed supplier and as recommended by the soil testing lab.

Tree, Shrub, and Groundcover Maintenance: C.

1.

2.

Pruning and Trimming: a. Trees: Prune all trees to remove dead, broken, or infected branches, suckers, vines and dead or decaying stumps and all other undesirable growth. Perform cosmetic pruning, in addition to the above to enhance the appearance of specific trees, if requested by the City. Perform all pruning in accordance with American Association of Arborists standards and recommendations. Crepe Myrtles are to be pruned in

February to remove seed pods and shape buck horning of the trees will not be permitted. b. Shrubs: Prune and trim shrubs loosely to maintain the natural character of the species and to remove wayward shoots and branches which detract from the plant appearance. c. Ground Covers: Do not trim or prune ground covers unless directed by the City in specific instances.

Tree Stakes and guys shall be adjusted or replaced as required. Repair eroded or damaged plant saucers.

3. Maintain all plant beds and saucers to be weed free and mulched to the specified depth at all times.

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 5

4. Keep plants free of insects and disease. All insecticides and fungicides applied to control pests and maintain plant in a healthy and growing condition shall be approved by the City.

5. Fertilization: a. Trees: Fertilize all trees three times yearly: March, June and

September. Apply fertilizer at 3-5 lbs per tree. Fertilizer shall be a controlled releaser type used for installation. b. Shrubs and Ground Covers: Fertilize all shrubs and ground covers by topdressing 2 lbs per 100 square feet of bed area. Fertilizer shall be a controlled release type used for installation.

6. Mulching: a. Maintain a 3” layer of mulch in all plant beds and around all trees in lawn areas. Replenish to specified depth at six (6) months and twelve

(12) months into the one (1) year maintenance period. Maintain mulch at 3” clear from all tree trunks. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for re-mulching activities necessitated by washouts, foot traffic, automobile damage or other unforeseen circumstances.

7. Weed Control: Remove weeds mechanically in all plant beds and paved areas as soon as they appear. Spot treatment of weeds with an approved nonselective herbicide will be permitted. Pre-emergence herbicides approved by the City are to be used according to label specifications during the maintenance period.

8. Insect Control: Control insect pests which infest plant materials, and control ant mounds which may occur in landscaped areas. Record insecticides and other remedies on the weekly checklist.

9. Plant Replacement: When requested by the City, replace defective trees, shrubs and ground covers with plants that match the specifications of adjacent existing plant materials of the same species. All trees and plants shall be replaced by the Contractor within 14 calendar days of notification at no additional cost to the City. Plant materials which must be replace due to circumstances beyond the control of the Contractor shall be paid for at the original contract price.

D. Watering:

1. The Contractor shall irrigate all plants adequately to maintain optimum supply of moisture within the root zone; recurring overly dry or wet conditions shall be grounds for rejection of plant material. If the irrigation system is inoperative, hand watering shall be accomplished from a source approved by the City. Water shall not be applied with a force that will displace mulch or cause soil erosion and shall not be applied so quickly that it cannot be absorbed by the mulch and plants. shall be considered only as an estimate of water need. Depending on climate,

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 6

soil, and plant conditions, the Contractor shall adjust his water schedule and amount per application to meet optimum plant growth conditions. The

Contractor may, at his/her discretion, install a temporary irrigation system. The

Contractor is responsible for any necessary permitting. ascertaining the location of all landscape underdrain trenches, electrical cables, conduits, utility lines, oil tanks, supply lines and other subsurface structures, so that proper precautions may be taken not to disturb or damage any of these elements or improvements. Contractor shall properly maintain and protect existing

3.2 WATER USE GUIDELINES

A. Amount of water applied to trees

1. Apply a minimum of 10 gallons of water per tree at each application.

Water applied should be a slow soaking at 4 GPM maximum.

3.3 LANDSCAPE SERVICES SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall provide a schedule of services to the Owner for approval.

The schedule shall illustrate the required services to be included in the one (1) year maintenance period. The services shall include at a minimum the items called for in this Section as well as

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 7

Schedule of Maintenance Activities

TASK

Mowing

Edging

Line Trim

Hedges

Ground-Cover 1

Bed

Maintenance

1

1 Tree

Maintenance

Debris

Disposal

Seasonal

Color

Lawn

Post-

Emergent

Post

Emergent

Herbicide

Lawn

Pre -

Emergent

Bed Post-

Emergent

Bed

Pre-

Emergent

Lawn

Fertilization

Bed

Fertilization

Tree

Fertilization

5

Fire Ant

Control

Rye

Over-seeding

Sprinkler

Check

Mulch

1

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

JAN FEB MAR APR MAY JUN JUL AUG SEP OCT NOV DEC TOTAL

1

4

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

4

1

1

4

4

4

1

1

1

5

5

5

1

1

1

1

5

1

4

4

4

4

1

1

1

1

4

4

4

4

1

1

1

5

5

5

4

4

4

1 1

1 1

1

1

5

1

1

4

1

1

4

4

4

4

1 1

1 1

1

1

4

4

4

1

5

1

4

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

4

2

2

2

1

1

1

2

1

12

52

0

42

42

42

12

12

12

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1 1 1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1 1

1

2

3

2

2

3

3

2

0

12

2

1 1

MANSFIELD ROAD

LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 029520- 8

SECTION 040513 - MASONRY MORTAR

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. The Work of this Section includes providing all labor, equipment, and materials to furnish and install mortar for masonry materials as shown on the Contract

Documents.

1.3 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following Sections contain work related to this Section:

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement.

B.

1.

2.

3.

Section 042200 – Unit Masonry

Section 044200 – Exterior Stone Cladding

Section 047200 – Architectural Cast Stone

ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.

C.

D.

ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

E.

F.

G.

MANSFIELD ROAD

MASONRY MORTAR

ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.

ASTM C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.

ASTM C1019 – Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout

040513- 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide sample for color selection.

A. Use same source or brand of masonry mortar materials for the duration of the

Project.

A. Store mortar materials in a dry place, off the ground, under cover.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. Use Type III high-early strength for laying masonry in cold weather.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, with 12 percent maximum air content by volume.

C.

D.

Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type N.

Aggregates: ASTM C 144, ASTM C 270

E.

F.

Water: Clean, free of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials.

Mortar Color: As selected by A/E. Provide separate colors for stone and brick.

A.

B.

Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents. The use of calcium chloride in mortar is not permitted.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Shall be Type S meeting the requirements of ASTM C

270., 1800 PSI.

C. Masonry Cement: One part masonry cement to three parts sand, proportioned by volume.

A. Grout for filling CMU block shall 3000 PSI per ASTM C1019, and be course grout meeting requirements of ASTM C476.

MANSFIELD ROAD

MASONRY MORTAR

040513- 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING

A. Mixing mortar with sufficient water for minimum of three minutes in a drum type batch mixer. Mix mortar thoroughly and only in such quantity as is needed for immediate use. Use mortar within two hours after mixing. Discard mortar not used within specified time. Clean the mixer after four or five batches have been mixed.

B. Add water to lime at least 24 hours before mixing it with other materials.

C. Mortars that have stiffened within time interval stated above because of evaporation of moisture may be re-tempered to restore workability by adding water. Do not re-temper mortar that has reached initial set.

D. In cold weather, heat sand or water sufficiently to maintain temperature of mortar above 50 degrees F as follows:

1.

2.

Heat sand or mixing water: 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F.

Heat sand and mixing water: 32 degrees F to 20 degrees F.

A.

B.

Measure materials by volume or equivalent weight.

Do not measure by shovel.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

MASONRY MORTAR

040513- 3

SECTION 042200 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to provide and install concrete masonry units for walls and columns including concrete footings, reinforcement, anchorage, and other accessories necessary to construct walls and columns as show on the Contract Documents.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A.

1.

2.

3.

Coordinate the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work of other Sections. Other Sections containing related work include, but are not limited to the following:

Section 040513 – Masonry Mortar

Section 047200 – Architectural Cast Stone

Section 044200 – Exterior Stone Cladding

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

B.

C.

ACI 530.1 - Specifications for Masonry Structures.

ASTM A 641 - Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units

ASCE 5/6 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures

ASTM A82 – Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, For Concrete

Reinforcement

ASTM A153 – Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and

Steel

MANSFIELD ROAD

UNIT MASONARY 042200- 1

I.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Concrete Units: Submit two full size concrete masonry units to show finishes, and dimensions.

B.

ASTM A 641 – Standard Specification for Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) Carbon

Steel Wire

Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

A.

B.

C.

Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530, ACI 530.1.

Maintain one copy of each document on site.

Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this Section with a minimum of five years documented experience.

A. Conform to applicable Building Code requirements for masonry construction.

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

B.

C.

2. Builders Concrete Products

3. Featherlite

Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 90, Type I – 1900 PSI, Grade

N, Moisture Controlled normal weight; standard and split face.

Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 4, 6, 8, & 12 inches by 16 inches.

1. Provide special units for inside and outside corners of other than 90 degrees. Any reveal work where holes or backside strikings will be exposed.

MANSFIELD ROAD

UNIT MASONARY 042200- 2

2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A. Joint Reinforcement:

1. Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 641, 3/16-inch side rods with 9 gage cross ties., truss type, conforming to ASTM A82. Lap splice ends a minimum of 12 inches at splices

2. Manufacturers

B. b. c. d. e.

Heckman Building Products.

Hohman and Barnard, Inc.

AA Wire Products Company

Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America

Veneer Anchor Straps with Adjustable Wire Ties:

1. Manufacturers: b. AA Wire Products Company.

2. d. e.

Heckman Building Products, "Model 315D" and "Model 316".

Hohman and Barnard, Inc. f. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.

Corrugated metal 1-1/4-inch by 9-inch size by 22 gauge thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish with 3/16-inch diameter wire ties, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153 B2 steel finish.

A. Mortar and grout used with CMU shall be as specified in Section 040513

Masonry Mortar.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A.

B.

C.

Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.

Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

MANSFIELD ROAD

UNIT MASONARY 042200- 3

3.2 PREPARATION

A.

B.

Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other Sections.

Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until structure provides permanent bracing.

3.3 COURSING

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness.

1.

2.

3.

Bond: Running.

Block Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

Mortar Joints: Tooled, Concave.

3.4 PLACING AND BONDING

A.

B.

Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.

Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.

Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, non-chipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

G. Cut mortar joints flush where cement parging is required.

3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

A.

B.

Continuously reinforce mortar joints 16 inches on center vertically in solid masonry walls meeting cavity walls.

Provide ties at 8 inches on center where masonry walls intersect. Install ties in masonry veneer walls 16 inches on center vertically.

A. As Work progresses, install items to be built-in the Work and furnished by other

Sections.

B. Install built-in items plumb and level.

3.7 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4-inch.

MANSFIELD ROAD

UNIT MASONARY 042200- 4

B.

C.

D.

Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16-inch.

Maximum Variation From Plane of Wall: 1/4-inch in 10 feet and 1/2-inch in 20 feet or more.

Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4-inch per story noncumulative; 1/2-inch in two stories or more.

E. Maximum Variation From Level Coursing: 1/8-inch in 3 feet and 1/4-inch in 10 feet; 1/2-inch in 30 feet.

Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8-inch in 3 feet. F.

G. Maximum Variation From Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4-inch.

3.8 CUTTING AND FITTING

A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test all masonry work.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.

B.

C.

Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.

Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.

D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that may be damaged by construction activities.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

UNIT MASONARY 042200- 5

SECTION 044200 – EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials and equipment necessary to install stone veneer on concrete unit masonry walls and columns and includes, but not limited to:

1.

2.

3.

Cut stone veneer at exterior walls and columns.

Cut stone for monument sign.

Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.

6. Stone protection sealant

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work of other Sections. Other Sections containing related work include, but are not limited to the following:

D.

1.

2.

4.

5.

Section 040513 – Masonry Mortar

Section 047200 – Architectural Cast Stone

Section 079200 – Joint Sealants

Section 323100 – Ornamental Metals

1.4 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B.

C.

ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.

IMLAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council) - Recommended

Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.

ASTM C 97-02: Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of

Dimension Stone.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 1

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

ASTM C 119-04: Terminology Relating to Dimension Stone

ASTM C 170-90 (1999): Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension

Stone

ASTM C 880-98: Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimensional Stone

ASTM C 1242-03: Guide for the Selection, Design, and Installation of Exterior

Dimension Stone Anchors and Anchoring Systems

ASTM C 1354-96: Test Method for Strength of Individual Stone Anchorages in

Dimension Stone

ASTM F 593-02: Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs

K.

L.

ASTM F 594-02: Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts

ASTM C616 Stand Specification for Quartz Based Dimension Stone.

M. ASTM C568 Stand Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorage locations, joint locations, elevations, reinforcement, and jointing methods.

B. Product Data: Provide data on stone units, mortar products, and reinforcements.

C. Submit five (5) samples illustrating minimum and maximum stone sizes, full color range and texture, markings, surface finish, and mortar color.

D. Submit stone fabricator's installation instructions and field erection or setting drawings.

A.

B.

Stone Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in quarrying cut stone with minimum ten years documented experience.

Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C.

D.

Design anchors and supports under direct supervision of registered Professional

Structural Engineer, registered in the State of Texas.

Control Joints: Provide control joints and install at frequency and in accordance as recommended by the Brick Institute of America. Confirm locations and frequency with Owner’s Representative before beginning work.

E. Mockup: Construct stone wall mockup with stone including stone mortar anchor accessories and typical control joint. Locate where directed. Mockup may not remain as part of Work.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 2

F. Preconstruction Stone Testing: Engage an independent testing agency to perform the following testing for each stone variety:

1.

2.

Furnish test specimens that are representative of materials.

Physical Property Tests: ASTM standards specified for stone type.

3.

4.

Flexural Strength Tests: ASTM C 880

Anchorage Tests: ASTM C 1354

G. Visual Mockup: Provide mock-up of the approved stone or stones in the approved finishes, erected on-site as agreed to by the Owner’s Representative,

Contractor, and the Fabricator. The approved mock-up shall become the standard for the project.

1.

2.

Build mockup of typical exterior stone areas as shown on Drawings.

Size: as agreed to by Owner’s Representative.

3. Color consistency: demonstrate color consistency with mockup; color range shall not exceed range of color established by samples. Color shall be consistent so that all panels match each other. Any variations from this shall be cause to reject such stone pieces and Contractor shall replace to match the other stone at no cost to the Owner.

4. Included typical components and anchors.

5. Include sealant joints installed as required by Section 079200 - Joint

6.

Sealants.

Mockup may become part of the completed Work if approved at time of

Substantial Completion.

7. Demolish mockup and remove from site after completion of stone cladding work.

H. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene a pre-installation meeting at the site at least one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. The purpose of the meeting shall be to review methods and sequence of all stone work, special details and conditions, standards of workmanship, testing and quality control requirements, and other topics related to the work of this section.

A. Store and handle materials to prevent deterioration or damage.

1.

2.

3.

Stone shall be carefully packed and loaded for shipment using reasonable care and customary precautions against damage in transit. Material, which may cause staining or discoloration shall not be used for blocking or packing.

The stone shall be stacked on timber or platforms at least 4 inches above the ground. Store stone clear of the ground on non-staining skids

(cypress, white pine, poplar, or yellow pine) without an excessive amount of resin.

Care shall be taken to prevent staining or discoloration during storage.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 3

4.

5.

If storage is to be for a prolonged period, polyethylene or other suitable plastic film shall be placed between wood and finished surfaces of completely dry stone.

Properly store cementitious materials. Do not use damp cementitious materials.

A. Protect stone as follows:

1. At the end of each day’s work, cover tops of walls with non-staining, waterproof covering. Protect partially finished work when not being worked on.

2.

3.

4.

Prevent staining of stone from mortar, grout, sealants, and other sources.

Immediately remove such materials without damaging stone.

Protect base of walls using coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.

Protect sills, ledges, and other projections from mortar.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B.

C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STONE

A. Stone veneer for columns shall be Lueder’s limestone. Owner’s Representative to approve color range. Stone shall be split face typical for use in stone walls and columns. Stone shall be chopped and range in size from 4 to 8 inches by 3-5 inch depth. Stone shall meet requirements of ASTM C568 Stand Specification for

Limestone Dimension Stone

B. Stone veneer for monument sign shall be thin veneer sandstone of 1 – ½ inches thick by dimensions show on the Contract Documents. Stone shall be sawn cut on non-exposed faces with exposed face and ends to be a slight cleft finish.

Color shall be in the tan range and will complement the color of the limestone being used in the columns. Owner’s Representative to approve color range and finish from samples. Stone shall meet requirements of ASTM C616 Stand

Specification for Quartz Based Dimension Stone.

A. Face Size: As indicated on Contract Documents. Submit samples of minimum and maximum face size.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Maximum Variation from Thickness: 1/2-inch.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 4

B. Arrises: Remove the sharp edge from arrises to slightly blunt edge and to reduce chipping of the finished edge.

C. Fabricate stone to maintain minimum clearance of 1 inch between backs of stone units and surfaces behind stone.

D.

E.

Dress joints straight and at 90 degree angle to face. Shape beds to fit supports.

Anchor Provision: Cut and drill sink provisions and holes in stone for anchors, fasteners, supports, and lifting devices as indicated or needed to set stone in place.

1.

2.

Allow room for expansion of the anchoring devices where necessary.

Where liners are required on the back of panels, secure by means of a mechanical anchors. Comply with referenced standards.

F. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish and to match final samples and mockups.

G. Joint Width: Cut stone to produce uniform joints 1/4 inch and as shown on

Drawings and approved in the shop drawings.

H. Provide chases, reveals, reglets, openings, and similar features as required to accommodate adjacent work.

I. Fabricate molded work, including washes and drips, to produce uniform stone shapes, with precisely formed arrises slightly eased, and matching profile at joints between units.

J. Grade and mark stone to achieve uniform appearance when installed. Inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant. Replace defective units.

K. Stone Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Stone thickness 2 inches or less: Plus or minus 1/16 inch of the nominal

2. thickness.

Stone thicknesses greater than 2 inches: Plus 1/8 inch and minus 1/16

3.

4.

5. inch of the nominal thickness.

Stone thicknesses greater than 6 inches: Plus or minus 1/8 inch of the nominal thickness.

Overall face size: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in both height and width

Out of square: Plus or minus 1/16 inch difference of diagonals.

2.3 MORTAR

A. Refer to Section 040513 – Masonry Mortar.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 5

1. Corrugated steel dovetail anchors formed of 0.0598-inch thick by 1-inch wide galvanized steel, 3-1/2-inch long where used to anchor 4-inch nominal thick masonry units, 5-1/2 inches long for masonry units more than 4-inches thick.

2. Triangular wire dovetail anchor 4-inch wide formed of 9 ga. steel wire with galvanized steel dovetail insert. Anchor length to extend at least 3-inches into masonry, 1-inch into 1-1/2-inch thick units.

3. Form dovetail anchor slots from 0.0239-inch thick galvanized steel with felt or fiber filler.

4. Products: a. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. b. Heckman Building Products. c. Hohman and Barnard, Inc. d. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Spacers: Plastic type.

A. Joint Reinforcement: Buck anchor formed of 14 ga. by 1-1/2 inches wide galvanized steel, 3-1/2 inches long where used to anchor 4-inch nominal stone units.

D.

E.

2.

3.

4.

Heckman Building Products.

Hohman and Barnard, Inc.

Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

Joint Filler; Manufacturers:

1. Dur-O-Wall, Inc.

2. Hohman and Barnard, Inc.

3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

Cleaning Solution: Type which will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.

A. Anchor Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 304

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 6

B. Dowels and Pins Material: Stainless steel, ASTM A 276, Type 304

C. Aluminum Anchor Material: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B 221, not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Cast-in-Place Inserts Not In Contact with Stone: Steel or malleable iron adjustable inserts, with bolts, nuts, washers, and shims and as follows:

1.

2.

3.

Finish: Hot-dip galvanized or mechanically zinc coated

Capacity: Sustain load equal to 4 times the required loads

Testing: ASTM E 488.

E. Post installed Anchor Bolts: Provide the following for installation into concrete and masonry:

F.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

Anchor Material: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316.

Capacity: a. b. c.

Concrete: Sustain load equal to 4 times the required loads

Masonry: Sustain load equal to 6 times the required loads

Test: ASTM E 488.

Post installed Chemical Anchor Bolts:

1. Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

2.

3.

4.

Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

Anchor Material: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276, Type 304 or 316.

Capacity: a. Concrete: Sustain load equal to 4 times the required loads b. c.

Masonry: Sustain load equal to 6 times the required loads

Test: ASTM E 488.

G. Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers.

1.

2.

Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.

3. Threaded Fastener Anchor Material: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 276,

Type 304 or 316.

H. Provide stainless steel anchors including bolt, nut, flat and lock washer. Bolt designed to be inserted into routed slot in back of stone.

1. Provide Type 31 Anchors

2. Diameter: Size anchors to comply with requirements, but not less than

3/16 inch.

2.7 JOINT SEALANTS

For joint sealants see Section 079200 – Joint Sealants. A.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 7

A. Stone sealant required to seal all stone on water wall shall be a product that seals the stone but doesn’t change the color, except to make it appear as it would if water was applied to it. Contractor shall test the product as proposed by the following manufactures to determine which product will accomplish the desired effect. The manufacturer’s are:

1. HMK Stonecare, 1-800-424-2465., www.hmkstonecare.com.

2.

3.

Prosoco, 1-800-255-4255., www.prosoco.com.

Miracle Sealants, 1-800-350-1901., www.miraclesealants.com

.

B. The Contractor shall submit the proposed product with all product information and a sample of the product applied to the stone pavement for approval before purchase of the product for use. Product shall be recommended by manufacturer for resistance to graffiti and for rust stains from Cor-Ten Steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive Work of this

Section. Do not proceed with Work until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.

C. Advise installers of other Work about requirements relating to the placement of inserts, flashing reglets, and other items to be used by the stonework installer for anchoring, supporting, and flashing of dimensional stonework. Furnish coordination drawings to other trades for coordination. Verify that items build-in under other Sections are properly located and sized.

D. Prior to setting cut stone, clean all surfaces to remove accumulated dirt and stains. Clean thoroughly by scrubbing with non-metallic brushes followed by a drenching with clean water. Use only mild detergents that do not contain caustic fillers.

A. Proceed with the installation of the stonework in accordance with Drawings and using skilled mechanics capable of proper handling of the setting of the stone and able to field cut where necessary with sharp and true edges. Contractor shall be responsible to provide the proper equipment necessary to lift and place stone so as not to be damaged.

B. Set stone with joints uniform in appearance and stone edges and faces aligned to tolerances indicated.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 8

C. Clean surfaces that are dirty or stained. Scrub with fiber brushes, and then rinse with clear water.

D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations shown on Drawings.

1.

2.

Sealants: Refer to Section: 079200, JOINT SEALANTS.

Keep expansion joints free of materials.

E. Keep cavities open where unfilled space occurs between back of stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout unless shown on the

Drawings.

1. Place weep holes in joints where moisture may accumulate behind stone.

Locate weep holes at 24-inch intervals.

3.3 ANCHORED STONE CLADDING

A. Installation of Anchors: Comply with ASTM C 1242.

B. Set stone on setting shims. Maintain uniform joint widths and prevent point loading of stone on anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a minimum distance of width of joint.

3.4 MORTAR SET STONE CLADDING

A. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled.

1.

2.

Use setting buttons to maintain uniform joint width. Hold buttons back from face of stone a distance not less than the joint width.

Do not set heavy courses until mortar in courses below has hardened to resist being squeezed out of joint.

3. Support and brace projecting stones until wall above is in place and

4. mortar has set.

Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.

Embed ends of sills in mortar; leave remainder of joint open until final pointing. B.

C. Mortar Pointing:

1.

2.

Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.

Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and apply next layer when installed layer is thumbprint hard.

Tool joints to a concave profile. 3.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 9

D.

E.

Joint Sealant: Rake out mortar from sealant-filled joints to depths of not less than

1/2 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.

Set the following stone cladding with head joints filled with sealants:

1. Cornices.

2. Copings.

3. Belt and other projecting courses.

A. Contractor shall apply stone protection sealant to the water wall only as recommended by the manufacturer.

A. Variation from Plumb:

B.

1. Vertical lines and surfaces of walls do not exceed: a. 1/4 inch in 10 feet b. c.

3/8 inch in a story height or 20 feet maximum

1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

2. External corners, corners and jambs within 20 feet of an entrance, expansion joints, and other critical lines do not exceed: a. 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. c.

1/4 inch in 20 feet.

3/8 inch in 40 feet or more.

Variation from Level:

1. Horizontal stone lines including lintels, sills, copings, bands, and grooves, not to exceed: a. b. c. d.

1/8 inch in 10 feet.

1/4 inch in 20 feet.

1/2 inch in any bay.

3/4 inch in 40 feet maximum.

Variation of Linear Building Line: C.

D.

1. Positions shown in plan and related portions of walls and partitions, do not exceed: a. b.

1/4 inch in 20 feet.

1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.

For wall thicknesses and columns from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus

1/4 inch plus 1/2 inch.

E. Variation in Joint Width: Do not exceed plus or minus 1/8 inch.

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 10

F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stone Units (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/16inch difference between planes of adjacent units.

3.7 ADJUSTING

Remove and replace stone not matching final samples and mockups. A.

B.

C.

Remove and replace stone not complying with requirements.

Replace non-complying stone to match final samples and mockups, comply with specified requirements. Replacement stone shall show no evidence of replacement or variation of other stone in color, texture and finish.

D.

3.8 PROTECTION

A.

Patching: Minor patching in small areas may be acceptable if the repair does not distract from the overall appearance of the finished project. Owner’s

Representative shall be the judge of this. Any material not acceptable to the

Owner’s Representative shall be replaced by the Contractor.

At the end of each day's work, cover top of walls with a non-staining waterproof covering. Protect partially finished work when not being worked on. Protect all walls and other parts of the Tribute with a security construction fence to avoid vandalism or safety issues.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean stone as work progresses. Remove mortar, sealant, and stains before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: Clean stone as recommended by fabricator or stone producer.

C.

1.

2.

3.

Clean all finished stonework with a mild detergent using a fiber brush.

After cleaning, rinse with clean water.

Do not use acid or other caustic materials.

When cleaning is completed, remove temporary protection.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING 044200- 11

SECTION 047200 – ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL

DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. The Work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to install architectural cast stone caps for stone columns as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C1364 – Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions of individual components.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units.

Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any, and indication of finished faces.

C.

D.

Samples: For color and texture of cast stone.

Colored Mortar Samples: For mortar color.

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

F. Material Test Reports.

1.4 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the Work of other Sections. Other Sections containing related work include, but are not limited to the following:

MANSFIELD ROAD

ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 047200- 1

1.

2.

3.

Section 040513 – Masonry Mortar

Section 042200 – Unit Masonry

Section 044200 – Exterior Stone Cladding

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.

1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Architectural Cast Stone, Inc.

Cast Stone Systems, Inc.

Classic Cast Stone of Dallas, Inc.

Dallas Cast Stone Co., Inc.

Southern Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the wet-cast method.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing.

Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide raised fillets at ends indicated to be built into jambs.

Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cure units by one of the following methods

1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours.

2.

3.

Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours.

Cure units to comply with one of the following

MANSFIELD ROAD

ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 047200- 2

C.

D. a. b. c. d.

Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.

Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.

Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.

Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.

Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

Sizes, Colors and Textures: To be selected by Owner’s Representative.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Dowels: Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner complying with requirements in Section 042200 - Unit Masonry, and approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer, and approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

2.4 MORTAR

A. Comply with requirements in Section 040513 – Masonry Mortar for materials and mixes.

A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C1364.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Section 042200 - Unit

Masonry.

B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated.

1.

2.

Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.

Fill collar joints solid as units are set.

3.

4.

Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.

Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 047200- 3

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked.

Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than

3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.

Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 -

Joint Sealants.

A.

B.

C.

D.

Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or

1/2 inch maximum.

Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.

Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except due to warpage of units.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Owner’s Representative.

1. Replace units in a manner that shows no evidence of replacement.

B.

C.

In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1.

2.

Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply with requirements in Section 042200 - Unit Masonry.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 047200- 4

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 047200- 5

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. This Section includes all work, materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the Work of this Section, and includes, but is not limited to:

1. Cold-applied joint sealants for pavement and other uses as shown on the

Contract Drawings.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of related Work are specified and included in other Sections for constructing joints in pavement:

1. Section 321316: Colored Concrete Paving

2. Section 044200: Exterior Stone Cladding

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two

6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

079200 - 1 MANSFIELD ROAD

JOINT SEALANTS

A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 50 deg F.

2.

3.

4.

When joint substrates are wet.

Where joint widths are less than, or more than, those allowed by jointsealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer's full color range for exposed joints.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Non-sag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete, Tile, Stone, and Brick Paving: ASTM D 5893, Type NS.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone. b. c. d.

Dow Corning Corporation; 888.

Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.

Sika Corporation; Silicone sealants.

B. Single-Component, neutral curing, ultra low modulus Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint

Sealant for Stone Wall Cladding joints: ASTM C-920, class 25, Type S grade NS, and TT-S-230C.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 890 NST.

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers, and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

MANSFIELD ROAD

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 2

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint-sealant depth and prevent bottomside adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealantsubstrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in

ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1.

2.

3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.

Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.

Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

MANSFIELD ROAD

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 3

D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1.

2.

Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Non-sag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:

1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

JOINT SEALANTS

079200 - 4

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A.

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B.

Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2

SUMMARY OF WORK

A.

The Work of this Section includes, but not limited to:

1. Benches

Receptacle

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: For each product specified.

B.

Color samples: For each product specified.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

The Contractor shall store the delivered all materials and furnishings in a manner to prevent wracking or stress of components, and to prevent mechanical damage or physical damage. All stored materials and items shall be protected from weather, careless handling, and vandalism.

1.6 COORDINATION

A.

B.

The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Work of other Sections for installation. Verify dimensions and Work of other trades that adjoin materials of this Section.

Obtain all necessary templates and patterns required from manufacturer for proper execution of installation work of this Section: Coordinate the delivery of items, templates, and patterns manufactured by other trades to maintain construction schedule.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SITE FURNISHINGS

129300 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BENCHES

A. Benches shall be model MLB700-AW-D1 as manufactured by Maglin Furniture,

Inc., at www.Maglin.com, Phone No. 800 716 5506 x 265. Bench shall be 6 feet long, powder coated, surface mount and tamper proof bolts. Color to be bronze.

Samples provided to Owner for approval.

A. Litter receptacles shall be model MLWR700–32-WT-DL7 by Maglin at www.maglin.com., Phone No. 800 716 5506 x 265. Litter receptacle shall be 32 gallon, side door opening with dome lid, powder coated, surface mount and tamper proof bolts. Color to be bronze. Color sample provided to Owner for approval.

PART 3 - EXECUATION

A.

B.

Site furnishings shall be attached to concrete pavement using tamper proof bolts or screws as recommended by Manufacturer. Site furnishings shall be level and plumb.

Any damage to the site furnishings while storing or installation shall be cause to reject site furnishings and have them removed and replaced at no cost to owner

3.2 CLEANING

C.

After completing site furnishing installation, inspect components. Remove spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finishes to match original finish or replace component.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

SITE FURNISHINGS

129300 - 2

SECTION 312313 - SUBGRADE PREPARATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A.

Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A.

B.

The Work of this Section includes furnishing of all labor, tools, equipment and incidentals to complete the Work and shall include:

1.

2.

3.

All required excavation within the limits of the work area not covered as part of earthwork for the roadway construction to include areas of planting, seeding, sodding, and placement of planting soils.

Removal, proper utilization, or disposal of all excavated material.

Compacting, shaping, and finishing of all subgrade in conformity to the alignment, cross section, and elevation shown on the plans.

Submit complete laboratory analysis of soil material proposed for fill material.

1.

2.

3.

Establish moisture density relationship of in-place sub-grade in accordance with ASTM D-698.

Establish moisture density relationship of proposed select fill(s) material in accordance with ASTM D-698.

Perform PI test on proposed select fill material to confirm conformance with the project specifications in accordance with ASTM D-4318.

A. Coordinate the Work of this Section with the Work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. Other Sections containing related work include but are not limited to the following:

B.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Seeding - 329213

Sodding - 329223

Planting - 329300

Planting Soils – Section 329113

Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for

Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 2004, TxDOT, Items 100

Preparing the Right-of-Way, 110 Excavation, 132 Embankment, 204

MANSFIELD ROAD

SUBGRADE PREPARATION 312313 - 1

1.4 REFERENCES

Sprinkling, 210 Rolling, and other Items as pertinent to accomplishing the work of preparing the subgrade.

A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed.

B. ASTM D698 - Laboratory Compaction Characteristic of Soil Using Standard

Effort (12,400 lb/ft;).

C.

D.

ASTM D4318 - Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.

Texas Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction of

Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 2004, TxDOT.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – Not Used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 A. GENERAL: After the excavation or embankment has been substantially completed, the subgrade shall be brought to the proper alignment, cross-section and elevation, so that after rolling and subsequent finishing operations, it shall conform to the correct configuration and dimensions as indicated on plans.

3.2 B. EQUIPMENT: All equipment necessary for the construction of this item shall be suitable for the work considering the confined work area and shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative as to condition before the contractor shall be permitted to begin construction operations on which the equipment is to be used.

Hand operated mechanical tampers may be used.

3.3 A. COMPACTION: Compaction shall consist of the equipment operation, as herein specified discretion.

3.4 A.

1. Compaction Methods: The method of compaction shall be left to the discretion of the contractor. Each layer of fill, if dry, shall be wetted uniformly to the moisture content required to obtain the desired density and shall be compacted by means of tamps or rammers.

FINISHED SUBGRADE: After completion of the compaction and immediately ahead of the application of pavement, the subgrade shall then be tested with templates or string lines by the Contractor. All irregularities which develop in excess of one-half inch in a length of 16 feet (12.5 mm in 5M) measured longitudinally shall be corrected by loosening, adding or removing material; reshaping; and re-compacting by sprinkling and rolling. The completed subgrade shall have a uniform density of not less than of the maximum density, as shown on the plans, determined by ASTM D 698. Moisture content shall be within minus 2 to plus 4 of optimum.

B. The subgrade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in

MANSFIELD ROAD

SUBGRADE PREPARATION 312313 - 2

conformity with the required pavement section and established grade, until the pavement is placed, and shall be kept wetted down sufficiently in advance of placing any pavement to ensure its being in a firm and moist condition for at least two inches below surface of the prepared subgrade. Only such subgrade as is necessary for the satisfactory prosecution of the work shall be completed ahead of the placement of pavement. Complete drainage of the subgrade shall be provided at all times.

3.5 A. COMPACTION TESTS: The completed subgrade shall be tested for compaction and moisture content at the rate of one test per 10,000 square foot.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

SUBGRADE PREPARATION 312313 - 3

SECTION 321316 - COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the work of new colored and patterned cast–in-place reinforced concrete walkways.

B.

C.

D.

Placement and compaction of sand base.

Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work.

Source and field quality control.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following related Work found in other sections:

1. Section 033000: Cast-In-Place Concrete

2. Section 079200: Joint Sealants

1.4 REFERENCES

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction

ACI 304 and ACI 316IR - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete

ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete

ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete

G. ANSI/ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction

H.

I.

J.

ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C494 – Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 1

K.

L.

ASTM C150 - Portland Cement

ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

M. ASTM 185 - Steel Welded Wire Fabric. Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

N. ASTM 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

O.

P.

ASTM C494 - Water Reducing Agent

Fed. Spec. TT-S-00230C – Joint Sealant

Q. TXDOT Standard Specifications - Texas Dept of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, latest Edition.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following information or samples:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Prefabricated control joint.

Preformed joint filler.

Color chart for selection of sealant color.

Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.

5. Admixtures.

7.

8.

Applied finish materials.

Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.

9. Color chart for concrete color agent

10. sealant

B. Construct Concrete Sample Panels:

1. Construct 3 foot x 3 foot sample panel of finished colored and stamped concrete pavement for approval, at least 15 days prior to final concrete paving work. Samples shall not be constructed in an area of proposed finish work. Samples shall be constructed within the vicinity of the proposed finish work to facilitate comparisons during construction. The samples shall demonstrate the typical installation of concrete, including score lines, expansion joint and sealant, curing and finishing material, surface texture, color, and edge treatment. The accepted sample, upon approval, shall be maintained as the standard of minimal quality for approval of all proposed concrete pavement work required for the project. If the original sample panel is not approved, the Contractor shall provide additional sample panels, as required, at no additional cost to the Owner until an approved sample is obtained. Unacceptable sample panels shall immediately be removed from the site.

C. Submit the proposed mix design of each class of concrete to an independent testing agency and Owner’s Representative for review and receiving approval from Owner’s Representative prior to commencement of work.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 2

D. An independent testing agency hired by the Contractor shall submit the test results of concrete strength tests to Contractor and Owner’s Representative immediately following each pour.

C.

D.

A.

B.

Perform Work in accordance with ACI 302 and ASTM 316R.

Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.

Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.

Surfaces of curb ramps and handicapped access ramps shall be stable, firm and slip resistant. Construct ramps so that water does not accumulate on ramp surfaces. The handicapped ramps shall have the truncated dome pavers as specified herein and show on the Contract Drawings.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

Existing paving areas shall, if damaged, stained, or removed during the course of this project, shall be repaired or replaced under this Section. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement, except as otherwise noted, shall match as closely as possible to those employed in new work installed under this

Contract.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with 10-years’ experience in manufacture of specified products.

Installer Qualifications: An installer with 5-years’ experience with work of similar scope and quality.

Comply with the requirements of ACI 301.

Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project.

1.7 ENVIROMENTAL

A. Do not place concrete when base temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or when surface is wet, muddy or frozen. Refer to ACI 306R for cold weather placement and ACI 305R for hot weather placement.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

A. Sand aggregate base materials for concrete slabs and curbs shall be Fine Aggregate consisting of clean, hard, durable particles of natural or manufactured sand. Sand shall be free from frozen material and from injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter, or other objectionable material, and containing no more

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 3

than 5% clay lumps by weight and as specified in Item 421.2, and or Item 528.2

Table 1, Texas Dept of Transportation Standard Specifications for Construction.

A. The dimensions of the lumber used to form concrete pavements shall not be less than 1 inch nominal thickness by the required pavement depth of a true 4, 6, or 8 inches or as otherwise shown on the Contract Documents.

A. Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A 615.

B.

1.

2.

Bars employed as reinforcement shall be deformed type.

Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents, reinforcing bars shall be Number 4 for 5 inch concrete and Number 5 for 8 inch concrete,

Grade 60.

Steel expansion dowels for expansion joints shall be hot-rolled plain steel rounds conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M31, Grade 60 and consisting of a

1/2 inch (12.7 mm) by 24 inches (610 mm) smooth steel dowel and compatible waxed or greased tube sleeve,

1.

2.

Dowels and sleeves shall be as furnished by A.H. Harris & Sons, Inc., by

U.S. Steel Corp., by Edgecombe Steel Corp., or approved equal.

Dowels shall be epoxy coated.

A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I – Normal or TXDOT Standard Specifications Item

531 Concrete Class A. Slump shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C

143.

B.

C.

D.

Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33 or TXDOT Item 421.

Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.

Curing Materials: Type 2 membrane conforming to DMS-4650.

2.5 ADMIXTURES

Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. A.

B. Water Reducing Agent: ASTM C494, only if approved in writing by the Owner’s

Representative.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 4

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film. Use type recommended for below grade application.

2.7 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. See Section 079200: JOINT SEALANTS for joint fillers and sealants.

A. Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304 or TXDOT Standard Specifications,

Item 421. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.

B. Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Method 2.

C. Provide normal weight concrete to the following criteria for pedestrian pavements.

Unit Measurement

Compressive Strength (28 day) 3000 psi

Water/Cement Ratio (maximum) 0.60 by weight

Aggregate Size (maximum) 1.5 inch TXDOT Grades 2, 3

Air Entrained 4 ½ to 5 percent (for concrete exposed to

exterior)

Slump - Plus or minus 1 inch 4 inches

D. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved in writing by

Testing Agency and Owner’s Representative. Use of admixtures will not relax

Cold Weather Placement requirements.

E.

F.

Never use calcium chloride as it causes mottling and surface discoloration.

Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved in writing by Testing Agency and Owner’s Representative. Use of admixtures will not relax

Hot Weather Placement requirements.

G. Add air entraining agent to all normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.

2.9 COLOR ADMIXTURE AND SEALING COMPOUND

A. Coloring agent for crosswalks, bridge approach slabs, traffic island ends, and medians shall be Solomon Colors, Inc. Color-Flo, color: Rawhide as manufactured by Solomon Color Inc. 4050 Color Plant Road, Springfield, IL 62702, Phone

800.624.0261, web: www.solomoncolors.com

. Color to be approved by Owner’s

Representative.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 5

B. Curing and Sealing Compound: Patterned concrete shall be cured and sealed using Brickform Satin Cure and Seal as manufactured by Solomon Color Inc.

4050 Color Plant Road, Springfield, IL 62702, Phone 800.624.0261, web: www.solomoncolors.com

A. Stamping/Imprinting Tools and Materials shall be Proline Herringbone Paver Pattern, 90 degree pattern, paver size 6 inch by 11.75 inches for crosswalks, and 4 inch by 8 inches for islands, as manufactured by Proline Concrete Tools, Inc.

2560 Jason Court, Oceanside, CA 92057. Phone: 800.795.4750. Web: www.prolinestamps.com

. Background texture shall be Limestone.

B. Release agent for use with the stamps shall be recommended by pattern tool manufacturer and compatible with colored concrete products. Release agent shall be Proline Dura-Liquid Release Agent as manufactured by Proline Concrete

Tools, Inc. 2560 Jason Court, Oceanside, CA 92057. Phone: 800.795.4750.

Web: www.prolinestamps.com

.

A complete set of stamp form tools for each pattern shall be provided to the City at the end of the project. Cost associated with the stamping tools shall be subsidiary to the pay item of the stamped concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Verify site conditions prior to placing concrete. A.

B. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.

C. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, tree grate rims, and all other items to be cast into the concrete slab are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.

A.

B.

Areas to be paved shall be compacted and brought to subgrade elevation and all said work specified, performed and paid under this Section. Subgrade shall receive the final fine grading, filling, and compaction as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines.

Existing subgrade material that will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material re-

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 6

moved shall be material purchased, installed and paid for under the Work of the this Section.

C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be re-compacted as required to bring top 8 inches of material immediately below aggregate base course to a compaction at optimum moisture of at least 95 percent of maximum density, as determined by

ASTM D 1557. Subgrade compaction shall extend for a distance of at least 12 inches beyond pavement edge.

D. Sand base material shall be placed on top of prepared subgrade and compacted prior to placement of concrete.

E. Disposal of debris and other material excavated and unsuitable for, or in excess of requirements for completing work, shall be disposed of off-site as specified, performed and paid for under this Section.

F. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by the Owner’s Representative and Testing

Lab prior to placement of concrete. Contractor shall arrange to have the Owner’s

Representative and Testing Lab visit the site to inspect and approve subgrade.

Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired as specified, performed, and paid for under this Section.

3.3 FORMWORK

A. All forms shall be joined neatly and tightly, shall be set true to line and grade, well staked and braced, and shall have uniform bearing throughout their length.

1. Forms shall not be moved for 72 hours after the concrete has been placed, or for a longer period if directed by the Owner’s Representative.

2. Extreme care shall be taken in removing forms in order that no damage will be done to the concrete.

3. Under no condition shall any bar, pick or other tool be used which depends upon leverage on the concrete for removal of the forms.

3.4 STEEL

A. Before being placed in position, reinforcing for reinforced concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt, ice, and other foreign material which may reduce the bond between the concrete and reinforcing. Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when necessary.

B. Welded Wire Mesh: Wire mesh used for reinforcement shall be spread flat before placing concrete. Mesh reinforcement shall be held firmly in place against vertical or transverse movement by means of satisfactory devices. Where mesh reinforcement is spliced, it shall be lapped at least 12 inches.

1. Unless designated otherwise on the Contract Documents, wire mesh shall be placed midway within the depth, and parallel to the finished surface of concrete pavements.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 7

C.

2.

3.

Do not pour concrete over top of reinforcement unless it is supported underneath.

Contractor shall pull reinforcement up immediately after pouring concrete to make sure that the reinforcement is in the middle of the slab and not sitting on the bottom.

Reinforcing Steel: After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is placed, reinforcing steel anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted.

1.

2.

Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded.

Chair bars and supports shall be provided in a number and arrangement satisfactory to the Owner’s Representative.

D. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents, reinforcing shall extend within 2 inches of formwork and expansion joints. Reinforcing shall continue through control joints.

E. The Owner may do core testing to make sure that reinforcement is in the proper position. If testing shows otherwise, concrete will be rejected and the Contractor shall remove all rejected slabs and re-pour new slabs at no additional cost. Contractor shall repair cored holes as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

A. Notify independent testing agency and the Owner’s Representative minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of operations to allow complete preliminary inspection of the Work, including subgrade, forms, and reinforcing steel, if used.

No concrete shall be deposited until the Owner’s Representative has inspected the placing of reinforcement and given permission to place concrete.

B. Paving mix, equipment, methods of mixing and placing, and precautions to be observed as to weather, condition of base and the like, shall meet the requirements of ACI 316R and ACI 304. Pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

C. Color Agent: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

D. Normal concrete placement procedures shall be followed. Concrete shall arrive at the job site so that no additional water will be required to produce the desired slump. When conditions develop that required addition of water to produce the desired slump, permission of the Testing Lab must be obtained. The concrete shall be transported from the mixer to its place of deposit by a method that will prevent segregation or loss of material.

1. Concrete pavement shall be placed in a series of alternate pours such that every other panel bounded by expansion joints shall be poured first.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 8

E.

2.

3.

The intervening panels shall then be poured as a secondary operation only after the first panels have hardened sufficiently to allow the removal of all temporary transverse forming supports.

Concrete shall be placed in one course, to full depth, as detailed on the

Contract Documents.

Work shall not be performed during rainy weather. In the event that unforeseen rain occurs, cover all broom finished concrete surfaces with plastic sheet covering to prevent alteration of texture. Concrete slabs with textured concrete surfaces altered by rain shall be removed from the site as directed by the Owner’s

Representative.

F. Adjacent work shall be protected from stain and damage during entire operation.

Damaged and stained areas shall be replaced or repaired to equal their original conditions.

G. Existing concrete, earth, and other water-permeable material against which new concrete is to be placed shall be thoroughly damp when concrete is placed.

There shall be no free water on surface.

H. Concrete which has set, or partially set, before placing shall not be employed.

Re-tempering of concrete will not be permitted.

I. Concrete shall be thoroughly spaded and tamped to secure a solid and homogeneous mass, thoroughly worked around reinforcement and into corners of forms.

J. When joining fresh concrete to concrete which has attained full set, latter shall be cleaned of foreign matter, and mortar scum and laitance shall be removed by chipping and washing. Laitance is the accumulation of fine particles on the surface of freshly poured concrete caused by an upward movement of water through the concrete. This can be caused by too much mixing water, by excessive tamping, or by vibration of the concrete. Clean, roughened base surface shall be saturated with water, but shall have no free water on surface. A coat of 1:1 cementsand grout, approximately 1/8 inches (3.2 mm) thick, shall be well scrubbed into thoroughly dampened concrete base. New concrete shall be placed immediately, before grout has dried or set.

K. Detectable Domed Unit Pavers shall be installed into the concrete during the pour as recommend by the Manufacturer.

3.6 FINISHING

A. Concrete flatwork surfaces shall be screed off and hand floated and finished true to line and grade, and free of hollows and bumps. Surface shall be dense, smooth, and at exact level and slope required.

1. Finished concrete surface for regular concrete walks, stairs, and curbs shall be wood-floated to a smooth surface. Surface shall not deviate more than 1/8 inches (3.2 mm) in 10 feet (3.05 m).

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 9

2. Concrete finish for crosswalks, bridge approach slabs, traffic island ends, and medians that are to be imprinted shall be imprinted using the specified brick pattern stamps and applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Contractor shall use the specified release agent as part of the stamping process as recommended.

B. Immediately following finishing operations arises at edges and both sides of expansion joints shall be rounded to a 1/4 inches radius.

C. Control Joints shall be tooled with scored joints made by scoring into slab surface with scoring tool or saw cut as shown on the Contract Documents.

D.

3.7 COLOR ADDITIVE INSTALLATION, CURING AND SEALING

A.

All scoring, tooling and finishing of the concrete shall be subject to the review and approval of the Owner’s Representative at any time during the construction project. The Contractor shall remove and replace, at no additional cost to the Owner, all concrete which is not acceptable to the Owner’s Representative.

Mixing: Mixer should be loaded to a minimum of 40% capacity to ensure good color dispersion. The drum must be cleaned, and approximately two-thirds of the mix water and one-half of the aggregates needed should be added to the drum.

Do not use slurry water or reclaimed aggregates. Be sure to use the same mix design and maintain 4” slump (10 cm), (low water-to-cement ratio). Add the Solomon Color ColorFlo liquid color to the drum and mix at full charging speed. Add the balance of the ingredients (water, aggregates, cement and admixtures) and mix at a full charging speed for 5 - 10 minutes (60-100 revolutions) before pouring concrete (6.13 - 7.36 m2 / L).

B. Additives: Do not use calcium chloride. This product can cause discoloration in the form of light and dark areas in the finished product. Non-chloride accelerators, including hot water are acceptable accelerators. Check the synergy of the mix design (plasticizers, water reducers and air entraining products) with the addition of color by pouring a test slab to confirm the preferred results.

C. Job Preparation: Pouring concrete over an inconsistent sub-grade or mix of dirt, plastic, wood, asphalt and existing concrete will not cure evenly. These types of sub-grades will force the majority of water to the surface to evaporate, causing efflorescence in those affected areas. In hot conditions, dampen the sub-grade before each pour to keep moisture from being absorbed from the concrete too fast. Keep the sub-base moisture consistent throughout the day without allowing the water to pool. Jobs requiring a vapor barrier and job sites having high heat and low humidity conditions are exceptions to pouring over plastic. Slump and placement techniques require tighter tolerances, and finishers need to be well trained and experienced.

D. Curing and Sealing: Do not fog or spray water on the surface during the initial curing period. Do not cover the surface with plastic. Failure to follow these guidelines can lead to uneven curing and coloration. Use the curing and sealing agent specified. Apply at a rate of 250-300 sq. ft per gallon once the slab is hard enough to be walked on without marring the surface. Do not apply these products

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 10

in high heat, direct sunlight or in windy conditions. Please reference the appropriate cure and seal Technical Information Sheet for a full description of the product use, limitations and precautions. Links to these sheets and additional coloring information are available at www.solomoncolors.com.

A. Unless otherwise indicated, control joints to be tooled or sawn shall be scored into the concrete slab every 5 feet (1.50 m) on center maximum. Joint shall be made after concrete is finished and when the surface is stiff enough to support the weight of workmen without damage to the slab, but before slab has achieved its final set.

1. Scoring shall cut into slab surface at least 1 inch, but in no case not less than 25 percent of slab depth.

3.9 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Materials for concrete shall be heated when concrete is mixed, placed, or cured when the mean daily temperature is below 40 degree Fahrenheit or is expected to fall to below 40 degree Fahrenheit within 72 hours, and the concrete after placing shall be protected by covering, heat, or both.

B. Details of handling and protecting of concrete during freezing weather shall be subject to the approval and direction of the Owner’s Representative. Procedures shall be in accordance with provisions of ACI 306R.

3.10 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING

A. Concrete just placed shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun and the forms and reinforcement just prior to placing shall be sprinkled with cold water.

Every effort shall be made to minimize delays which will result in excessive mixing of the concrete after arrival on the job.

B. During periods of excessively hot weather (95 degree Fahrenheit., or above), ingredients in the concrete shall be cooled insofar as possible and cold mixing water shall be used to maintain the temperature of the concrete at permissible levels all in accordance with the provisions of ACI 305R. Any concrete with a temperature above 95 degree Fahrenheit, when ready for placement will not be acceptable, and will be rejected.

C. Temperature records shall be maintained throughout the period of hot weather giving air temperature, general weather conditions (calm, windy, clear, cloudy, and the like.) and relative humidity. Records shall include checks on temperature of concrete as delivered and after placing in forms. Data should be correlated with the progress of the work so that conditions surrounding the construction of any part of the structure can be ascertained.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 11

3.11 SEALING OF JOINTS

A. Where indicated on the Contract Documents, expansion joints in concrete banding and expansion joints in concrete walkways, or up against vertical surfaces such as walls, stairs or ramps, shall be sealed with joint sealant as specified herein and as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.12 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Concrete surfaces shall be protected from traffic or damage until surfaces have hardened sufficiently. If necessary 1/2 inches (12.5 mm), thick plywood sheets shall be used to protect the exposed surface.

B. The Contractor shall provide adequate surveillance for all poured-in-place concrete pavements until concrete has set firmly, to prevent unwarranted markings of the concrete surface. Any unauthorized marking or graffiti in the finished surfaces shall be a cause for rejection by the Owner’s Representative and replacement by the Contractor.

A. The following acceptance standards shall be applied to this Contract. These standards are considered superior to typical industry standards. Any portion of the concrete paving that does not come up to these required acceptance standards shall be removed at the direction of the Owner’s Representative. Saw cut pavement at nearest adjacent tooled joint, remove concrete pavement and discard off site in a legal manner and replace with new concrete pavement meeting the requirements of this Section.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Pavement surfaces shall be free of all cracking.

Pavement surfaces shall not pond water.

Pavement surfaces shall be free of visible high and low spots.

Steel mesh reinforcing shall not penetrate the surfaces or sides of the concrete slab.

Tooled and sawn joints and all expansion joints shall be straight, true, uniform in width and free from twists, bends, kinks and misalignments.

Tooled edges and the associated edging patterns shall be consistent, true, crisp and complete.

Broom finish shall be constant and complete between joints without bare spots, lifts or disconnections in broom pattern.

Pavement shall be free of all graffiti, stains or markings. Pavement shall show no rubbed surfaces indicative of attempts to erase such markings.

Expansion joints and score joints shall be placed as required by the Contract Documents.

10. Concrete surfaces shall be free of all stains, including those created during the course of the construction by the Contractor, caused by natural events, or caused by vandalism.

11. All tooled joints and expansion joints shall be flush.

12. Pours different in color are not acceptable.

13. Pours without expansion joints cast into them are not acceptable.

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 12

14. Pours not conforming to the Contract Documents are not acceptable.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

COLORED CONCRETE PAVING

321316 - 13

SECTION 323100 – ORNAMENTAL METALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2

SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to provide and install:

1. Ornamental metal fence including posts, panels, fence fabric, wood rail, hardware, galvanizing and powder coating, etc.

2. Metal for entry sign tree and city name plate and associated attachment hardware.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following related Work found in other Sections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete

Section 044200 – Exterior Stone Cladding

Section 047200 – Architectural Cast Stone

Section 042200 – Unit Masonry

Section – Electrical

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for:

1. Fence panels and frames.

2. Entry Sign Monument

B. Contractor shall supply a certified letter from the paint manufacturer stating that the supplied paint system is compatible with the galvanized steel surfaces of the metal as described in this Section.

C. List: Submit paint and coating materials list giving the manufacturer's name, product name and product number for each material.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 1

D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s printed product data and specifications, use limitations and recommendations for each material used. Provide certifications that materials and systems comply with specified requirements.

E.

F.

Wood sample for railing.

Timing: Samples of all colors and finishes shall be prepared in advance of requirements so as not to delay work, and shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for approval before any work is commenced. Any work done without such approval shall be redone to the Owner’s Representative's satisfaction, at the Contractor's expense.

G. Initial Color Selection Samples: submit manufacturer’s standard color charts or chips showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each paint system used.

H. Verification Samples: After initial selection of colors from manufacturer’s standard color charts, submit representative sample panels of each paint system color that is to be exposed in the completed work. Show full color ranges and finish variations expected. Define each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.

Resubmit samples until required sheen, color, and texture have been approved.

Provide samples as follows:

I.

1. Provide painted and finished color samples of all items called for under this Section. Samples shall be on separate 8 inch x 10 inch x 18 gauge metal panels for painted metal surfaces. Finished samples may not be part of the finished work. Upon approval, color finished site metal samples shall be the standard of quality for all surface preparation, painting and finishing specified, performed and paid for under this Section.

Entry Sign Tree: Contractor shall provide a sample plot of the tree graphic and

C. city name for approval by the Owner’s Representative prior to cutting the steel.

The graphic will be provided to the contractor by the Owner’s Representative in an electronic format. Provide a sample of the steel to be used for the tree image.

1.5 REFERENCES

A.

B.

ASTM A36 Carbon Structural Steel

ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

Steel

ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot Dip Galvanized) Coatings on

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

Hardware

AAMA 2605 High Performance Organic Coatings

ASTM D3451 Standard Guide for Testing Coating Powders and Powder Coatings

PCI Testing Procedures 1-9.

ASTM D1730 Metal Treatment

ASTM D4585 Humidity Resistance

ASTM D3363 Film Hardness

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 2

P.

Q.

R.

S.

J.

K.

L.

ASTM D3359 Film Adhesion

ASTM D523 - Test Method for Specular Gloss

ASTM D822 - Practice For Conducting Tests On Paint and Related Coatings and

Materials Using Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Light and Water Exposure Apparatus

M. ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Sub-

N.

O. jected to Corrosive Environments

ASTM D7803 Powder Coating Galvanized Steel

ASTM D2794 - Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to The Effects of

Rapid Deformation (Impact)

T.

U.

V.

ASTM D3359 - Test Method for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM B117 - Practice for Operating Salt-Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

ASTM D714 - Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Blistering in Paint.

ASTM D1654 - Test Method for Evaluation of Painted or Coated Specimens Subjected to Corrosive Environments.

ASTM A1064 – Carbon Steel Welded Wire Mesh

ASTM –A588 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural

Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, with Atmospheric Corrosion

Resistance

ASTM F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs

E.

F.

A. The contractor shall provide laborers and supervisors who are thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and materials and techniques specified.

B. The current issue of Standard Code of Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction shall apply to this Section as though written out in full. Welding shall be in accordance with the Structural Welding Code of the American Welding Society.

C. Where structural joints are made by welding, the details of all joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used to correct defective work shall conform to requirements of the

AISC and AWS codes.

D. Welds shall be made only by welders who have previously been qualified by tests as prescribed in AWS "Standard Qualification Procedure" for the type of work required.

All dissimilar metals shall be insulated to prevent bimetallic interaction.

Workmanship and finish of metal components shall be equal to the best practice of modern shops for each item of work. Metal fabrication shall be accomplished using the highest standards of workmanship. All work shall be executed by experienced metal workers, shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and meet the following requirements.

1. Sections shall be well formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles; curved work shall be sprung evenly to curves.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 3

2. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish and sharp, well defined lines and arrises.

3. Grind all edges of bars and plates completely free from nicks and machine marks, prior to shop priming.

4. All surfaces and connections of metal items shall be without visible grinding marks, surface differentiation or variation.

5. All fabricated metal items shall be fine sanded throughout to produce a high standard of surface smoothness.

6. Welding shall be continuous and shall extend for the entire length of the joints except where specifically indicated on the Contract Documents. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth.

7. Weld with uncoated wire to prevent flux deposits. If coated wire is used, all flux residue shall be thoroughly removed and bare white metal exposed, prior to galvanization, if applicable. Where overlapping surfaces are welded, seal off contact area by welding all edges around contact area.

G. Where the Work of this Section must be attached to other materials, or where it must be assembled and installed in the field, Contractor shall cut, drill, punch and ream, countersink and tap, or otherwise provide the required holes in the shop, unless such connections are to be welded. The sizes and locations of all such holes shall be shown on the Shop drawings.

H. Metalwork to be built in with concrete or masonry shall be of the form required for anchorage or shall be provided with suitable anchors or expansion shields.

I. All materials and workmanship under this Section shall be subject to inspection in the mill, shop or field by the Owner's Representative, or by qualified inspectors retained by the Owner. Inspection shall be without expense to the Contractor.

However, such inspection, wherever conducted, shall not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract requirements.

J.

K. Where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any coating material specified, use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in this Section.

L. Include on labels of all containers the manufacturer's name, the product name and number, the color and batch number.

1.08 TESTS

A. An Owner’s Representative will visit the Project site after installation of painted miscellaneous metals items to perform on-site testing of paint finishes. The

Owner’s Representative will perform the following tests:

Paint Material Source: The same coating material manufacturer shall furnish all materials for the complete coating system. Intermixing of materials within and between coating systems will not be permitted. Thinning of paint shall conform to the manufacturer's written instructions.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 4

1.

2.

3.

B. All of the above tests are destructive of the paint finish system. The Contractor shall touch up and repair areas of paint finish damaged by field testing by Owner’s Representative under the work of this Section at no additional cost to the

Owner.

C. In the event that any of the aforementioned tests indicate that the requirements of this Section have not been met as determined by the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor shall perform and provide the following at no additional cost to the

Owner:

1.

Adhesion: ASTM D3359-97, using Permacel 99 tape or equivalent determined by Owner’s Representative. Permacel 99 is manufactured by

Permacel, a Nitto Denko Company, New Brunswick, NJ.

Hardness: ASTM D3363-00 using calibrated drafting leads from 6B to 6H.

Mil thickness: using a Tooke Gauge, a hand-held device that scores the paint finish and provides for a magnified visual inspection of the mil thickness of the coating system.

2.

The Contractor shall select a qualified independent Testing Agency to perform laboratory testing of the paint finish of miscellaneous metal items to verify the testing performed by Owner’s Representative. Owner’s Representative will select no fewer than 3 miscellaneous metal items to be tested by the Testing Agency.

Contractor shall remove selected representative samples from the site and have the samples delivered to the laboratory of the approved Testing

Agency.

3.

4.

On each of the 3 miscellaneous metal items the Testing Agency shall measure adhesion strength, hardness of paint coating, and coating thickness per ASTM standards listed in this Section. Contractor shall pay all costs of the work performed by the Testing Agency and shall have the

Testing Agency submit reports directly to the Owner’s Representative for review, analysis and direction. In the event that any of the tests performed on any of the 3 miscellaneous metal items by the Testing Agency indicates to the Owner’s Representative that the requirements have not been met, the Contractor shall remove all miscellaneous metal items from the site and have said items delivered to an approved paint shop for stripping of the painting finish, new surface preparation, and new paint finishing in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner.

After completion of the re-painting operation, the Contractor shall have all miscellaneous metal items delivered to the Project site and reinstalled in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The Contractor may choose to forgo the laboratory testing procedures describe above and have all miscellaneous metal items removed from the site, stripped, surface prepared and repainted in accordance with the requirements of this Section and delivered to the Project site and reinstalled in accordance with the requirements of this Specification at no additional cost to the Owner.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 5

E.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.

The Owner may employ an independent testing agency to perform tests, evaluations, and certifications of products used. Cooperate and permit samples of materials to be taken as they are used.

Deliver and store work as specified under this Section in a manner to prevent damage to surface finishes of metal items, wracking or stress of components, and to prevent mechanical damage or damage by the elements. All stored materials and items shall be protected from weather, careless handling and vandalism.

B. Items which become rusted or damaged because of non-compliance with these conditions will be rejected and shall be replaced without additional cost to the

Owner.

C. Deliver work to the site in sufficient time to avoid delay in job progress and at such times as to permit proper coordination of the various parts. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling the delivery of all items so as to minimize onsite storage time prior to installation.

D. Deliver bolts and other small items required for erection of work under this Section bundled with their respective items.

E. Touch-up materials brought to the site shall be stored in an approved location in manufacturer's original sealed containers, bearing the manufacturer's standard label, indicating type and color. Materials shall be delivered in sufficient quantities in advance of the time needed in order that work will not be delayed in any way.

F. The tree image for the entry sign shall be delivered from the factory wrapped for protection from scratching or other damage.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. The Work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the Work of other

Sections. Verify dimensions and work of other trades which adjoin materials of this Section before installing items specified.

B. Obtain all necessary templates and patterns required from other trades for proper execution of work of this Section. Furnish to other trades items to be built into work of other Sections. Supervise installation of such built-in work.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. The Contractor shall furnish and deliver standard written manufacturer's guarantee in Owner's name covering all materials and workmanship under this Section

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 6

in addition to, and not in lieu of, guarantee requirements set forth under Division

1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, and other liabilities which the Contractor may have by law or other provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor shall pay for repairs of any damage to any part of the project caused by defects in the work of the miscellaneous metals fabricator and for any repair to the materials or equipment caused by replacement. All repairs are to be done to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Steel material for panels, posts, and other supports for ornamental fence and gate shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36.

B. Steel shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

C.

D.

E.

2.2 POWDER COATING FOR FENCE PANELS, STEEL PLATE, AND MISC. HARDWARE

A. All metal parts of the fence and gate including metal panels, wire mesh, posts, railings, hardware, etc. shall be galvanized and treated in accordance with ASTM

B.

D7803. It shall be powder coated according to AAMA 2605 High Performance

Organic Coatings.

It shall meet the requirements of all other related ASTM, PCI, and other standards listed herein.

Welded Wire Mesh shall meet requirements of ASTM A1064. Wire shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.

Steel panel for tree and city name panel on entry sign shall be laser or water cut from steel plate. All edges shall be smooth. Welds shall be ground smooth. Steel for tree image on sign shall be Cor-Ten steel type B complying with ASTM A588 grade A.

Fasteners and hardware for Cor-Ten steel sign (tree) shall be stainless steel meeting requirements of ASTM F593.

A. Wood rail shall be IPE or Jarrah wood. All wood shall be certified by the Forest

Stewardship Council FSC.

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRIAN RAIL

A. Erect guard railing in straight lines between angle points by skilled mechanics experienced in this type of construction. Erect in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations as approved and with these Specifications.

B. Guard rail layout shall conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Straight runs of fencing shall be straight and true without visible deviation.

C. Wood rails shall form a continuous smooth line parallel with the grade unless otherwise described on the Contract Documents.

D.

E.

All posts shall be plumb and cut to the same height above grade. stains or dirt.

3.2 METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL FIELD MODIFICATIONS

A.

The Contractor shall clean the jobsite of excess materials; post-hole excavations shall be scattered uniformly away from posts. The fence shall be cleaned of any

When cutting/drilling panels or posts adhere to the following steps to seal the exposed steel surfaces; 1) Remove all metal shavings from cut area. 2) Apply zincrich primer to thoroughly cover cut edge and/or drilled hole; let dry. 3) Apply 2 coats of custom finish paint matching fence color. Failure to seal exposed surfaces per steps 1-3 above will negate warranty.

0.3 WELDING

. All welds shall be flush and free of sharp edges, spurs, welding flux, etc., and shall conform to AWS "Code for Welding in Building Construction." All welds shall be coated with cold ZRC galvanizing compound.

A. COR TEN steel, once cut and welded, shall be Class A blast cleaned in accordance to TXDOT Specification Item 441.11(9) “Field Finish Requirements for

Weathering Steel Structures in Unpainted Applications”.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

ORNAMENTAL METAL PEDESTRAIN RAIL

323100 - 8

SECTION 328000 - IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental Work, and construction methods necessary to perform all operations in connection with, and reasonably incidental to, the complete installation of the irrigation system, and guarantee/warranty as shown on the Drawings, the installation details, and as specified herein. Items of work specifically included are:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Procurement of all applicable licenses, permits, and fees including payment of all development, plant investment, or any other fees and permits associated with the purchase and installation of the tap.

Coordination of Utility Locates ("Dig Tess"). Call 1-800-dig-tess.

Excavation, installation, and backfill of tap into municipal water line or non- potable water line.

Excavation, installation, and backfill of water meter and vault.

Provision and connection of electrical power supply to the irrigation control system.

Installation of pumping plant for irrigation system.

Installation of signage for non-potable irrigation system.

Sleeving for irrigation pipe and wire.

B.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of related Work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

Because of the special nature of this Work and desired "trade" familiarity, installation of the sprinkler system shall be made by a Licensed Irrigator. A

TCEQ Licensed Irrigator shall be present at the job site at all times during the installation. It is intended that the cost of all Work, of whatever nature, incidental to the completion of the system as shown, or indicated on the plans, or in these specifications, shall be included in the bid except as specifically stated herein.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Deliver four (4) copies of all submittals to the Owner’s Representative within 10 working days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Provide information in a 3-ring binder with table of contents and index sheet. Provide sections that are indexed for different components and labeled with the specification section number and the name of the component. Submittals must be made for all the components on the material list. Indicate which items are being supplied on the catalog cut sheets when multiple items are shown on one sheet. Submittal package must be complete prior to being reviewed by the Owner’s Representative. Incomplete submittals will be returned without review.

B. Materials List: Include sleeving, pipe, fittings, mainline components, sprinkler and bubbler components, drip irrigation components, control system components, shop drawings, and all other components shown on the Drawings and installation details or described herein. Components such as pipe sealant, wire, wire connectors, ID tags, etc. must be included. Quantities of materials need not be included.

C.

D.

1.

2.

3.

Section 329213 – Seeding

Section 329300 – Planting

Section 329223 – Sodding

Manufacturers' Data: Submit manufacturers' design details, specifications, and operating instructions for equipment shown on the materials list.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings called for in the installation details.

Show products required for proper installation, their relative locations, and critical dimensions. Note modifications to the installation detail.

1.5 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. Work and materials shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the National

Electric Code, the Uniform Plumbing Code as published by the Western

Plumbing Officials Association, and applicable laws and regulations of the governing authorities.

B.

C.

When the Contract Documents call for materials or construction of a better quality or larger size than required by the above-mentioned rules and regulations, provide the quality and size required by the Contract Documents.

If quantities are provided either in these specifications or on the drawings, these quantities are provided for information only. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the actual quantities of all material, equipment, and supplies required by the project and to complete an independent estimate of quantities and wastage.

1.6 DEMOLITION

A. Remove existing sprinklers, valves, automatic controllers, and other irrigation components as indicated. Remove items in a manner that minimizes damage to

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 2

B.

C. the components. Deliver only salvageable items to the City of Cedar Hill. All other items shall be disposed of by the Contractor.

Existing pipelines shall be abandoned in place. If an existing pipeline is encountered during the installation of a new pipeline, a section of the existing pipeline shall be cut and removed. Remove two (2) feet of the existing pipeline on either side of the new pipeline.

Control wires for new installation shall consist of different colors, if old wire is abandoned in place.

1.7 TESTING

A. Notify the Owner's Representative three days in advance of testing.

B. Pipelines jointed with rubber gaskets or threaded connections may be subjected to a pressure test at any time after partial completion of backfill. Pipelines jointed with solvent-welded PVC shall be allowed to cure at least 24 hours before testing.

C.

D.

Subsections of mainline pipe may be tested independently, subject to the review of the Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner's Representative.

Furnish clean, clear water, pumps, labor, fittings, and equipment necessary to conduct tests or retests.

E.

Hydrostatic Pressure Test:

1.

2.

Subject mainline pipe to a hydrostatic pressure equal to the anticipated operating pressure for two hours. Test with mainline components installed and thrust blocks exposed.

Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure. Expose couplings and fittings.

F.

3. Leakage will be detected by visual inspection. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pipe passes test.

Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited. 4.

Hydrostatic Pressure Test (Gasketed Pipe):

1. Close tightly isolation gate valves and sprinkler lateral isolation gate valves on mainline for tests. Backfill to prevent pipe from moving under pressure.

2. Test each section of pipe between isolation gates valves on the mainline pipe separately.

3. Purge all air from the pipeline before test. Attach pressure gauge to pipeline in test section. Attaching pressure gauge immediately

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 3

4.

5.

6. downstream of one sprinkler lateral isolation gate in the test section is acceptable.

Subject mainline pipe to the anticipated operating pressure of 90 PSI for two hours. Observe pressure loss on pressure gauge. If pressure loss is greater than 2 PSI, identify reason for pressure loss. Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, or appurtenance. Repeat the test until the pressure loss is equal to or less than 2 PSI.

Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.

If Hydrostatic Pressure Test cannot be passed, test pipe using

Volumetric Leakage Test.

H.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Activate each remote control valve in sequence from controller or remote.

The Owner's Representative will visually observe operation, water application patterns, and leakage.

Replace any defective remote control valve, solenoid, wiring, or appurtenance to correct operational deficiencies.

Replace, adjust, or relocate water emission devices to correct any operational or coverage deficiencies.

Replace defective pipe, fitting, joint, valve, sprinkler, or appurtenance to correct leakage problems. Cement or caulking to seal leaks is prohibited.

Repeat test(s) until each lateral passes all tests. Repeat tests, replace components, and correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.

Controller to valve wiring OMHS test

1.

2.

Test for leaks to ground per manufacturer's recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines for acceptance.

Replace defective wire, underground splices, or appurtenances. Repeat the test until the manufacturer's guidelines are met.

I.. Control System Grounding

1. Test for proper grounding of control system per manufacturer's recommendations. Test results must meet or exceed manufacturer's guidelines for acceptance.

2. Replace defective wire, grounding rod, or appurtenances. Repeat the test until the manufacturer's guidelines are met.

1.8 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 4

A. The purpose of on-site reviews by the Owner's Representative is to periodically observe the work in progress, the Contractor's interpretation of the construction documents, and to address questions with regard to the installation.

1. Scheduled reviews such as those for irrigation system layout or testing must be scheduled with the Owner's Representative as required by these specifications.

2.

3.

Impromptu reviews may occur at any time during the project.

A review will occur at the completion of the irrigation system installation and Project Record (As-Built) Drawing submittal.

1.9 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT

A. The purpose of this guarantee/warranty is to insure that the Owner receives irrigation materials of prime quality, installed and maintained in a thorough and careful manner.

1.

2.

For a period of one year from commencement of the formal maintenance period, guarantee/warranty irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects. Fill and repair depressions. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by the settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. Repair damage to the premises caused by a defective item. Make repairs within one working days of notification from the Owner's Representative.

Contract documents govern replacements identically as with new work.

Make replacements at no additional cost to the contract price.

3.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

Guarantee/warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the guarantee/warranty period.

2.1 QUALITY

A. Use materials which are new and without flaws or defects of any type, and which are the best of their class and kind.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. Acceptable equipment manufacturers are Rain Bird Rotors and Toro

Sprays or approved equal. Alternative equipment must be approved by the

Engineer prior to bidding. The Contractor is responsible for making any changes to the design to accommodate alternative equipment.

Pipe sizes referenced in the construction documents are minimum sizes, and B.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 5

may be increased at the option of the Contractor.

2.3 IRRIGATION TAP AND WATER METER

A. Provide materials and labor required by local codes for installation of the municipal water tap and associated piping.

B. Provide materials and labor required by local code for installation of the water meter and vault and associated piping.

2.4 SLEEVING

A. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle.

B.

C.

D.

Sleeving material beneath pedestrian pavements shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints.

Sleeving beneath drives and streets shall be PVC Class 200 pipe with solvent welded joints.

Sleeving diameter: equal to twice the diameter of the pipe or wiring bundle.

2.5 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mainline,Lateral Pipe and Fittings:

1. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (herein after referred to as PVC Pipe) shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM Standards as follows:

Schedule 40 NOTE: All mainline piping 3" or larger shall be gasketed.

2 Use solvent weld pipe for mainline pipe with a nominal diameter less than

3-inches or where a pipe connection occurs in a sleeve. Use Schedule 40,

Type 1, PVC solvent (medium) weld fittings conforming to ASTM

Standards D2466 and D1784. Use primer approved by the pipe manufacturer. Solvent cement to conform to ASTM Standard D2564.

3 All PVC fittings shall be Type I, medium weight Schedule 40, as manufactured by LASCO Manufacturing Company, or approved equal.

All Male adaptors connecting 2” valves or larger will use SCH 80

B. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:

1. Copper pipe: Use Type "K" rigid conforming to ASTM Standard B88. Use wrought copper or cast bronze fittings, soldered or threaded per the

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 6

C.

2.

Installation details. Use a 95% tin and 5% antimony lead free solder.

Assemblies calling for threaded pipe connections shall utilize PVC

Schedule 80 nipples and PVC Schedule 80 threaded fittings.

3. Joint sealant: Use nonhardening, nontoxic pipe thread sealant formulated for use on threaded connections and approved by the pipe fitting manufacturer.

Thrust Blocks:

1. Thrust blocks shall be made of 3000 psi 5 sack concrete.

2. Thrust blocks shall be installed on the mainline at all 45 and 90 degree turns and at all “T" joints.

3. NO Cross joints will be allowed. Double "T" joints spaced 10-12” apart will be used in place of cross joints.

4.

5.

6.

Concrete thrust blocks will encase the fitting in all directions above and below the centerline of the pipe.

No. #3 rebar will be placed in the wet concrete with a portion of the rebar exposed. The exposed rebar will form a loop that may be utilized to lift the thrust block in case of maintenance or repair.

The contractor is to wrap the field wires in plastic sheeting to ensure that the field wires do not become embedded in the concrete.

2.6 MAINLINE COMPONENTS

A. Main System Shutoff Valve: as per local practice and in compliance with local code.

B. Backflow Prevention Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Only

Febco or Watts

C.

D.

E.

F.

Master Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details.

Flow Sensor Assembly: as presented in the installation details.

Isolation Ball Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Install a separate valve box over a 3-inch depth of 3/4-inch gravel for each assembly.

Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: double swing joint arrangement as presented in the installation details.

G. Manual Drain Valve Assembly: as presented in the installation details. Install a separate sump consisting of three cubic feet of 3/4-inch gravel for each drain valve.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 7

2.7 SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals: as presented in the installation details. Use wire connectors and waterproofing sealant to join control wires to solenoid valves. All Valve wire shall be identified by numbers, specified by prints, at the valve and the controller. All valves will have ball valves before valve for ease of repair. Valve boxes shall be a minimum of 12” rectangle shape with only one valve per box. Wiring to valve will be 12 gauge with spare wire, of different color, to each valve. Electric Remote Control Valves shall be Rain Bird

PEB

Sprinkler Assembly: as presented in the drawings and installation details. Use the sprinkler manufacturer's pressure compensating screens (Rain Bird) to achieve

30 PSI operating conditions on each sprinkler and to control excessive operating pressures. All rotary sprinklers will be attached to laterals by swing joints only.

Fixed spray will be attached by no less than 12” of poly flex pipe.

Hydrometers: The Hydrometer shall be manufactured by Arad and be distributed by Interspec, LLC.

The Hydrometer shall be a combination electrically activated valve and a flow meter that is capable of installation above or below grade. The valve must be available with a standard 24 VAC or a 12 VDC latching solenoid.

The register will be driven by the impeller through a dry magnetic coupling. The impeller will be the only component in contact with the water. The register will be hermetically sealed with a stainless steel capsule and a hardened plastic lens. The register will include a totalizer to display the measured volume of water as well as a rotating leak detection indicator.

The output will be through a Reed Switch Type Proximity Sensor / dry contact switch. The switch will be enclosed in a vacuum-sealed glass tube that locks with a bayonet fit, into a sealed cavity in the register. The reed switch must be serviceable without the use of any tools, or without requiring any disassembly of the valve.

Spray Heads: The sprinkler shall be a Toro 570 ZXF series spray heads.

Rotary Heads: Large Turf Rotary (1” inlet) sprinkler heads shall be Rain Bird

Falcon 6504 SS. Small Turf Rotary ( ¾’ inlet) sprinler heads Rain Bird PRS (R)

(SS

2.8 CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Irrigation Controller Unit:

1 Lightning protection: Provide 8-foot copper-clad grounding rod at controller location. Use American Wire Gauge No. 8 bare copper wire

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 8

B.

2

3

4

Control Wire:

1. Use American Wire Gauge (AWG) No. 12 solid copper, Type UF or PE cable, UL approved for direct underground burial from the controller unit to each remote control valve.

2. between the controller and grounding rod.

Wire markers: Prenumbered or labeled with indelible nonfading ink, made of permanent, nonfading material.

Irrigation control system is to be IRRInet by

Interspec/Motorola.Controllers are to be either pedestal mount or wall mount based on individual site requirements. Contact Interspec, LLC for specific system requirements and specifications, 940-440-9757

Contractor is responsible to ensure communication from field unit to central controller.

3.

Color: Use white for common ground wire. Use easily distinguished and different colors for other control wires. Spare control wires shall be of a color different from that of the active control wire. Wire color shall be continuous over its entire length. Flow Control and Master Valve will require two yellow and two blue wires along with additional spare wires for both devices. All wiring for Flow Control and Master Valve shall be in conduit with junction boxes every 100 feet.

Splices: Use wire connector with waterproof sealant. Wire connector to be of plastic construction consisting of two (2) pieces, one piece that snaps locks into the other.

4.

5.

6.

Encase wiring not located within 5’ of PVC irrigation pipe in PVC Schedule

40 electrical conduit.

An expansion coil shall be provided in each wire approximately every

100', at every 90 turn, and at all valve connections. ALL wire splices must be properly insulated and waterproofed. ALL splices and connections shall be made using a King Bros. "One Step" connector as noted on plans.

Electric wire used to connect 115 VAC electrical supply to the automatic controller shall be type UF 14/2 gauge. Local and National

Electric Code governing this installation shall apply.

C. Instrumentation:

1. As presented in the drawings and installation details.

2. Rain/Freeze Sensor: Mini-Clik II hard wired to controller as manufactured by Hunter Products, Inc. (Wireless rain/freeze sensors will not be accepted)

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 9

D.

E.

Power Wire:

1. Electric wire from the power source to satellite control unit shall be solid, or stranded copper, Type UF single conductor cable or multi-conductor with ground cable, UL approved for underground burial on conduit.

Power wires shall be black, white, and green in color. Size as presented in the drawings. The Contractor is responsible for verifying that the power wire sizes shown on the drawings are compatible and adequate for the control system being used.

2. Splices: Use 3M DBY connectors.

3. Conduit: PVC Schedule 40.

4. Warning tape: Inert plastic film highly resistant to alkalis, acids, or other destructive chemical components likely to be encountered in soils. Three inches wide, colored yellow, and imprinted with "CAUTION: BURIED

ELECTRIC LINE BELOW."

Existing Control Wire:

1. It is assumed that existing 24 VAC control wire between existing independent controllers and solenoid valves is in workable condition. Any concerns are to be brought to the attention of the Owner prior to installation of the replacement satellite controller.

2.9 OTHER COMPONENTS

A.

B.

Tools and Spare Parts: Provide operating keys, servicing tools, test equipment, spare parts and other items indicated in the General Notes of the drawings.

Other Materials: Provide other materials or equipment shown on the drawings or installation details which are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications.

C.

Contractor responsible for providing owner with 64GB or larger iPad or equivalent upon completion

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTIONS AND REVIEWS

A. Site Inspections:

1. Verify construction site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 10

2. this section. Report irregularities to the Owner's Representative prior to beginning work.

Beginning work of this section implies acceptance of existing conditions.

B . Utility Locates ("Dig Tess"):

1. Arrange for and coordinate with local authorities the location of all underground utilities. Call 1-800-dig-tess.

2. Repair any underground utilities damaged during construction. Make repairs at no additional cost to the contract price.

C. Irrigation System Layout Review: Irrigation system layout review will occur after the staking has been completed. Notify the Owner's Representative one week in advance of review. Modifications will be identified by the Owner's

Representative at this review.

3.2 LAYOUT OF WORK

A.

B.

C.

Stake out the irrigation system. Items staked include: sprinklers, pipe, control valves, manual drains, pumping plant, controller, and isolation valves.

Install all mainline pipe and mainline components inside of project property lines.

Arrange head in such a manner as to avoid overspray onto any park signage or other structures.

3.3 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING

A.

B.

C.

Excavate to permit the pipes to be laid at the intended elevations and to permit work space for installing connections and fittings.

Minimum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade):

1.

2.

14-inch over mainline pipe and over electrical conduit.

1 6 - i n c h o v e r c o n t r o l w i r e .

3. 12-inch over lateral pipe to sprinklers and zone control valves.

Maximum cover (distance from top of pipe or control wire to finish grade) is 24- inches on all pipe, conduit, and wire.

D. Maintain at least 15-feet clearance from the centerline of any tree.

E.. Backfill only after lines have been reviewed and tested.

F. Excavated material is generally satisfactory for backfill. Backfill shall be free from

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 11

G.

I.H.

I.

J. rubbish and stones larger than 2-inches in maximum dimension. Remove material not suitable for backfill. Backfill placed next to pipe shall be free of sharp objects that may damage the pipe. No discarding of unused pipe, fitting pieces of wire or flags in trenches.

Backfill unsleeved pipe and sleeves in either of the following manners:

1. Backfill and puddle the lower half of the trench. Allow to dry 24 hours.

Backfill the remainder of the trench in 6-inch layers. Compact to density of surrounding soil.

2. Backfill the trench by depositing the backfill material equally on both sides of the pipe in 6-inch layers and compacting to the density of surrounding soil.

Enclose pipe and wiring beneath roadways, walks, curbs, etc., in sleeves.

Minimum compaction of backfill for sleeves shall be 95% Standard Proctor

Density, ASTM D698-78. Conduct one compaction test for each sleeved crossing less than 50 feet long. Conduct two compaction tests for each sleeved crossing greater than 50 feet long. Costs for such testing and any necessary retesting shall be borne by the Contractor. Use of water for compaction around sleeves, "puddling", will not be permitted. Submit compaction test results to

Owner’s Representative.

Dress backfilled areas to original grade. Either incorporate excess backfill into existing site grades or dispose of excess backfill off site. Confirm with Owner’s

Representative prior to construction.

Where utilities conflict with irrigation trenching and pipe work, contact the

Owner's Representative for trench depth adjustments.

3.4 IRRIGATION TAP AND WATER METER

A. Install the municipal water tap and associated piping materials in conformance with local regulations.

B. Install the water meter and vault and associated piping in conformance with local regulations.

3.5 SLEEVING AND BORING

A. Install sleeving at a depth that permits the encased pipe or wiring to remain at the specified burial depth.

B.

C.

Extend sleeve ends six inches beyond the edge of the paved surface. Cover pipe ends and mark with stakes. Mark concrete with a chiseled "x" at sleeve end locations.

Bore for sleeves under obstructions that cannot be removed. Employ equipment and methods designed for horizontal boring.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 12

3.6 ASSEMBLING PIPE AND FITTINGS:

A. General:

1. Keep pipe free from dirt and pipe scale. Cut pipe ends square and debur.

Clean pipe ends.

2.

3.

4.

Keep ends of assembled pipe capped. Remove caps only when necessary to continue assembly.

No more than two pipes shall be placed in trench

Trenches may be curved to change direction or avoid obstructions within the limits of the curvature of the pipe. Minimum radius of curvature and offset per 20 foot length of pipe by pipe size are shown in the following table. All curvature results from the bending of the pipe lengths. No deflection will be allowed at a pipe joint.

20' LENGTH

1 1/2" 25' 7'-8"

2" 25' 7'8"

2 1/2"

3"

100'

100'

1'-11"

1'-11"

4" 100' 1'-11"

6" 150' 1'-4"

8" 200' 1'-0"

10" 250' 9"

12" 300' 8"

B. Mainline Pipe and Fittings:

1. pipe.

Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic

2. PVC Rubber-Gasketed Pipe:

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 13

C.

3. a.

PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer(Jim PR-1 Purple Rectorseal Brand) and solvent cement (Pete 602 Clear Medium Body Rectorseal

Brand for SCH 40 6” and smaller SCH 80 1 1/2 “ or smaller, All SCH 40 pipe 6” and larger, SCH 80 pipe 2” and larger will require Homer 828 Gray Heavy body

Rectorseal Brand). Join pipe in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. No Blue Glue Fast drying glue allowed. b.

Use pipe lubricant. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. c.

Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in pipe.

Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.

1.

2.

4. Fittings: The use of cross type fittings is not permitted.

Lateral Pipe and Fittings:

Use only strap-type friction wrenches for threaded plastic pipe.

PVC Solvent Weld Pipe: a. Use primer(Jim PR-1 Purple Rectorseal Brand) and solvent cement (Pete 602 Clear Medium Body Rectorseal

Brand for SCH 40 6” and smaller SCH 80 1 1/2 “ or smaller, All SCH 40 pipe 6” and larger, SCH 80 pipe 2” and larger will require Homer 828 Gray Heavy body

Rectorseal Brand). Join pipe in a manner recommended by the manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. No Blue Glue Fast drying glue allowed. b. c.

Cure for 30 minutes before handling and 24 hours before allowing water in the pipe.

Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.

3. Polyethylene (PE) Pipe: a. Join pipe in the manner recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with accepted industry practices. b. Snake pipe from side to side within the trench.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 14

D. Specialized Pipe and Fittings:

2.

3.. a. b.

Buff surfaces to be joined to a bright finish. Coat with solder flux.

Solder so that a continuous bead shows around the joint circumference.

Flanged connections: Install stainless steel studs and nuts and rubber gaskets per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PVC Threaded Connections: a. Use only factory-formed threads. Field-cut threads are not permitted.

4.. b. c.

Use only non-hardening, nontoxic thread sealant.

All Male adaptor on 2” valves or larger shall be SCH 80 d. When connection is plastic-to-metal, the plastic component shall have male threads SCH 80 and the metal component shall have female threads SCH 80.

Make metal-to-metal, threaded connections with non-hardening, nontoxic pipe sealant applied to the male threads only.

E. THRUST BLOCKING:

1.

2.

Thrust blocks shall be made of 3000 psi 5 sack concrete.

Thrust blocks shall be installed on the mainline at all 45 and 90 degree turns and at all “T" joints.

3. NO Cross joints will be allowed. Double "T" joints spaced 4 - 5' apart will be used in place of cross joints.

4. Concrete thrust blocks will encase the fitting in all directions above the centerline of the pipe.

5. No. #3 rebar will be placed in the wet concrete with a portion of the rebar exposed. The exposed rebar will form a loop that may be utilized to lift the thrust block in case of maintenance or repair.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF MAINLINE COMPONENTS

A. Main System Shut Off Valve: Install where indicated on the drawings.

B. Backflow Prevention Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. Install assembly so that its elevation, orientation, access, and drainage conform to the

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 15

C.

D.

E.

F.

G. manufacturer's recommendations and applicable health codes.

Master Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.

Flow Sensor Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings.

Isolation Gate Valve Assembly:

1.

2.

Install where indicated on the drawings.

Locate at least 12-inches from and align with adjacent walls or edges of paved areas.

Quick Coupling Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings. The

Owner will receive one key for every three Quick couplers installed. All Quick couplers shall be connected to lateral with KBI (Spicket by thread) Swing joints and controlled by a ball valve located 12” before the swing joint.

Manual Drain Valve Assembly: Install where indicated on the drawings and at other low points in the mainline piping.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF SPRINKLER IRRIGATION COMPONENTS

A. Remote Control Valve (RCV) Assembly for Sprinkler Laterals:

1.

2.

3.

3.

4.

Flush mainline before installation of RCV assembly.

Install where indicated on the drawings. Wire connectors and waterproof sealant shall be used to connect control wires to remote control valve wires. Install connectors and sealant per the manufacturer's recommendations.

Install only one RCV to a valve box. Locate valve box at least 12-inches from and align with nearby walls or edges of paved areas. Group RCV assemblies together where practical. Arrange grouped valve boxes in rectangular patterns. Allow at least 12-inches between valve boxes.

Adjust RCV to regulate the downstream operating pressure.

Attach ID tag with controller station number to control wiring.

B. Sprinkler Assembly:

1. Flush lateral pipe before installing sprinkler assembly.

2. Install per the installation details at locations shown on the drawings.

3. Locate rotary sprinklers 6-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 16

C.

4. paved areas.

Locate spray sprinklers 3-inches from adjacent walls, fences, or edges of paved areas.

Install sprinklers perpendicular to the finish grade. 5.

6. Supply appropriate nozzle or adjust arc of coverage of each sprinkler for best performance. Must meet Matched Precipitation rates designed by the manufactures.

7. Adjust the radius of throw of each sprinkler for best performance.

Zone Control Valve Assembly: Install at locations shown on the drawings.

D. Tree Bubbler Assembly:

1. Locate as shown on the drawings and installation details.

2. Flush lateral pipe before installing bubblers assembly.

3.

4.

All bubblers must be located on the high side of tree.

Use tools and techniques recommended by the manufacturer.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Irrigation Controller Unit:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

The location of the controller unit as depicted on the drawings is approximate; Owner's Representative will determine the exact site location during sprinkler layout review.

Lightning protection: Drive 8-foot copper-clad grounding rod into the soil.

If rock prevents driving, bury at least four feet deep. Use one rod for each controller. Connect controller to grounding rod with AWG No. 10 solid conductor copper wire. Secure wire to grounding rod with brass or bronze clamp. Locate the connection in a separate valve box.

Attach wire markers to the ends of control wires inside the controller unit housing. Label wires with the identification number (see drawings) of the remote control valve to which the control wire is connected.

Install combination switch/GFCI outlet inside the controller pedestal or unit housing.

Connect control wires to the corresponding controller terminal.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 17

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Bundle control wires where two or more are in the same trench. Bundle with pipe wrapping tape spaced at 10-foot intervals.

Provide a 24-inch excess length of wire in an 8-inch diameter loop at each 90 degree change of direction, at both ends of sleeves, and at 100- foot intervals along continuous runs of wiring. Do not tie wiring loop. Coil

24-inch length of wire within each remote control valve box.

Install common ground wire and one control wire for each remote control valve. Multiple valves on a single control wire are not permitted.

If a control wire must be spliced, make splice with wire connectors and waterproof sealant, installed per the manufacturer's instructions. Locate splice in a valve box that contains an irrigation valve assembly, or in a separate 12-inch standard valve box. Use same procedure for connection to valves as for in-line splices.

Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and below PVC mainline pipe.

Encase wire not installed with PVC mainline pipe in electrical conduit.

C. Instrumentation:

1.

2.

Install sensors per the installation details and manufacturer's recommendations. Install at locations shown on the drawings.

Install electrical connections between central control unit components and sensors per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Power Wire:

1. Route power wire as directed on plans. Install with a minimum number of field splices. If a power wire must be spliced, make splice with recommended connector, installed per manufacturer's recommendations.

Locate all splices in a separate 12-inch standard junction box. Coil 2 feet of wire in box.

2. All power wire shall be in conduit. The use of a vibratory plow is not permitted.

3. Green wire shall be used as the common ground wire from power source to all satellites.

Carefully backfill around power wire to avoid damage to conduit. 4.

5. Unless noted on plans, install wire parallel with and below mainline pipe.

Install wire in conduit 2-inches below bottom of PVC mainline pipe.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF OTHER COMPONENTS

A. Tools and Spare Parts: Prior to the Review at completion of construction, supply

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 18

to the Owner operating keys, servicing tools, spare parts, test equipment, and any other items indicated in the General Notes on the drawings. installation details that are part of the irrigation system, even though such items may not have been referenced in these specifications.

3.11 PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS

A. The Contractor is responsible for documenting changes to the design. Maintain on-site and separate from documents used for construction, one complete set of contract documents as Project Documents. Keep documents current. Do not permanently cover work until as-built information is recorded.

B. Record pipe and wiring network alterations. Record work that is installed differently than shown on the construction drawings. Record accurate reference dimensions, measured from at least two permanent reference points, of each irrigation system valve, each backflow prevention device, each controller or control unit, each sleeve end, each stub-out for future pipe or wiring connections, and other irrigation components enclosed within a valve box.

C. Turn over the “Record Drawings” to the Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner's

Representative. Completion of the Record Drawings will be a prerequisite for the

Review at the completion of the irrigation system installation.

3.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Upon completion of construction and Review by the Owner's Representative, maintain irrigation system for a duration of one (1) calendar year (including one winterization and one start-up). Make periodic examinations and adjustments to irrigation system components so as to achieve the most desirable application of water.

B. Provide training and familiarization of the irrigation system to the City of Cedar

Hill Parks Department staff.

C. Following completion of the Contractor's maintenance period, the Owner will be responsible for maintaining the system in working order during the remainder of the guarantee/warranty period, for performing necessary minor maintenance, for trimming around sprinklers, for protecting against vandalism, and for preventing damage after the landscape maintenance operation.

A. Upon completion of work, remove from the site all machinery, tools, excess materials, and rubbish. All clean-up will be completed within 72 hours upon approved completion by the Owner.

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 19

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

IRRIGATION 328000- 20

SECTION 329113 - PLANTING SOILS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental work, and construction methods necessary to supply and place planting soils as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified.

Supplying and placement of planting soils shall include, but not be limited to:

1.

2.

3.

Providing new loam obtained from off-site sources.

Sampling and testing of loam borrow.

Modifying, screening, placing, spreading and grading of loam borrow.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

1. Section 329300 – Planting

3.

4.

5.

Section 329213 – Seeding

Section 329223 - Sodding

Section 312313 - Subgrade Preparation

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1.

2.

3. D698-00a - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

4.

D 75 - Practice for Sampling Aggregates

D 422 - Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft using 10-lb Rammer and 18-in. Drop

3

)

D1557 - Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures

A.O.A.C.: Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. B.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. At least 20 days prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall submit to the

Owners Representative samples, certifications, manufacturer's product data and certified test results for materials as specified below for approval. No materials shall be ordered or delivered until the required submittals have been reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject, on or after delivery, any material that does not meet these Specifications.

B. Testing will be at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall deliver all samples to testing laboratories via overnight courier and shall have the testing report sent directly to the Owners Representative. Perform all tests for gradation, organic content, soil chemistry and pH. Testing reports shall include the following tests and recommendations. Contractor shall deliver samples to testing laboratories and shall have the testing report sent directly to the Owner’s Representative from the Soil Laboratory. Testing reports shall include the following tests and recommendations.

1.

2.

3.

Mechanical gradation (sieve analysis) shall be performed and compared to the USDA Soil Classification System. Sieve analysis shall be by combined hydrometer and wet sieving using sodium hexametaphosphate as a dispersant in compliance with ASTM D 422 after destruction of organic matter by H2O2. To facilitate review and approval of sieve analysis, provide a computer generated gradation curve.

Percent of organics shall be determined by the loss on ignition of ovendried samples. Test samples minus #10 material shall be oven-dried to a constant weight at a temperature of 450 degrees Fahrenheit.

Chemical analysis shall be undertaken for Nitrate Nitrogen, Ammonium

Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium, Calcium, Magnesium, extractable

Aluminum, Lead, Zinc, Cadmium, Copper, Soluble Salts, and pH and buffer pH. A Conductivity Meter shall be used to measure Soluble Salts in

1:2 soil/water (v/v).

Except where otherwise noted, nutrient tests shall be for available nutrients.

4. Soil analysis tests shall show recommendations for soil additives to correct soils deficiencies as necessary, and for additives necessary to accomplish the work as specified. a. Peat Moss: Submit a one cubic foot sample and supplier's

5. b. certification of contents.

Limestone: Submit supplier's certification that the limestone being supplied conforms to these Specifications. c. d.

Acidulant: Submit supplier’s certification that the acidulant being supplied conforms to these Specifications.

Fertilizer :

Submit product data of fertilizer and certificates showing composition and analysis. Submit fertilization rates for fertilizer product based upon soil

6. testing, analysis, and recommendations as specified, performed and paid for in this Section, PLANTING SOILS.

Submit the purchasing receipt showing the total quantity purchased for

7. the project prior to installation.

Gypsum: Submit manufacturer's product data and sample.

8. All additives needed to amend a specific soil in order to meet these

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 2

Specifications.

1.6 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor, and any sub-Contractor responsible for the execution of the

Work of this Section, shall review the subgrades and verify that the subgrades have been excavated and prepared as required by this Section prior to proceeding with the spreading of the soil mix.

Carefully review the requirements of this Section to understand the requirements of percolation testing, compaction, and absence of debris of the subgrade prior to spreading of the soil mix.

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. The following size distributions of mineral particles by diameter and sieve size shall apply to the following conventional names of soil types:

Conventional Name

Very coarse sand

Retained on U.S. Sieve No. Diameter (mm)

#18 1 - 2 sand sand

Fine

B.

Very fine sand

Silt

Clay

#270 by hydrometer

0.05 - 0.10

0.002 - 0.05 by hydrometer Less than 0.002

Sandy loams shall conform to USDA Soil Taxonomy definitions and as follows:

Soil material that contains either 20 percent clay or less, and the percentage of silt plus twice the percentage of clay exceeds 30 percent, and 52 percent or more sand; or less than 7 percent clay, less than 50 percent silt, and between 43 percent and 52 percent sand.

1.

2.

Coarse sandy loam: 25 percent or more very coarse and coarse sand and less than 50 percent any other grade of sand.

Sandy loam: 30 percent or more very coarse, coarse and medium sand, but less than 25 percent very coarse sand, and less than 30 percent very

3.

PART 2 MATERIALS fine or fine sand.

Fine sandy loam: 30 percent or more fine sand and less than 30 percent very fine sand or between 15 and 30 percent very coarse, coarse, and medium sand.

2.1 LOAM - GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall provide sufficient loam borrow to complete all loaming operations using this soil mix as required of the Contract Documents, and as specified, provided, installed and paid for under this Section and as directed by the Owner’s Representative. Loam Borrow for the soil mix for all planting, seeding, and sodding shall be imported

from an off-site source and be installed at a min of 3” depth for all sodded or seeded areas. No on-site soils shall be used for fine grading.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 3

2.2 LOAM FOR SOIL MIX

A. The soil mix for planting trees, shrubs, groundcover, and for seeding and sod areas shall be “sandy loam” determined by mechanical analysis (ASTM D 422) and based on the "USDA Classification System" and as defined in this Section.

It shall be of uniform composition, without admixture of subsoil. It shall be free of stones greater than one and one-quarter inches, lumps, plants and their roots, debris and other extraneous matter as determined by the Owner’s

Representative. Planting soil for shrubs, groundcover and perennials shall have the following grain size distribution for material passing the #10 sieve:

Millimeter Percent Passing by Weight

Maximum

1 100

0.5

0.25

87

78

0.10

0.05

0.002

68

55

7

80

67

48

30

22

2

1. Maximum size shall for planting soil mix for trees and shrubs shall be one inch largest dimension and for lawn areas it shall be one quarter inch largest dimension. The maximum retained on the #10 sieve shall be 25% by weight of the total sample.

2.3 SOIL

A. General: Soil additives shall be used to counteract soil deficiencies as recommended by the soils analysis.

B. Acidulant for adjustment of loam pH shall be commercial grade flours of sulfur, ferrous sulfate, or aluminum sulfate that are unadulterated. Acidulants shall be delivered in unopened containers with the name of the manufacturer, material, analysis and net weight appearing on each container.

C. Ground limestone for adjustment of loam pH shall contain not less than 85 percent of total carbonates and shall be ground to such fineness that 40 percent will pass through 100 mesh sieve and 95 percent will pass through a 20 mesh sieve. Contractor shall be aware of loam pH and the amount of lime needed to adjust pH to meet the requirements of the testing lab recommendations.

D. Organic component of the manufactured loam shall be compost and peat moss used in equal proportions. Compost shall be a stable humus-like material produced from the aerobic decomposition of organic residues. The residues, if bio-solids, shall consist of compost meeting MA-DEP Type 1 requirement or approved equal. The residues shall be dark brown or black in color, with no visible free water or dust and no unpleasant odor, meeting the following criteria

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 4

certified by the producer.

E.

1. Carbon-nitrogen ratio

2. Stability CO2 evolution test

Or Dewar self-heating test

Or Woods End Laboratory's

Compost Test Kit

Minimum 10:1 maximum 25:1

<10 mg CO2 - C/g BVS/day

<10 degrees C above room temp.

40 percent minimum dry weight

(Loss

degrees

4. Particle size on Ignition; minus #10 Sieve, 430

C)

90 percent passing 0.5 inch screen, 100 percent passing one screen

5. Inorganic debris

6. pH

7. Soluble Salts

1 percent maximum (dry weight) minimum 5.5 - maximum 8.0

>2 and <4.0 mmhos/cm (ds/m)

8. Density 850-1,050 lb./cy

Peat moss shall be composed of the partly decomposed stems and leaves of any of several species of sphagnum moss. It shall be free from wood, decomposed colloidal residue and other foreign matter. It shall have an acidity range of 3.3 pH to 5.5 pH, as determined in accordance with the methods of testing of A.O.A.C., latest edition. Its water absorbing ability shall be a minimum of 1,100% by weight on an oven-dry basis.

F. Sand, as required for mixing with topsoil to meet Specification requirements shall be uniformly graded coarse sand consisting of clean, inert, rounded grains of quartz or other durable rock and free from loam or clay, surface coatings, mica, other deleterious materials with the following gradation.

Millimeter Percent Passing by Weight

Minimum

5 ------- 100

2

1

0.5

100

86

50

80

58

18

1.

0.25

0.10

0.05

0.002

24

0

0

0

7

10

4.5

0.3

The ratio of the particle size for 70% passing (D70) to the particle size for 20% passing (D20) shall be 4.0 or less. (D70/D20 < 4.0)

G. Bone meal shall be fine ground, steam-cooked, packing house bone with a minimum analysis of 23 percent phosphoric acid and one percent nitrogen.

H. Gypsum

4

·2H shall conform to the following:

Sieve Designation

2

O) shall be agricultural grade, granular form. Gradation

Percent Passing by Weight

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 5

I. Commercial fertilizer shall be a product complying with the State and United

States fertilizer laws. Deliver fertilizer to the site in the original unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis and which shall be furnished to the Owner’s Representative. Fertilizer shall contain not less than the percentages of weight of ingredients as recommended by the soil analysis.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 FILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Subgrade shall be prepared for spreading of loam under Section 312313

Subgrade Preparation.

B. Perform percolation tests on existing subsoils, or placed fill, prior to placing and spreading planting soil mix:

No. 8 (2.36 mm)

No. 16 (1.18 mm)

No. 30 (0.60 mm)

No. 50 (0.30 mm)

No. 100 (0.15 mm)

100

97

82

46

21

1. Perform percolation testing of subsoil in planting pits or placed fills to determine whether or not the subgrade will drain properly. Perform percolation tests as specified in this Section and for each lift of loam borrow.

2. In the event that percolation testing indicates that the subsoil, placed fills has been over compacted and will not drain, the Contractor shall loosen up the top 6 inches of the subgrade to be planted by using a hand shovel and loosen to a density that will percolate as specified under the work of this Section.

B. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and that no further earthwork is required to bring the subgrade to proper elevations.

C. The Contractor shall install planting soil mix in successive horizontal lifts no thicker than 12 inches in one lift in plant bed areas to the desired depth and compaction as described herein. The Contractor shall install the soil at a higher level to anticipate any reduction of soil volume due to compaction, settling, erosion, decomposition, and other similar processes during the warranty period.

D. In addition to the range cited above, compact each lift sufficiently to reduce settling, but not enough to prevent the movement of water and feeder roots

3.2 ACCEPTANCE

A. through the soil. The loam borrow in each lift should feel firm to the foot in all areas and make only slight heel prints.

Confirm that the final grade of the planting soil mix is at the proper finish grade elevations and to the depts. Show on the Contract Documents. Adjust grade or

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 6

depth as required to meet the contours and spot elevations noted on the Plans.

Request the presence of the Owner’s Representative to inspect final grade before planting. Do not proceed with the remaining work of this Contract until the

Owner’s Representative has given his/her written approval of the final grade.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING SOILS 329113 - 7

SECTION 329213 - SEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to complete the seeding of wildflowers which includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Furnishing and applying hydro-mulch seeding.

2. Watering

3.

4.

Site clean up.

Maintenance and guarantee

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. The following items of related work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Section 329113 – Plantings Soils

Section 328000 – Irrigation

Section 029520 – Landscape Maintenance

Section 312313 – Subgrade Preparation

A. Seed: The Owner’s Representative shall be furnished a signed copy of statement from vendor, certifying that each container of seed delivered is labeled in accordance with the Federal Seed Act and is at least equal to requirements previously specified. Seed analysis shall be furnished prior to commencement of planting operations. Each lot of seed may be re-sampled and re-tested in accordance with latest Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act at the discretion of the Owner’s Representative. If these tests reveal the seed to be below the specified pure live seed content, the Contractor shall be required to plant additional seed to compensate for the deficiency at no additional cost to the

Owner. The seed retests will be conducted by the State Seed Laboratory.

Allowance will be made for the actual pure live seed content of the specified grasses in determining the actual planting rate.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 1

B. Make written request for inspection after seeding operations have been completed. Such inspection is for the purpose of establishing the Maintenance

Period. Submit written requests for inspections to the Owner’s Representative at least seven (7) days prior to the inspection date.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish required copies of manufacturer's literature, certifications, or laboratory analytical data for the following items:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Seed Source. (Certification)

Fiber Mulch. (Laboratory Analytical Data)

Tank Mix Fertilizer. (Certification or Laboratory Analytical Data)

Top-dress Fertilizer. (Certification analysis, and proof of purchase)

Erosion Control (sample and manufacturer’s information)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Seed shall be “Native Trail Mix” as supplied by Native American Seed, 3791 N.

US Highway 377, Junction TX. 76849, phone 800.728.4043, www.seedsource.com

. All seed used shall be labeled in accordance with U.S.

Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under the Federal Seed Act.

All seed shall be furnished in sealed standard containers unless exception is granted in writing by the Owner’s Representative. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or in storage will not be acceptable.

Seed mixture shall be fresh, clean, new crop seed. Grass shall be of the previous year's crop and in no case shall the weed seed content exceed 0.25% by weight. The seed shall be furnished and delivered in the proportion specified below in new, clean, sealed and properly labeled containers. The minimum percentage by weight of pure live seed in each lot of seed shall be as follows and seed shall be planted at the rate per acre indicated under pure live seed required per acre.

Native Trail Mix To be installed at a rate of 40lb per acre.

Common Name

Texas Bluebonnet

Greenthread

Indian Blanket

Lanceleaf Coreopsis

Purple Coneflower

Cutleaf Daisy

Pink Evening Primrose

Texas Yellow Star

Scarelt Sage

Huisache Daisy

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 2

B.

Purple Prairie Clover

Indian Paintbrush

Standing Cypress

Bush Sunflower

Golden-Wave

Clasping Coneflower

Lemon Mint

American Basketflower

Black-Eyed Susan

Mexican Hat

Plains Coreopsis

Prairie Coneflower

Maximilian Sunflower

Lazy Daisy

Missouri Primrose

Buffalograss

Blue Grama

Prairie Wildrye

Little Bluestem

Green Sprangletop

Sand Lovegrass

Sideoats Grama

Cane Bluestem

Texas Cupgrass

Virginia Wildrye

White Tridens

Weed seed shall not exceed ten (10%) percent by weight of the total of pure live seed and other material in the mixture. Johnson grass, nut grass, or other noxious weed seed will not be allowed

2.2 FERTILIZER FOR TANK MIX

A. Fertilizer shall be a starter fertilizer as recommended by the seed company the seed is purchased from. The seed shall be uniform in composition, free-flowing, and suitable for application with approved equipment. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in bags or other convenient containers, each fully labeled, conforming to the applicable State fertilizer laws, and bearing the name or trademark and warranty of the producer.

A. Fiber mulch, for use with the hydraulic application of wildflower seed and fertilizer, shall consist of specially prepared mulch. It shall be processed in such a manner that it will not contain germination or growth inhibiting factors. It shall be dyed an appropriate color to allow visual metering of its application. The mulch shall have the property of becoming evenly dispersed and suspended when agitated in water. When sprayed uniformly on the surface of the soil, the fibers shall form a blotter-like groundcover which readily absorbs water and allows infiltration to the underlying soil. Weight specifications from suppliers for

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 3

all applications shall refer only to air dry weight of the fiber, a standard equivalent to eighteen (18%) percent moisture. The mulch material shall be supplied in packages having a gross weight not in excess of 100 pounds and be marked by the manufacturer to show the dry weight content. Suppliers shall be prepared to certify that laboratory and field testing of their product has been accomplished and that it meets all of the foregoing requirements.

2.4 HERBICIDES, CHEMICALS AND INSECTICIDES

A. Provide chemicals and insecticides as needed for fungus or pest control. All chemicals and insecticides shall be approved by the State of Texas Department of Food and Agriculture for the intended uses and application rates.

B. Provide post emergent weed control throughout the maintenance period to ensure a germinated and mown wildflower free of weeds.

2.5 WATER

A. The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish his own supply of water to the site at no extra cost. All work injured or damaged due to the lack of water, or the use of too much water, shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct. Water shall be free from impurities injurious to vegetation. Water shall be free from oil, acid, alkali, salt, and other substances harmful to growth of wildflowers. The water source shall be subject to approval prior to use.

2.6 SLURRY MIX COMPONENTS PER ACRE:

A. The slurry mix shall be composed of:

1. Fiber Mulch 2,000 Pounds

2.

3.

Grass Seed 10 lbs. per acre

Fertilizer Starter Fertilizer – amount recommended by Seed

Supplier

2.7 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Erosion control matting for covering hydromulch areas with slopes steeper than or equal to three to one (3:1) shall be a bonded fiber matrix. The bonded fiber matrix shall be a hydraulically applied product that upon drying shall adhere to the soil in the form of a continuous 100% coverage, biodegradable erosion control blanket. The bonded fiber matrix shall be comprised of long strand wood fibers held together by a bonding agent that, upon drying, becomes insoluble and non-dispersible.

B. The bonded fiber matrix shall meet the following requirements. The binder shall not dissolve or disperse upon re-wetting. The matrix shall have no holes greater than 0.04 inch (1mm) in size. The matrix shall have no gaps between product and soil. The matrix shall have water-holding capacity of 1.2 gallons per pound of matrix (1000g/100g). The matrix shall have no germination or growth inhibiting factors and shall not form a water insensitive crust. The matrix shall be composed of materials that are 100% biodegradable and are beneficial to plant growth.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HYDROMULCH SEEDING ON PREPARED FINISHED GRADE:

A. Bed Preparation: Immediately after the soils have been placed per Section:

329113, Planting Soils, and the finished grades have been approved, begin hydro-seeding operation to reduce excessive weed growth.

B. Special Mulching Equipment and Procedures: Hydraulic equipment used for the application of fertilizer, seed, and slurry of prepared wood fiber mulch shall have a built-in agitation system with an operating capacity sufficient to agitate, suspend, and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to forty (40) pounds of fiber plus a combined total of seventy (70) pounds of fertilizer solids for each one hundred (100) gallons of water. See mix components mix ration herein this

Section. The slurry distribution lines shall be large enough to prevent stoppage.

The discharge line shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic spray nozzles which provide even distribution of the slurry on the slopes to be seeded. The slurry tank shall have a minimum capacity of eight hundred (800) gallons and shall be mounted on a traveling unit which may be either self-propelled or drawn with a separate unit which will place the slurry tank and spray nozzles within sufficient proximity to the areas to be seeded so as to provide uniform distribution without waste. The Owner’s Representative may authorize equipment with smaller tank capacity provided that the equipment has the necessary agitation system and sufficient pump capacity to spray the slurry in a uniform coat.

C. Mixing: Care shall be taken that the slurry preparation takes place on the site of the work. The slurry preparation should begin by adding water to the tank when the engine is at half throttle. When the water level has reached the height of the agitator shaft, good recirculation shall be established and seed shall be added.

Fertilizer shall then be added, followed by wood pulp mulch. The wood pulp mulch shall only be added to the mixture after the seed and when the tank is at least one-third filled with water. The engine throttle shall be opened to full speed when the tank is half filled with water. All the wood pulp mulch shall be added by the time the tank is two-thirds to three-fourths full. Spraying shall commence immediately when the tank is full. The operator shall spry the area with a uniform, visible coat by using the green color of the wood pulp as a guide.

D. Application:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Contractor shall obtain approval of hydro-mulch area preparation form the

Owner’s Representative prior to application.

Operators of hydro-mulching equipment shall be thoroughly experienced in this type of application. Apply specified slurry mix in a motion to form a uniform mat at specified rate.

Keep hydro-mulch within areas designated and keep from contact with other plant material.

Slurry mixture which has not been applied within four (4) hours of mixing shall not be used and shall be removed from the site.

After application, the Contractor shall not operate any equipment over the covered area.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 5

6. Immediately after application, thoroughly wash off any plant material, planting areas, or paved areas not intended to receive slurry mix. Keep

7. all paved and planting areas clean during maintenance operations.

Refer also to the maintenance portion of this Section.

E. Unseeded Areas: If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, unplanted skips, and areas that are noted after hydro-mulching that have been missed, the

Contractor shall be required to seed the unplanted areas with the seed mix that was to have been planted at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Limit of grading and earthwork shall be limit of seeding unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Documents. All wildflower areas disturbed outside the limit of seeding shall be prepared and seeded as specified herein at no additional cost.

G. The season for seeding shall be from April 1 to May 1. No seeing shall be done outside this time period without approval by the Owner’s Representative and recommendation of the seed supplier. The actual planting of seed shall be done, however, only during periods within this season which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and by accepted practice in this locality. To prevent loss of soil via water and wind erosion, and to prevent the flow of sediment, fertilizer, and pesticides onto roadways, sidewalks, and into catch basins, seed loam areas within 5 days of spreading the loam.

H. Seed only when the bed is in a friable condition, not muddy or hard.

3.2 EROSION CONTROL MATTING

A. Erosion control matting of heavy jute mesh shall be installed immediately after hydro-seeding and hydro-mulching in the areas designated on the Contract

Documents, on slopes three to one (3:1) or steeper, within surface drainage swales, and around surface drains. Matting installation shall follow written acceptance of fine grading by Owner’s Representative.

B.

C. Roll out the matting perpendicular to the slope. Do not stretch the fabric. In drainage swales, center the fabric along the flow line. Install the matting in a check slot at the top and bottom of the slope of the area to be covered. Check slots shall be 6 inches deep and 6 inches wide. Fabric shall extend down one wall of the check slot and across the full width of the base. Overlap edges of matting rolls 4 inches minimum and overlap the ends 18 inches at a minimum.

D.

Matting shall be installed perpendicular to slopes, and shall extend at least 3 feet beyond slope crest. Fibers shall be placed in contact with the soil for the entire length of the mat. Provide check slot at top of slope and anchor slot at bottom of slope where indicated.

E.

Install staples in check slots, edges, center and ends of rolls by driving specified steel staples 2 feet on center over the entire area to be covered, except at check slots and ends of rolls, where staples shall be placed 6 inches on center.

Fill check slots with loam and tamp firmly.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 6

F. Following matting installation, roll the entire area with a smooth drum roller weighing between 50 and 75 pounds per linear foot of roller. The finished installation of matting shall be firmly in contact with the soil and provide a smooth, finished appearance free from lumps or depressions.

A.

B.

Maintenance shall begin immediately after any area is seeded and shall continue until final acceptance of the project. Final acceptance will not be given for seeded areas at least until a final mowing has been done in the late fall.

Maintenance shall include re-seeding, mowing, watering, weeding, and fertilizing

Wildflower work maintenance shall also include chemical treatments as required for fungus and/or pest control.

C. During the maintenance period, any decline in the condition of seeded areas shall require immediate action to identify potential problems and to undertake corrective measures.

D. Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment.

1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and arrange for all watering necessary to establish an acceptable wildflower. In the absence of

2. adequate rainfall, watering shall be performed daily, or as often as necessary, to maintain moist soil to a depth of at least 2 inches. At no time shall a tank truck be allowed on the seeded beds.

Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient watering equipment to apply water to the required soil depths each 8-hour period.

E. After seeded areas have germinated, reseed all areas and parts of areas that fail to show a uniform stand of cover. Reseed such areas and parts of areas repeatedly until all areas are covered with a satisfactory growth of wildflowers

/grass with no bare spots showing. Reseeding together with necessary grading, fertilizing, and trimming shall be done at the Contractor’s expense.

Mowing and Edging: F.

1. Following wildflower establishment, as specified in this Section 329213 –

Seeding, wildflower areas shall be mowed once a year at the end of the growing season after the first frost once the wildflowers have frozen and gone dormant. Wildflowers shall not be mowed before then under any circumstances. Failure to comply will result in Contractor reseeding areas at no cost to Owner. They shall be mowed at a height of 4" with a rotary mower. Scheduled cycles shall be included in the detailed maintenance schedule (to be submitted by the Contractor). Mowing wet grass shall be avoided. See Section 29520 – Landscape Maintenance.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 7

2.

3.

At each mowing, all edges of walks, drives, plant beds, and other border conditions shall be edge trimmed by hand or machine to produce straight and uniform edge conditions.

Remove and discard from paved areas only clippings and debris generated by each mowing and edging operation legally off-site. Do not mow grass when wet.

G. Fertilizing: The first application of fertilizer is specified, provided, performed and paid for under the hydro-seeding mix.

3.4 INSPECTIONS:

A.

B.

Make written request for inspection prior to seeding and after areas have been seeded.

Submit requests for inspections to Owner’s Representative at least two (2) days prior to the anticipated inspection date.

A. The seeded areas will be reviewed and accepted by the Owner’s Representative upon Final Completion of the Work, but exclusive of re-application under the

Guarantee Period.

B. Final Acceptance of establishment shall be ninety five (95%) percent uniform coverage of wild flowers. No bare spots of greater than three (3) inches will be accepted.

C. If seeded areas are deficient, the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all seeded areas shall be extended until deficiencies are corrected. Seeded areas to be corrected shall be prepared and re-seeded in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

D. Owner’s Representative's inspection shall determine whether maintenance shall continue in any part.

3.6 CLEAN UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat, and orderly at all times. Keep all paved areas clean during wildflower installation operations. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final

Acceptance to the satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

SEEDING 329213- 8

SECTION 329223 - SODDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this trade.

A. The Work of this item includes all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to install sod.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The Work of this Section includes Work in other Sections:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Section 329113 – Planting Soil

Section 328000 – Irrigation

Section 312313 - Subgrade Preparation

Section 029520 – Landscape Maintenance

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. All delivery receipts and copies of invoices for materials used for this Work shall be subject to verification by the Owner’s Representative.

B. Submit a producer's specification and a quart sample of the compost proposed for the Owner’s Representative's approval

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Sod: Harvesting and planting operations shall be coordinated with not more than forty eight hours elapsing between the harvesting and planting.

B. Fertilizer:

1. Unopened bags labeled with the analysis.

2. Conform to Texas Fertilizer Law.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 1

A. The Contractor who plants the sod is responsible for supervision of his crew, while planting the sod and maintaining the sod until the entire project is accepted by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOD

A. The sod shall be 609 or Stampede Buffalo Grass and shall consist of stolons, leaf blades, rhizomes and roots with a healthy, virile system of dense, thickly matted roots throughout the soil of the sod for a thickness not less than one inch.

Sod shall be alive, healthy and vigorous and shall be free of insects, disease, stones and undesirable foreign materials and grasses. Sod shall have been produced on growing beds of clay or clay-loam topsoil. The sod shall not be harvested or planted when its moisture condition is so excessively wet or dry that its survival will be affected. If sod is stacked, it shall be kept moist and shall be stacked roots-to-roots and grass-to-grass.

B. The sod shall be cut in strips four feet wide, or as called for on plan, to be laid parallel with the contours.

C. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Representative of the suppliers and arrange a site visit for the Owner’s Representative and staff to review and approve the material.

D. Contractor is responsible for any travel costs associated to this site visit if the location is more than 100 miles from the project site.

2.2 FERTILIZER

A. All fertilizer shall be delivered in bags or containers clearly labeled showing the analysis.

B. All fertilizer shall be in acceptable condition for distribution and shall be applied uniformly over the planted area two weeks after sodding.

C. All fertilizer shall have an analysis of 3-1-2 or as recommended for this project location and soils. The fertilizer rate shall be 45 pounds of nitrogen per acre.

2.3 WATER

A. The water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free of industrial wastes or other substances harmful to the germination of the seed or to the growth of the vegetation. The amount of water will vary according to the

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 2

weather variables. Generally, the sod should be soaked one time per day for three weeks or until established. Soaking is mandatory after spreading the fertilizer.

2.4 COMPOST

A. All compost material is to be totally organic and decomposed for at lease nine months. All compost is to be clean and free of fungus, disease, live plants, seed, excessive cotton lint and any harmful chemicals. "New Life Soil Conditioner" or

"Perma Green Compost", as specified below, or an approved equal, shall be used. Raw organics are not acceptable.

B. For soil with an alkaline pH condition: Use "New Life Acid Gro" (acid pH) soil conditioner as produced by Soil Building Systems of Dallas, or an approved equal.

C. For soil with an acidic pH condition: Use "Perma Green Compost" by Texas

Earth Resources, Inc. of Dallas, or "New Life Natural Grower" (ph 8.0 to 9.0) by

Soil Building Systems, Inc., of Dallas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All turf operations are to be executed across the slope, parallel to finished grade contours.

A. Scarify subgrade to a depth of three inches (3”) for new soil required under

Section 329113, Planting Soils.

B. Tillage shall be accomplished to loosen the topsoil, destroy existing vegetation and prepare an acceptable sod bed. All areas shall be tilled with a heavy duty disc or a chisel-type breaking plow with chisels set not more than ten inches apart. Initial tillage shall be done in a crossing pattern for double coverage then followed by a disc harrow. Depth of tillage shall be a minimum of 3 inches. A heavy duty rototiller may be used for areas to be planted with sod.

C. Cleaning: Soil shall be further prepared by the removal of debris, building materials, rubbish, weeds and stones larger than one inch in diameter.

D. Fine Grading: After tillage and cleaning, all areas to be planted shall be top dressed with one-half inch compost and then shall be leveled, fine graded, and dragged with a weighted spike harrow or float drag. The required result shall be the elimination of ruts, depressions, humps and objectionable soil clods. This shall be the final soil preparation step to be completed before planting.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 3

A. Prior to laying the sod, the areas to be sodded shall have planting soil meeting the Specifications of Section 319113 Planting Soils laid and placed in accordance with that Section. The planting soil shall be raked smooth to true grade and moistened to a depth of four inches, but not to the extent causing puddles. The sod shall be laid smoothly, tightly butted edge to edge, and with staggered joints. Contractor shall remove all netting prior to installation. The sod shall be pressed firmly into the sod bed by mechanical roller so as to eliminate all air pockets, provide a true and even surface, and insure knitting without displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas.

Following compaction, compost shall be used to fill all cracks between sods.

Excess compost shall be worked into the grass with suitable equipment and shall be well watered. The quantity of compost shall be such that it will cause no smothering or burning of the grass.

B. Maintenance shall begin immediately after notice of substantial completion.

Following the completion of all lawn construction work, and until final acceptance of the project.

C. Maintenance shall include re-sodding, quarterly mowing, watering, weeding, and fertilizing a second time at the end of the 60 day period. Lawn work maintenance shall also include chemical treatments as required for fungus and/or pest control.

D. During the maintenance period, any decline in the condition of sodded areas shall require immediate action to identify potential problems and to undertake corrective measures.

E. Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment.

F.

1. The Contractor shall provide all labor and arrange for all watering necessary to establish an acceptable lawn. In the absence of adequate rainfall, watering shall be performed daily or as often as necessary to

2. maintain moist soil to a depth of at least 2 inches for seeded. At no time shall a tank truck be allowed on the seeded beds.

Watering shall be done in a manner that will provide uniform coverage, prevent erosion due to application of excessive quantities over small areas, and prevent damage to the finished surface by the watering equipment. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient watering equipment to apply water to the required soil depths each 8-hour period.

Mowing and Edging:

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 4

1.

2.

Following lawn establishment, as specified in this Section, lawn areas shall be mowed once a year at the end of the growing season after the first frost once the grass has gone dormant. It shall be mowed at a height of 3" with a rotary mower. Scheduled cycles shall be included in the detailed maintenance schedule (to be submitted by the Contractor).

Mowing wet grass shall be avoided.

At each mowing, all edges of walks, drives, plant beds and other border conditions shall be edge trimmed by hand or machine to produce straight and uniform edge conditions.

3. Remove and discard from paved areas only clippings and debris generated by each mowing and edging operation legally off-site. Do not mow grass when wet.

G. Fertilizing: The first application of fertilizer shall be as recommended by the Soil

Lab used to test the new planting soil. A second application of fertilizer shall be applied to sodded areas at the end of the one year maintenance period. This application shall be applied quarterly at a rate recommended by the manufacturer per 1,000 square feet.

3.5 INSPECTIONS:

A. Make written request for inspection prior to seeding and after areas have been sodded.

B. Submit requests for inspections to Owner’s Representative at least two (2) days prior to the anticipated inspection date.

A. The sodded areas will be reviewed and accepted by the Owner’s Representative upon Final Completion of the Work, but exclusive of re-application under the

Guarantee Period.

B. Final Acceptance of lawn establishment shall be one hundred percent (100%) percent uniform coverage of grass in excess of one 5" inch height. No bare spots will be accepted. Upon Final Acceptance, the contractor shall begin the one year maintenance. Final acceptance will be given one time for the entire project. The owner will not provide acceptance on various phases of installation.

C. Contractor shall be required to perform a one year warranty and maintenance period following final acceptance. Refer to Section 029520 Landscape

Maintenance for maintenance requirements.

D. If sodded areas are deficient, the Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all sodded areas shall be extended until deficiencies are corrected. Sodded areas to be corrected shall be prepared and re-sodded in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 5

E. Owner’s Representative's inspection shall determine whether maintenance shall continue in any part.

3.7 CLEAN UP

A. Keep all areas of work clean, neat, and orderly at all times. Keep all paved areas clean during lawn installation operations. Clean up and remove all deleterious materials and debris from the entire work area prior to Final Acceptance to the satisfaction of Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

SODDING 329223- 6

SECTION 329300 - PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.

B. Examine all Contract Documents and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the Work of this trade.

1.2 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. The Work of this Section consists of providing all labor, equipment, materials, incidental Work, and construction methods necessary to perform all planting Work and related items as indicated on the Contract Documents and as specified in this Section and includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Planting trees, shrubs, and ground cover

3.

4.

A one year guarantee period for all plants.

Providing and placing planting soil mix.

1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. The following items of related Work are specified and included in other Sections of the Specifications:

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. The following standards shall apply to the Work of this Section.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Section 329113 – Planting Soils

Section 328000 – Irrigation

Section 312313 – Subgrade Preparation

Section 029520 – Landscape Maintenance

Hortus III, 1976, L. H. Bailey Hortorium.

Tree and Shrub Transplanting Manual, E.B. Himelick, 1991, International

Society of Arboriculture.

American National Standards Institute (ANSI): Z60.1 Nursery Stock

American Standard for Nursery Stock, latest edition, published by

American Association of Nurserymen, (AAN).

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 1

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. At least 30 days prior to the first day of the planting season described in this

Section: PLANTING, submit to the Owner’s Representative proof of certification of Foreman or Crew Leader as Certified Landscape Professional or Certified

Horticulturist.

B. At least 30 days prior to ordering materials, the Contractor shall submit to the

Owner’s Representative, samples, certifications, manufacturer's product data and certified test results for materials as specified below. No materials shall be ordered or delivered until the required submittals have been reviewed and approved by the Owner’s Representative. Delivered materials shall closely match the approved samples. Approval shall not constitute final acceptance. The

Owner’s Representative reserves the right to reject, on or after delivery, any material which does not meet these Specifications.

C. Material Sampling and Testing:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Planting Mulch: Submit a one cubic foot sample.

Antidesiccant: Submit manufacturer's product data.

Peat: Submit a one cubic foot sample and manufacturer's certification of contents.

Mycorrhizal Fungal Inoculant: a. Submit manufacturer's product data certifying that inoculant being b. c. supplied conforms to these Specifications.

Submit the purchasing receipt showing the total quantity purchased for the Project prior to installation.

Submit empty packets of fungal spore inoculant to the Owner’s

Representative for verification of use.

D. Underdrains: Submit Manufacturer’s product data for the following:

2. Connections necessary to connect the drain system to the City storm drain system.

3. All caps and covers.

4. Filter

5. Sand layer sieve size.

1.6 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS

A. All areas to be planted shall be inspected by the Contractor before starting Work and any defects such as incorrect grading or inadequate drainage shall be reported to the Owner’s Representative prior to beginning this Work.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for judging the full extent of Work requirements involved, including but not limited to the potential need for storing

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 2

C. and maintaining plants temporarily and/or re-handling plants prior to final installation.

All plants are the full responsibility of the Contractor between the time of digging at the nursery and final acceptance.

A. Qualification of Landscape Contractor: The Work of this Section: PLANTING, shall be performed by a landscape contracting firm which has successfully installed Work of a similar quality, schedule requirement, and construction detailing with a minimum of five years experience. Proof of this experience shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative.

B.

C.

D.

Pest Control Applicator: Texas-Licensed landscape pest control applicator.

Comply with American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature

"Standardized Plant Names", American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.

American Standard for Nursery Stock.

E. Provide plant material as shown on Contract Documents. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by Owner’s Representative at place of growth or upon delivery to site for conformity to specified requirements.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Preparation for Delivery: A.

1.

2.

Pack plant material to protect against climatic, seasonal, and breakage injuries during transit.

Securely cover plant tops with tarpaulin or canvas to minimize windwhipping and drying. Use antidesiccant upon approval of Owner’s

3.

Representative.

Pack and ventilate to prevent sweating of plants during transit by rail.

Ensure prompt delivery and careful handling to point of delivery at planting job site.

B. Delivery:

Qualification of Arborist: All Work of pruning shall be performed by an arborist certified by the American Arborist Association or the International Society of

Arboriculture and be licensed in Texas.

1.

2.

Fertilizer and Soil Amendments: Original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark and conformance to State law.

Plants: Provide legible identification labels. Minimum one plant of each species delivered to site shall have identification tag. Do not remove tag until after final inspection. a. Prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves. b. Notify Owner’s Representative 10 days in advance of delivery.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 3

3. Soil Supplements: Original, unopened and unbroken packages.

C. Inspect trees, shrubs, and ground cover plants for injury, insect infestation, and trees and shrubs for improper size and shape.

D. Storage:

1.

2.

3.

Protect roots of plant material from drying or other possible injury with soil or acceptable material.

Store plant material in area which is shaded and protected from weather.

Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted immediately upon delivery in healthy, vigorous condition.

E. Handling:

1.

2.

Do not drop plants.

Do not pick up container or balled plants by stem or trunks.

3. Lift and handle balled plants from bottom of ball.

REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F

(2 degrees C) or rise above 95 degrees F (32 degrees C).

B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph (48 k/hr).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall maintain all landscape areas in a healthy, vigorous, and attractive growing condition for a period of one year after Final Acceptance.

B. Warrant plant materials to be in healthy, vigorous, and attractive growing condition for period of 2 years after Final Acceptance.

C. Replace plants which die, become diseased or unhealthy, or are otherwise found to be in poor condition, as determined by Owner’s Representative.

D. After final acceptance the warranty will not apply to damage or injury to plant materials caused by vandalism, vehicles, and storms.

E. Replace plants within 15 days of written notification by Owner’s Representative or Owner.

A. Contractor shall pay for all expenses related to the tagging of trees at the nursery.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 4

2.1 PLANTING SOIL MIX

A. Planting soil mix shall be specified, provided, installed, and paid for under

Section 329113 – Planting Soils.

B. The planting soil mix shall be an approved loam borrow which has been pH adjusted according to particular planting applications and improved through the addition of organic matter as directed below. Planting loam shall conform to the following pH levels:

C.

1.

2.

Planting soil mix for general planting of non-acid loving plants shall have a true pH value of 6.0 to 6.5. Planting soil mix shall be amended by the

Contractor at his own expense to the proper pH range by mixing with dolomitic limestone as specified, provided, installed and paid for under

Section: Planting Soils.

The amount of either sulfur or limestone required to adjust the planting soil mix to the proper pH range shall be approved by the Owner’s

Representative on the basis of soil tests as specified, provided, installed and paid for under the Section: Planting Soils.

A.

2.3 GRADES AND STANDARDS OF PLANTS

Soil additives to amend soil shall be specified, provided, installed and paid for under Section: Planting Soils.

A. The Contractor shall furnish all plants shown on the Contract Documents, as specified, and in quantities listed on the PLANT LIST. No substitutions will be permitted, without written approval by the Owner’s Representative. All plants shall be nursery grown unless specifically authorized to be collected as noted on the PLANT LIST.

B.

3. Planting soil mix for use in groundcover, perennial, and bulb planting shall consist of pH adjusted loam which has been thoroughly premixed with organic material in the proportions of one part organic matter (humus or peat), with 5 parts of approved loam. Organic material shall be specified,

4. provided, installed and paid for under Section: Planting Soils.

Presence of vegetative parts of Bermuda grass, Johnson grass, nut grass

(Cyperus rotundus), and other hard to eradicate weeds or grass, will be cause for rejection of the topsoil.

ADDITIVES

All plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have a normal habit of growth and be legibly tagged with the proper name. Only plant stock grown within Hardiness Zones 1 through 7b, as established by the USDA Plant

Hardiness Zone Map, latest edition, will be accepted.

Plants shall be in accordance with ASNS Standards of the American Association of Nurserymen except as noted in this Section. Botanical plant names shall be in accordance with plant designations included in Hortus III.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 5

D. If, at any time during the performance of the Contract, any plant shows signs of graft incompatibility, as determined by the Owner’s Representative, then the tree or shrub and all other similarly grafted plants of the same Genus/Species/Variety shall be rejected and removed from the site. Visual symptoms of graft incompatibility as cause for rejection include:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Development of over-growths by rootstock or scion resulting in the development of shoulders or inverted shoulders.

Suckering of the rootstock combined with poor growth or dieback of scion.

Any mechanical weakness between scion and rootstock.

Any marked difference in bark pattern and structure between scion and rootstock.

Size and shape of plants shall correspond with that normally expected for species and variety of commercially available nursery stock or as shown on Drawings. Overall shape and minimum acceptable size of plants measured before pruning with branches in normal position shall conform with AAN standards. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with approval of Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost to Owner.

If use of larger plants is approved, ball of earth or spread of roots for each plant will be increased proportionately.

Plant material shall be true to botanical and common name and variety.

E. All deciduous trees shall meet the following standards:

1.

2.

3.

Trees shall have a single, straight trunk, well formed, and sturdy. No part of the trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal trees of the same variety. Root systems shall be vigorous and fibrous, and not root or pot-bound.

Trees with multiple leaders shall conform to all standards noted in this

Section for single leader trees and shall be accepted only as noted on the

PLANT LIST.

All pruning wounds shall show vigorous bark on all edges at the time of harvest. Trees shall be free from all signs of pest and disease damage.

The trunk shall be free from sun scald, frost cracks, and wounds resulting

4.

5.

6. from abrasions, fire, animal damage, or other causes.

Pruning scars within the crown of any tree shall be clean cut and shall leave no protrusion beyond the branch collar.

All trees shall have healthy, vigorous leaves or needles of normal size, color, shape, and texture for the particular species and variety.

Deciduous shade trees and deciduous flowering trees shall have fall color typical for their species and variety.

7. Unless otherwise indicated on the PLANT LIST, the height and spread of deciduous shade trees shall be the minimum requirements.

8. Take caliper measurements for deciduous trees 6 inches above ground level up to, and including, 4 inches caliper size and 12 inches above ground for larger sizes.

9. No deciduous tree shall be pruned after the Owner’s Representative has tagged the plant in the nursery except as directed by the Owner’s

Representative.

10. Unless otherwise noted on the PLANT LIST, shade trees for use in paved areas shall have no branches lower than 6.5 feet from finish grade and no

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 6

higher than 7.5 feet from finish grade. Flowering trees for use in areas away from pedestrian traffic shall have the first branch of their crowns no higher than 4 feet from finish grade.

11. Branching of all deciduous trees shall be best quality representatives of the species, cultivar or variety with lateral branching around the entire trunk to form a symmetrical tree for 80 percent to 100 percent of the tree's outer perimeter. All branches on deciduous trees shall meet the trunk at angles no less than 30 degrees and no greater than 90 degrees from the vertical.

12. All trees shall be container grown. Ball and Burlap not permitted.

Evergreen trees shall meet the following standards: F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

The height of the evergreen trees (measured from the trunk flair at the natural ground line of the tree to the midpoint of the terminal leader) shall be not less than the minimum size designated on the PLANT LIST.

No trees with double-leaders or twin-heads will be permitted.

Evergreen trees shall be of specified height with spread in proportion to height, as designated in ASNS Standards, and shall be well-branched to the ground.

All pruning wounds shall show vigorous bark on all edges at the time of harvest.

Terminal and top whorl buds of all evergreen trees shall be in healthy and whole condition at the time of harvest.

No evergreen tree shall be pruned after the Owner’s Representative has tagged the tree in the nursery except as directed by the Owner’s

Representative.

All trees shall have healthy, vigorous leaves or needles of normal size, color, shape, and texture for the particular species and variety.

All trees shall be container grown. Ball and Burlap not permitted.

G. All shrubs shall meet the following standards:

1. All shrubs shall be healthy and vigorous plants which are very well shaped, heavily branched, densely foliated, and true to form for the variety.

2. Canes or Trunk(s) and Branches: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING

Well formed and sturdy.

Branching shall be uniformly distributed close to the ground.

Scars shall be free of rot and not exceed 1/4 the diameter of the wood beneath in greatest dimension unless completely healed

(except pruning scars).

Pruning scars shall be clean cut and shall leave little or no protrusion from the trunk or branch.

Graft unions shall be completely healed.

No suckers or water sprouts.

Contain no dead wood.

Free of cracks, splits, or cambium peeling.

329300- 7

3.

4.

No shrub with pest or mechanical damage will be accepted.

Shrubs shall show no signs of frost or winter damage to the foliage.

Foliage shall not be in a state of drought stress. Leaves or needles shall show no signs of wilt or desiccation due to weather stress at any season of the year.

H. All ground cover plants and vines shall meet the following standards:

B.

1. Ground cover plants and vines shall be of size, pot size, age, and condition listed in the PLANT LIST. When indicated on the PLANT LIST, the number of runners and the lengths of the runners of vines shall be minimums.

2. Plants shall be healthy, free of insects, and diseases.

2.4 ROOT SYSTEMS FOR ALL PLANTS

A. Each plant shall have an extensive, symmetrically balanced fibrous root system.

Any root ball which shows signs of asymmetry, girdling, injury, or damage to the root system shall be rejected.

Curling or spiraling of the roots along the walls of rigid containers will not be accepted. Curling, spiraling or girdling roots within balled and burlapped material will not be accepted.

C. All parts of the fibrous root system of all plants shall be moist and fresh with a white color when washed of soil. When the plant is removed from the container, the visible root mass shall be healthy with white root tips. The root systems of all plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae.

D.

E.

F.

No plants shall be loose in the container.

2.5 MYCORRHIZAL FUNGAL INOCULANT

A.

Container grown plants which have roots growing out of the container will be rejected.

Mycorrhizal fungal inoculant shall be live spores packaged in plastic packets. At a minimum each packet of inoculant shall contain the following:

The diameter and depth of the balls of earth must encompass the fibrous and root feeding system necessary for the healthy recovery of the plant. Minimum root ball diameters and depths shall be in accordance with ASNS standards.

1.

2.

Live spores of VA Endomycorrhizal fungi: Vesicular-Arbuscular mycorrihizae fungi, minimum of 8 species.

Live spores of Ectomycorrhizal fungi: including Pisolithus tinctorius.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 8

B.

2.6 MULCH

A.

Mycorrhizal fungal inoculant shall be manufactured by Plant Health Care

Incorporated, 440 William Pitt Way, Pittsburgh, PA 15238, telephone : (800) 421-

9051; Horticultural Alliance, 2946 Louise Street, Sarasota, FL 34237, (800) 628-

6373; BioPlex Organics, 2213 Huber Drive, Manheim, PA 17545 (800) 441-3573, or approved equal.

Mulch shall be high quality, double-ground, premium hardwood mulch. It shall not be dyed red or black, but shall be a natural brown color. Mulch shall have been aged for a minimum of six months and not longer than two years. Mulch shall be shredded to a uniform size; free of dirt, debris and foreign matter; with pieces no thicker than 1/4 in. Mulch must be free of stringy material or chunks over 3 inches in size and shall not contain, in the judgment of the Owner’s

Representative, an excess of fine particles. Submit sample for the Owner’s

Representative's approval.

B. Geotextile fabric for weed control, if called for on the Contract Documents, shall be of woven, non-woven, spun-bonded, or needle-punched construction; composed of polyethylene, polypropylene, or polyester materials.

1.

2.

Geotextile fabric shall have porosity of not greater than 5 percent open.

Geotextile shall be Weed-X by Dalen Products, Knoxville, TN; DeWitt Pro

5 by the DeWitt Company, Sikeston, MO; or approved equal.

A. Tree rings to support the trees shall be as manufactured by Tree Stake

Solutions, Richmond TX, 77406, phone 281.723.9081, www.treestakesolutions.com.

2.8 UNDERDRAIN PIPE MATERIALS

A. Underdrain system shall be Mutli-Flow Drainage Systems as manufactured by

Varicore Technologies, Inc. P.O. Box 131, Prinsburg, MN 56281, Phone 800-

978-8007, or an approved equal.

B. The underdrain conduit shall be 18 inch flexible, prefabricated, rounded rectangular shaped, composite product. The drain conduit shall be wrapped with a non-woven geotextile. This non-woven wrap shall be of a needle-punched construction consisting of long-chain polymeric fibers composed of polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide. The fibers shall be oriented into a multi-directional stable network whereby they retain their positions relative with each other and allow the passage of water as specified. The fabric shall be free of any chemical treatment or coating, which reduces permeability and shall be inert to chemicals commonly found in soil.

C. The drainage core shall be made of a high-density polyethylene. The core shall be constructed using interconnected corrugated pipes that define and provide the flow channels and structural integrity of the drain. The geotextile shall function

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 9

D. The fittings used with the edge drain shall be of a snap together design. In no case shall any drainage product be joined without the use of the Manufacturers connector designed specifically for the purpose.

E. only as a filter Pipe for edge drain outlet laterals shall be either PVC pipe meeting the requirements of ASTM D 2729 or ASTM F 949, or high-density polyethylene pipe meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 252.

A rodent screen made of 0.3 inch by 0.3 inch square opening size, 0.063 inch gauge, stainless steel or galvanized, welded wire mesh shall be installed in each outlet lateral line. When using galvanized welded wire mesh, the rodent screen shall be galvanized after it has been formed to the shape and dimensions shown on the Construction Documents or specified by the City’s Representative.

F. Underdrain Outlet Protectors:

1. Concrete shall be 3000 p.s.i.

2. In lieu of constructing underdrain outlet protectors in place, the Contractor may use precast units that comply with the applicable requirements of the

Manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Sand Drainage Layer: Sand layer to cover the underdrainage pipe in the trench shall be hard, clean, durable sand compatible for use as a drainage material. The particle size shall be defined as less than 5 percent retained on a No. 10 screen, and less than 5 percent passing through a No. 30 screen. No more than 1 percent shall pass a No. 50 screen.

H. Filter Fabric: The filter fabric shall be used to separate the sand blanked from the backfill or topsoil on all sides. The fabric shall be AMOCO 4545 or approved equivalent.

A. Bed edging shall be 300 p.s.i. concrete meeting the requirements of TXDOT

Standard Specifications.

2.10 WATER

A. The Contractor shall responsible to furnish his own supply of water to the site at not additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall be responsible to furnish adequate supplies at his own cost.

2.11 ANTIDESICCANTS

A. Antidesiccants shall be emulsions or other materials which will provide a protective film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration and specifically manufactured for that purpose. Manufacturer of antidesiccant shall be subject to the Owner’s Representative's approval and shall be used only after approval by the Owner’s Representative. Antidesiccant shall be delivered in

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 10

containers of the manufacturer and shall be mixed and applied according to the

Manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERCOLATION TESTING FOR TREE PITS

A. Prior to planting or spreading of loam, the Contractor shall dig percolation test holes every 100 feet on both sides of the roadway within the right-of-way. The center island median is not included. The holes shall be approximately 2 feet deep. Each hole shall be filled with water and allowed to sit for 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hours refill each hole with water and monitor them as to how far the water recedes per inch per hour. Monitor them for the first 12 hours after refilling them. The holes shall be recorded on a plan showing location and the amount they are draining per hour. Any test hole that doesn’t drain at least 4 inches per hour shall be noted and reported to the Owner’s Representative to determine if the

Owner wants to install underdrains in that location, or move the proposed planting to a different location. Moving plants to a different location will not be a cause to increase the contract value. If additional underdrainage is desired by the Owner,

3.2 PLANTING

A. then the Contractor can submit a request for a change order. No planting of trees shall occur until this testing has been done and approved by the Owner’s

Representative.

Furnishing and planting of plant material shall include, but shall not be limited to, the digging of planting pits and plant beds, amendment of loam as required to produce planting soil mix, provision of soil additives required to adjust for pH requirements of specific plants, furnishing the plants as specified as well as the labor of planting, fertilizing, and maintenance.

B. The Contractor shall locate plant material sources and ensure that plants are shipped in timely fashion for installation.

C. Contractor shall locate all existing underground utilities that are within 10 feet of the proposed planting pits and notify the Owner’s Representative of any conflicts prior to digging plant pits.

D. Seasons for Planting:

1.

2.

Spring: March 15 through June 15

Fall: September 1 through November 1

E. Plant Material Inspection:

1. At least one month prior to the expected planting date, the Contractor shall request that the Owner’s Representative provide a representative to select and tag stock to be planted under this Section: PLANTING. The

Contractor shall pay for the transportation, subsistence and overnight accommodations, if necessary, for the Owner’s Representative's

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 11

2.

3.

4.

5.

6. representative during the period of time required to select and tag the plant material.

The Contractor shall be responsible to certify the availability of quality plants in specified sizes from his/her sources of supply prior to requesting that the Owner’s Representative make plant source inspections. In the event that plants at the inspection location are found to be unavailable, insufficient size, or of unacceptable quality, the Contractor shall be liable to reimburse the Owner for all costs of the Owner’s Representative's hourly services which are incurred during unproductive inspection trips.

Unless specifically designated otherwise, a representative of the

Contractor shall accompany the Owner’s Representative on all plant material selection field trips.

All trees for the Project shall be individually tagged for approval with the

Owner’s Representative's seals, and no trees shall be accepted for delivery to the site without such seals. Representative samples only of shrubs and ground cover plants may be tagged or marked for approval as an "Approved Typical Sample" and shipped to the site. Any shrub or groundcover plant that arrives at the construction site that does not meet the Approved Typical Sample will be rejected by the Owner’s

Representative.

Plants to be inspected shall be in locations and conditions that allow direct and un-obscured inspection by the Owner’s Representative.

Container grown or balled and burlapped shrubs shall be pulled from holding blocks by the nurseryman for scrutiny by the Owner’s

Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. Trees held in storage shall not have branches tied up. Trees shall not have trunks obscured by burlap, cardboard trunk protection, or other devices that would otherwise obscure inspection. In the event that branches are tied up, trunks are obscured by burlap or cardboard trunk protection, or the Owner’s

Representative cannot inspect root flares, trunks or branching habit, the

Contractor shall bear all responsibility and costs associated with tree rejection at a later date during the course of the Contract.

Inspection and approval of plants at the source shall not impair the right of subsequent inspection and rejection upon delivery to the site, or during the progress of the Work, if the Owner’s Representative finds that plants do not meet the requirements of the PLANT LIST or this Contract, have declined noticeably due to handling abuse, lack of maintenance, or other causes. Cost of replacements, as required, shall be borne by the

Contractor.

F. Placement of Loam for planting soil shall be specified, performed, and paid for under the Work of Section, Planting Soils. Obtain Owner’s Representatives written approval of Work of rough grading and finish grading prior to starting the

Work of planting.

G. Planting:

1. Notify the Owner’s Representative three Working days prior to the proposed arrival of plant material on the site. If not planted within 24 hours of delivery to the site, all plants shall be maintained in an on-site nursery. Container grown shrubs stored on site shall be shaded from direct sunlight at all times and shall not be stored directly on paved

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 12

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8. surfaces. All plants delivered to the site and not planted within 24 hours of delivery shall have their root balls covered with mulch and shall be watered on a daily basis such that root balls are kept moist throughout.

Locations for all plants and outlines for planting areas shall be staked on the ground by the Contractor for approval by the Owner’s Representative before any plant pits or plant beds are dug. Notify the Owner’s

Representative no less than 3 days prior to the desired date of inspection of staking to schedule site visit.

All plant pits dug with a machine shall have the sides of the holes scraped with hand shovels to prevent glazing or compaction of the sides of the hole. Remove and stockpile excavated loam for reuse as backfill for plant pit. All subsoil excavated from the bottoms of planting pits shall be removed from the site.

All plant pits shall be hand dug. All subsoil excavated from the bottoms of planting pits shall be removed from the site.

Plant pits shall be dug to the dimensions shown on the Contract

Documents . a. Plant pits for trees shall be a minimum three times greater in diameter than the diameter of the root ball. Place root ball directly on subgrade. Slope sides of tree pits at a 45 degree angle. Trees b. c. d. to be planted in treeways, as shown on the Contract Documents, shall be planted in structural soil as specified in Section: Structural

Soil.

Plant beds for shrub massing shall be one large and continuous excavated bed. Extend bed no less than 3 feet beyond limits of shrub root balls on perimeter of bed.

Plant pits for trees and shrubs shall be dug to the depth of the rootball to be planted.

Remove all soil from around the root flare of the stem of the plant and from the top of the rootball to determine the true depth of the rootball. All plants that have been planted and have root flares that are buried will be rejected.

Groundcover, Bulb, and Perennial Beds: a. Groundcover, bulb and perennial beds shall be dug to a continuous depth of 1 foot below final grade, or as shown on the

Contract Documents and replace with sufficient planting soil mix.

Remove groundcover and perennials from their pots immediately before planting. Handle plants carefully to prevent damaging roots. Place each plant in individual hole and firm the planting mix around the roots. Water thoroughly and mulch. Groundcover b. plants may be planted after the planting mulch is placed.

Bulbs shall be planted at depths as recommended by bulb supplier, as shown on the Contract Documents, or both. Bone meal shall be applied at the rate of 1/2 pound to every 25 square feet of area of bulbs. Bulbs shall have bone meal added as they are planted.

All plant roots and earth balls must be damp and thoroughly protected from sun and wind from the beginning of the digging operation, during transportation, and at the site until the final planting.

Remove container plants from containers prior to planting.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 13

H.

9. Trees and shrubs shall be placed in the center of plant pits, plumb, with the crown of their roots exposed and located above the surrounding finish grade.

10. Prior to completion of planting installations, remove rope and cut wire baskets from the top 1/3 of the root balls. Pull burlap away from the trunk or stem of the plant and cut burlap from the top 1/3 of the root balls.

11. Contractor shall 'butterfly' the root system for all container grown perennials immediately prior to planting them. Butterflying shall consist of vertically cutting the containerized root ball with a spade through the bottom half of the rootball followed by gently pulling the rootball open at the cut while placing it into the planting hole. The butterflied root system shall be placed over a small ridge of soil in the planting pit in order to assure as much soil to root ball contact as possible and to keep the halves apart.

12. Planting soil shall be backfilled with approved planting soil to the full depth of the planting pit or bed. Eliminate air pockets and compact the soil by flooding the tree pit or plant bed within 2 hours of planting installation. After water has drained from the planting pit or bed and planting backfill has dried enough additional planting soil shall be spread in pit or bed to bring the finished surface of the planting pit or bed to grades shown on the Contract Documents. A saucer shall be formed around each plant at a depth of 3 inches for trees and for shrubs.

13. Fertilizer shall be spread over the plant saucer or plant bed between the saucer and the edge of the rootball and till the fertilizer into the soil to a depth of four inches prior to the placement of the planting mulch. Fertilizer shall be provided, spread and paid for under Section, Planting Soils. Do not mulch until placement of the fertilizer has been verified by the

Owner’s Representative. Fertilizer application rates shall be as determined by soil testing, analysis, and testing laboratory recommendations specified, performed and paid for under Section:

Planting Soils.

14. All plants shall be inoculated with mycorrhizal fungi. Inoculant shall be added after the plants have been placed in their holes. Open the required number of packets for each plant and thoroughly mix the inoculant powder into the upper 10 inches of backfill soil. a. Mycorrhizal fungal inoculant shall be added to the plant pits b. c. according to plant size.

The application rates for mycorrhizal fungal packets shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Submit the purchasing receipt showing the total quantity purchased for the Project prior to installation. Submit empty packets of fungal spore inoculant to the Owner’s Representative for verification of use. Owner’s Representative will excavate tree pits to determine presence of mycorrhizal fungal inoculant.

15. Tree staking shall be provided as shown on the contract documents and according Parks Dept standards. The contractor shall evaluate the job conditions, rock locations and determine if the specified tree staking solution is sufficient for each location.

All plants shall be watered immediately following planting as necessary to thoroughly moisten rootball and plant pit loam and thereafter shall be inspected

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 14

frequently for watering needs and watered, as required, to provide adequate moisture in the planting pit. The Contractor shall inspect tree pits 24 hours after initial watering to confirm that they are draining properly. If surface water or excessively saturated plant pit soils exist, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner’s Representative. The Owner’s Representative will recommend remedial measures based upon site conditions.

I. Keeping Trees Plumb:

J.

1.

2.

Contractor shall keep trees plumb and upright at all times. To this end the Contractor shall monitor plants on a regular basis and, if a tree is moved out of plumb, then straighten the tree to a vertical, upright condition.

Reset trees that have moved out of plumb by carefully excavating the soil from the base of the rootball facing away from the direction of tilt and easing the tree upright into a vertical, plump position. Upon righting the tree, firmly press the soil around the base of the rootball to reset the tree.

Mulch material shall be placed over entire saucer areas of individual trees and shrubs and over the entire area of planting beds to a depth of 3 inches after settlement, not later than one week after planting. Do not apply mulch prior to the first watering of plant materials. Do not apply mulch prior to placement of surface applied fertilizer and verification of placement by the Owner’s

Representative.

K. Pruning:

1.

2.

3.

As directed by the Owner’s Representative, each plant shall be pruned in accordance with the Workmanship requirements of "Pruning Standards" for Class I, fine pruning, to preserve the natural character of the plant.

Tree pruning, as required, shall be undertaken to the full height of affected trees.

All dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed. Never cut a leader.

L. Antidesiccant shall be applied to all evergreen and broadleaf evergreen plants in that are planted during the fall season if planted after Nov. 1 according to manufacturer's application recommendations and as directed by the Owner’s

Representative.

M. Spraying of insecticides or herbicides shall be done by State-licensed professionals. Spraying for insects, pests and diseases shall conform to the

National Arborist Association Standards under the section entitled "Standards for

Pesticide Application Operations", as currently adopted and as approved by the

Owner’s Representative. All insecticides, pesticides, and herbicides shall be

EPA-approved.

N. If planting is done after lawn preparation or installation, proper protection of lawn areas shall be provided. Any damage resulting from planting operations shall be repaired immediately at no cost to the Owner.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 15

O.

P.

In the event that rock or underground construction Work or obstructions are encountered in any plant pit or bed excavation Work, alternate locations will be selected by the Owner’s Representative. Relocation of plant pits or beds shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Provide the Owner’s Representative with no less than 48 hours notice of obstruction so that a site visit can be scheduled to establish new locations for plants.

Absolutely no debris may be left on the site. Repair any damage to site as directed by the Owner’s Representative, at no additional cost.

A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. Location and elevations have been provided on the Construction Documents. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the Construction Documents and elevations provided and notify the City’s Representative of any discrepancies found prior to field adjustments.

3.3 UNDERDRAIN CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Underdrain Pipe Installation:

The underdrain pipe shall be laid horizontal at the bottom of the trench and the pipe sections joined securely with the appropriate coupling fittings or bands, or other necessary connections per the Manufacturer’s recommendations to provide a complete drainage system connected to the City storm drains. The upgrade end of pipe installations shall be closed with suitable plugs to prevent entry of soil materials. The pipe shall be installed in such a manner that continuous outflow is provided during construction. The drainage system shall be laid at a minimum of

1 percent slope to drain outlets. Any pipe that is damaged, crushed, or not lain properly shall be removed and replaced at the direction of the City’s

Representative with no additional cost to the City.

B.

C.

Underdrain Outlet Protectors:

The foundation shall be prepared to the required depth, forms set rigidly to the line and grade designated, and the concrete placed, spaded, vibrated, and finished with a wood float to a true and even surface. When completed, the concrete shall be cured as specified in Item 410 “Concrete Structures”. Precast units shall be placed on a foundation prepared to the proper depth and the pipe underdrain shall be firmly secured to the outlet protector. The outlet protector shall be placed in such a manner that the underdrain lateral has a uniform slope to ensure proper drainage. Abrupt changes in slope along any portion of the lateral will not be permitted.

Sand Drainage Layer:

After the underdrain pipe installation has been inspected and approved by the

City’s Representative, sand material shall be placed in a layer to a minimum height of 3 inches above the top of the pipe, surrounding the pipe in a blanket layer that is the full width of the trench.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 16

The filter fabric shall be installed as shown on the Construction Documents.

Care shall be taken during the placement of the planting soil, to prevent damage to the fabric and underdrain.

E. Protection

The Contractor shall protect the underdrain from contamination prior to the placement of successive courses. Underdrains contaminated or crushed are subject to removal and replacement at no cost to the City.

3.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is planted and shall continue until Final Acceptance. See Section 029520 – Landscape Maintenance for maintenance requirements. Contractor shall plant all plants at one time. Final acceptance will not be provided on various phases of construction for the roadwork.

B. Maintenance shall consist of keeping the plants in a healthy growing condition and shall include, but is not limited to watering, weeding, cultivating, pruning, remulching, straightening of trees to, a plumb position, removal of dead material, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, and maintaining the planting saucer.

C. Plants shall be inspected for watering needs at least twice each week and watered to promote plant growth and vitality. The following watering rates assume that the soil is free draining. If the on site conditions do not ensure a free draining soil, then notify the Owner’s Representative in writing of this condition. Watering rates for trees, shrubs, ground cover, vines and perennials in free draining soils are presented here as guidelines to ensure that the top six inches of plant bed soil remains moist at all times. Actual watering rates may vary depending upon soil conditions.

1.

2.

3.

4.

For trees in lawn or mulched beds, apply water to the ground surface directly under the canopy. Water shall be applied at a sufficiently slow rate to prevent run off from the soil surface, but great enough to equal 0.2 inches of water per square foot of canopy area per hour for 5 hours per week.

Planting beds and individual plant pits shall be kept free of weeds, and mulch shall be replaced as required to maintain the specified layer of mulch. Beds and individual pits shall be neat in appearance and maintained to the designed layout.

Plants that die during the maintenance period shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor within one week of notification and replaced during that growing season, unless directed otherwise by the Owner’s

Representative.

Work of pruning, fertilizing, spraying, and similar activities shall be undertaken only by Certified Arborists and licensed chemical applicators, as pertinent to the Work being performed.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 17

D.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE

A. Upon completion of all planting Work, the Contractor shall request in writing that the Owner’s Representative formally inspect the planting Work.

B. If plant materials and Workmanship are acceptable, the Owner’s Representative will issue a written Certificate of Conditional Acceptance to the Contractor.

C. Following the issuance of the Certificate of Conditional Acceptance to the

Contractor, the Contractor shall maintain the plants for a minimum 30 day

Monitoring Period. At the end of the Monitoring Period, the plant material will be inspected by the Owner’s Representative to determine whether or not all planting

Work has been performed to the requirements of this Section.

D.

During the maintenance period, any decline in the condition of plantings shall require the Contractor to take immediate action to identify potential problems and undertake corrective measures. If required, the Contractor shall engage professional arborists and/or horticulturalists to inspect plant materials and to identify problems and recommend corrective procedures. The Owner’s

Representative shall be immediately advised of such actions. Inspection and recommendation reports shall be submitted to the Owner’s Representative.

Acceptance Standards at end of the Monitoring Period: If plant material is reviewed when it is in full leaf, leaves shall be plump with water with a shape indicative of the species and shall be free of insect, pest and disease damage.

Twigs shall have living cambium for their full length. Twigs and branches shall have a full bud set for their full length, including terminal buds. Trunks and branches shall be free of frost cracks; sun scald; damage due to insects, pests, and disease; structural defects; and damage resulting from machinery or tools.

Plant material inspected and reviewed when the plants are not in full leaf shall have twigs, branches and trunks meeting the above requirements. All plants regardless of the season of review shall have a minimum of 75 percent healthy, balanced branching structure with a healthy terminal leader(s) with viable terminal bud(s).

E. If any number of plants do not meet these Acceptance Standards at the time of inspection, or if in the Owner’s Representative's opinion Workmanship is unacceptable, written notice will be given by the Owner’s Representative to the

Contractor in the form of a punch list, which itemizes necessary planting replacements and/or other deficiencies to be remedied. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of all plants shall be extended until replacements are made or other deficiencies are corrected. All plants that do not meet these

Acceptance Standards shall be removed from the Project within seven days of receipt of the punch list. Replacements shall conform in all respects to the

Specifications for new plants and shall be planted in the same manner.

F. Following the correction of all Punch List deficiencies, the Contractor shall request in writing that the Owner’s Representative formally inspect the planting

Work. If plant materials and Workmanship are acceptable, the Owner’s

Representative will issue a written Certificate of Final Acceptance to the

Contractor.

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 18

3.6 GUARANTEE

A. The date of the Certificate of Final Acceptance shall establish the beginning of the maintenance period and the commencement of the required one-year guarantee and establishment period for planting Work.

B. At the end of the guarantee and establishment period, a final inspection will be held to determine whether any plant material replacements are required. Each plant shall be plumb, shall have a character that is natural for its species as determined by the Owner’s Representative, and shall conform to the Acceptance

Standards described in this Section. Plants found to be unacceptable shall be removed promptly from the site and replaced according to this Section. A final inspection will be made after the replacement plants have lived through one year.

C. All replacements shall be plants of the same kind and size specified in the

PLANT LIST. The cost shall be borne by the Contractor, except for possible replacements due to vandalism or neglect on the part of others.

END OF SECTION

MANSFIELD ROAD

PLANTING 329300- 19

SECTION 7

PERMITS

The CONTRACTOR is required to obtain a Right-of-Way Permit from the City (No Fees) for this

Project prior to the start of the project.

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

TRACKING NO

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT – ENGINEERING DIVISION

PERMIT NO

RIGHT OF WAY

________________________

ASSIGNED BY PUBLIC WORKS DEPT

________________________

ASSIGNED BY PUBLIC WORKS DEPT

PERMIT

LINE LOCATE TRACKING NO

FOR WATER /SEWER LOCATE REQUESTS

PERMIT MUST BE APPROVED PRIOR TO COMMENCING WORK

PERMIT NUMBER IS REQUIRED

CITY ORDINANCE SECTION 19 ARTICLE II

48 HOURS NOTICE IS REQUIRED FOR CITY LINE LOCATES

EMERGENCY: YES  NO 

If Yes, Describe: ______________________________________________

________________________

ASSIGNED BY PUBLIC WORKS DEPT

LOCATES NEEDED: 

WATER/SEWER

SIGNS/SIGNALS

Line locates must be complete prior to project start date.

PROVIDE VALID CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE TO INCLUDE CITY OF CEDAR HILL AS A CERTIFICATE HOLDER.

Failure to fill in ALL information may result in delay of permit approval. Two sets of plans MUST be submitted with this application.

The Inspector MUST be notified prior to starting and at the completion of the job.

Failure to obtain a permit, show proof of permit or violation of special conditions may result in a citation and/or fines.

Contact the City of Cedar Hill Public Works office at (972)291-5126 X 2853 to request marking of existing City utility lines.

This permit will expire on the project completion date listed below.

Permit will be voided if work does not commence within 10 days of permit approval. *

Read the “Conditions of the Permit ” on the reverse side, “Sign and Date” at the bottom – failure to do so may delay permit approval

Permit Does Not Relieve The Owner/Contractor The Responsibility Of Contacting Dig Tess and Other Utility Owners.

DATE OF APPLICATION:

PERMITEE:

C O N T R A C T O R C O M P A N Y N A M E A D D R E S S C I T Y S T A T E Z I P C O M P A N Y P H O N E N U M B E R

CONTACT FOR PERMITEE: _________________________________ PHONE: _____________________ FAX: ______________________

N A M E D I R E C T N U M B E R

CONTRACTING PARTY:

U T I L I T Y O W N E R C O M P A N Y N A M E A D D R E S S C I T Y S T A T E Z I P C O M P A N Y P H O N E N U M B E R

CONTACT FOR CONTRACTING PARTY: _________________________________ PHONE: _____________________________________________

N A M E D I R E C T N U M B E R

DEVELOPMENT:

P R O J E C T N A M E A D D R E S S

EMERGENCY CONTACT:

JOB FOREMAN:

N A M E C O M P A N Y A F T E R H O U R S P H O N E N U M B E R

LOCATION OF PROJECT:

M A P S C O N U M B E R

CITY OWNED LINE LOCATES WILL BE DONE AT THE LOCATION SHOWN ON PLANS

DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT:

U T I L I T Y T Y P E

N E A R E S T I N T E R S E C T I O N

S I Z E & C O N S T R U C T I O N M E T H O D ( B O R E / O P E N T R E N C H )

PROJECT START DATE: _____________________________ ESTIMATED COMPLETION

DATE

: ___________________________

If THE START DATE CHANGES OR THE PROJECT EXCEEDS THE COMPLETION DATE CONTRACTOR MUST APPLY FOR A NEW PERMIT.

SIGNATURE OF APPLICANT: ______________________________ PRINTED NAME OF APPLICANT____________________________

For City use below this line------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2 SETS OF PLANS SUBMITTED? :

YES NO

PERMIT APPROVED BY:

ENGINEERING NOTES: ______________________________________ DATE OF APPROVAL:

INSPECTOR:

*

MIKE CHAPMAN - 469-865-8010 ROBERT WOODBURY – 469-628-6344

THIS PERMIT IS COMPLETED & ACCEPTED: ______________________________________ DATE: _________________

COMMENTS: _________________________________________________________________________________________

CC: Water Tech/Signs & Signals Contractor Inspector ORIGINAL to Active File

“SIGN BACK OF FORM”

P:\ROW Permits\PERMITS FOR ROW MANAGEMENT\FORMS\PERMIT APPLICATION 10-02-2013.doc

Page 1 of 2

CITY OF CEDAR HILL

PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT – ENGINEERING DIVISION

CONDITIONS OF THE PERMIT

1. Contractor shall comply with City of Cedar Hill Right-of-Way management ordinance No. 2001-54. Plans shall clearly show the proposed facilities with respect to existing roadway, driveways, street intersections and visible structures within 10’ of project. Plans shall also include a traffic control plan signed and sealed by a “Licensed Texas Professional Engineer”. In addition, the plans shall clearly show the limits of construction. Street names and other pertinent labels to describe the location of the proposed facilities shall be legible.

2. Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain erosion control devices per plans along project, comply with all Cedar Hill Storm Water Pollution Prevention specifications and with NCTCOG’s storm water management practices for construction activities.

3. Contractor shall repair all areas disturbed, damaged and destroyed which shall include, but is not limited to the following: a) All yards with sods shall be re-sodded. b) Contractor shall re-install iron rods and other property markers disturbed by construction. c) All sprinkler systems shall be repaired immediately after back fill is complete. d) Manholes, inlets and other structures must be replaced or repaired if damaged.

4. Contractor shall keep street free of dirt, silt and other debris and sweep street at the end of the working day.

5. Contractor shall Curlex & seed and/or hydro mulch all disturbed areas and include 4” of top soil. Seeding shall be as required by City specifications.

6. Contractor shall comply with MUTCD traffic control for work areas and per the traffic control plan for the project.

7. Clean up shall be conducted every 5’ behind excavation crew.

8. All excavation within City ROW requires mechanical compactions. Compaction test reports must be turned in to Public Works Department.

9. At the end of each work day, the contractor shall erect a temporary security fence at all excavations.

10. Contractor will not be issued another permit until all work (current & previous) has been approved by the

City.

11. Contractors listed on permits are responsible for all sub-contractors.

12. Non-conformance with the previously listed requirements will initiate a stop work order until corrections are made.

13. Upon completion of construction, make an appointment with Construction Inspector for Final Inspection.

14. A copy of the work permit MUST be kept with the Contractor on the job site for review by an Inspector, if requested.

SEE ATTACHED SPECIAL CONDITIONS

I hereby acknowledge and agree to the conditions of the permit.

__________________________________

CONTRACTOR

__________________________________

TITLE

__________________________________ _______________

_

SIGNATURE DATE

Date and Time Received By Public Works:

_______________________________________________

P:\ROW Permits\PERMITS FOR ROW MANAGEMENT\FORMS\PERMIT APPLICATION 10-02-2013.doc

Page 2 of 2

Appendix A – Project Details

FIGURE 1: PROJECT MAP

FIGURE 2: PROJECT SIGN

FIGURE 3: LAKEVIEW DRIVE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS

Figure 2: Project Sign

Figure 3: Lakeview Drive Construction Limits

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement